DO
AN
SOS
The children's hour
Eva March Tappan





Ba K*pt^—7-7











THE CHILDREN'S HOUR
IN TEN VOLUMES
ILLUSTRATED
VOLUME V





THE NEW KKK
public l;:'-.;-.ary
A'- . .!, LKN 'A AMD
'!..... »„N r jJNUATIONS
K L





Ferdinand and Ariel (page 433)






Between the dirk and the daylight, when the njght is Beginning to lower.
Comes a pause in the <Ws occupations, that is known as the Children's Hour


THE NEW YORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY
810166 A
ASTOR, LENOX A.MD
TILD£-N FOUNDATIONS
R 1935 L
COPYRIGHT I907 BY HOUGHTON, MIFFLIN AND COMPANY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


CONTENTS
TO THE CHILDREN xi
THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
Christian passes through the Wicket Gate John Bunyan 3
A Visit to the House of the Interpreter John Bunyan 7
At the House Beautiful John Bunyan 18
Christian's Fight with Apollyon .... John Bunyan 32
The Castle of Giant Despair John Bunyan 38
The Delectable Mountains John Bunyan 49
The Pilgrims wander from the Wat . . John Bunyan 54
The Celestial City John Bunyan 59
ROBINSON CRUSOE
Robinson Crusoe is shipwrecked .... Daniel Defoe 73
Unloading a Wreck Daniel Defoe 82
Robinson Crusoe's First Home on the Island
Daniel Defoe 89
Robinson Crusoe builds a Boat Daniel Defoe 97
The Mysterious Footprint Daniel Defoe 103
The Coming of Friday Daniel Defoe 119
Homeward Bound Daniel Defoe 130
GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
Gulliver is shipwrecked on the Coast of Lilliput
Jonathan Swift 141
Gulliver seizes the Enemy's Fleet . . Jonathan Swift 154
A Lilliputian Ode to the Man-Mountain Jonathan Swift 162
Among the Brobdingnagian Giants . . Jonathan Swift 164
Adventures in Brobdingnag Jonathan Swift 179
Gulliver's Escape Jonathan Swift 189


CONTENTS
DON QUIXOTE
Don Quixote determines to become a Knight
Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 207
The Fight with the Windmills
Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 215
The Innkeeper's Bill . . . Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 222
The Battle or the Sheep . Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 227
The Conquest of Mambrino's Helmet
Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 235
Don Quixote's Battle with the Giants
Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 241
Don Quixote meets the Lions Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 245
The Ride on the Wooden Horse
Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 256
The Three Thousand Three Hundred and Odd Lashes
Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 265
The Return and Death op Don Quixote
Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 272
THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
The Story of Aladdin; or, the Wonderful Lamp . . 287
An Baba and the Forty Thieves 315
Sindbad the Sailor 336
THE TRAVELS OF BARON MUNCHAUSEN
The Baron's First Wanderings . . Eodolph Eric Baspe 373
The Baron's Journey to St. Petersburg
Rodolph Eric Baspe 378
The Baron's Wonderful Horse . . Eodolph Eric Baspe 381
The Baron's Cold Day Rodolph Eric Baspe 385
TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
The Comedy of Errors .... Charles and Mary Lamb 391
The Merchant of Venice . . . Charles and Mary Lamb 410
The Tempest Charles and Mary Lamb 428


ILLUSTRATIONS
Ferdinand and Abiel (p. 433)
Sir John Everett Millais Colored Frontispiece
Christian is habnessed fob the Pilgrimage
David Scott, B. S. A. 30
Caught Christian and Hopeful Asleep
David Scott, B. S. A. 42
The Second Raft J. Finnemore 84
The Print of a Man's Naked Foot on the Shore
J. Finnemore 108
Producing his Credentials T. Morten 148
The Huge Creature trod Short T. Morten 170
Hurled away both Knight and Horse . . Gustave Dori 220
A Hideous Genie of Gigantic Size appeared
Bobert Smirlce, B. A. 292
The Great Heaps of Gold dazzled heb Eyes
Bobert Smirke, B. A. 314
Pubsued by the Rocs J. D. Batten 354
The Lion jumped fobward into the Cbocodile's Mouth
Gustave Dori 374
The Vessel will be dashed to Pieces .... 6. Bomney 426





TO THE CHILDREN
THIS volume is made up of stories from seven famous
books. These books are as different as they can
possibly be; and yet there are not many boys and girls who
do not like every one of them. The chief reason for this
is because they seem so true, so much more "real" than
most other stories. When you read about Tom Thumb,
for instance, you do not really believe that there ever was
a little boy no bigger than his mother's thumb; at least,
you do not believe it in the same way that you believe
the sun shines or the wind blows; but when you read
"Robinson Crusoe," you feel as if every word of it
must be true.
The first of these books is "The Pilgrim's Progress."
In one way it is a little like a fable; that is, when you read
it the first time, it is simply a good story. Afterwards —
sometimes a long while afterwards — you read it again
or sit thinking about it, and suddenly you see that it has
another meaning, that it is more than the story of a man
who makes a wonderful journey. This book was written
in jail by a man named John Bunyan. The English
laws of that time would not allow any one to preach
except clergymen of the Church of England. Bunyan,
however, felt that it would be wicked for him to obey
these laws, so he kept on preaching. He was thrown
into prison, and the prisons of those days were horrible
places. "If you will promise not to preach again, you
ix


TO THE CHILDREN
shall be free," said the officers. "If you let me out to-day
I will preach again to-morrow," declared Bunyan; and
meanwhile he preached to the other prisoners. He
thought of his wife and children and of how little he
could do to support them while he was in jail; he thought
of his little blind daughter Mary; but still he said to him-
self, "I must, I must do it." For twelve long years he
stayed in prison. He made tags for shoe laces to sell to
help his family; and he wrote the book that has been read
by more people than any other volume except the Bible.
The second book, "Robinson Crusoe," was written by
Daniel Defoe; and he, too, knew what it was to be in jail.
He was not imprisoned for preaching, but for his po-
litical writings. Once when he had written a pamphlet
that did not please the authorities, he was condemned to
stand in the pillory. The people took his part, and,
instead of throwing stones at him, they dropped roses
about him and bought thousands of copies of a poem
that he had written while in jail.
He wrote many books, but his best, "Robinson
Crusoe," was produced after he had become a middle-
aged man and had some money and a big, homely house
with plenty of ground for his favorite gardening. The
way the book came to be written was this. A sailor
named Alexander Selkirk spent more than four years
alone on the island of Juan Fernandez. When he was
rescued and brought to England, many people went to
gaze at him in his goatskin clothes and to hear him talk
about his life on the island. Defoe went with the others,
and he never forgot the stories told by the sailor in
goatskins. Seven years later he worked in his garden
x


TO THE CHILDREN
and thought about the desert island. Then he went into
his house and wrote the book that everybody likes,
"Robinson Crusoe."
"Gulliver's Travels " was written by an Irish clergy-
man named Jonathan Swift. He was a strange man.
Some people said he was a genius, and some said he had
always been a little insane. When he wrote, he often
seemed to care for nothing but to say the most cutting,
scornful things that he could. There was one class of
persons, however, who loved him from the bottom of
their hearts, and they were the poor people about his
home in Ireland. It is true that he sometimes scolded
them, but they saw straight through his grumbling and
understood that he really cared for them and wanted to
help them, and they loved him and trusted him. He
lived more than two hundred years ago, but the Irish
have never forgotten him; and even to this day, if you
should wander about in Ireland, you would see in many
a little cottage people gathered around the fire, telling
over and over the stories that their grandmothers had
told them of his kind heart and his peculiar ways.
"The Pilgrim's Progress," "Robinson Crusoe," and
"Gulliver's Travels" were all written by men of the
British Isles, but our fourth book, "Don Quixote," was
written by a Spaniard named Cervantes. He was a
soldier part of his life and as valiant a fighter as his own
hero. For five years he was a prisoner of war; he was
poor and sick and in one trouble after another; but he
was always brave and cheerful and good-humored. In
his day, the Spaniards read few books except queer old
romances of chivalry, the sort of tale in which a great
xi


TO THE CHILDREN
champion goes out with his squire to wander over the
world in search of adventures. He makes thieves give
back what they have stolen, he sets prisoners free, he
rescues beautiful maidens who have been dragged away
from their homes; in short, he roams about making peo-
ple do whatever he thinks proper. Sometimes he takes a
castle all by himself, sometimes he gets the better of a
whole group of champions or a host of giants or even
a dragon or two. Cervantes's book makes fun of such
tales as these. His hero attacks a terrible company of
giants standing on a plain all ready to destroy him; but
the giants prove to be windmills, and their sails give him
many a heavy blow before his fight with them is over.
Another time, he finds the giants in his very bedroom;
and the courageous knight cuts off their heads as fast
as he can swing his sword. Blood flows like water; only
when a light is brought, it does not prove to be blood
but — well, it is not fair to tell the rest of the story.
We must let Cervantes do that for himself in "Don
Quixote's Battle with the Giants."
The fifth book, the "Arabian Nights," is a mystery.
We do not know who composed the stories or who
brought them together in one collection. We cannot
even tell where they came from. The most we can say
positively is that two hundred years ago a Frenchman
traveling through the East came across them in some
Arabian manuscripts and translated them into French.
Whether they came in the first place from Arabia or
Persia or India, whether they were composed five or six
hundred years ago or at least one thousand, no one
can say. Many learned scholars have tried in vain to
xii


TO THE CHILDREN
answer these questions; but if we had to choose between
having the stories and knowing who wrote them, I do
not believe that any boy or girl who had read even one
of them would find it difficult to make a choice.
The sixth book, "The Travels of Baron Munchau-
sen," is said to have been written by a German named
Raspe; but it is just as well not to believe this state-
ment too positively, for it is quite possible that Raspe
had nothing to do with the book. Learned scholars
have held profound discussions on the source of the
stories. One in particular, that of the frozen tunes
which began to play of themselves as soon as they
thawed, has been found in some form in several
countries. The best match for the Baron's version
is the old tale of the merchants who set out one day
to buy furs. When they came to a river, they saw
the fur dealers standing on the opposite shore. The
dealers held up their furs and seemed to be shouting
their prices, but it was so cold that the words froze in the
air. Then the merchants went out on the ice and built
a great fire. It warmed the air overhead, and the words
thawed and came down. But long before this, the
dealers had gone home. The merchants thought the
prices too high, so they, too, went home; and that was
the end of the tale. The "Travels" is full of stories as
absurd as this, but told in such a way that while you
are reading them, and sometimes for as much as five
minutes afterwards, you feel as if they were really true.
The seventh and last of the books is the plays of
Shakespeare. A play always contains a story, and it
is the stories of some of Shakespeare's dramas that are
xiii


TO THE CHILDREN
given here. In the real plays there is much more than
stories, however, because Shakespeare was not only a
story-teller but also a poet. A poet must express what
he sees and thinks in a way to give pleasure and he must
see more than other people. Now when Shakespeare
puts a thought into words, we find that no one else has
expressed it so well. Moreover, he sees more clearly
than any other writer how a person would feel and be-
have in various circumstances. As we read the plays,
we say to ourselves of one character after another, "That
is just the way I should feel if I were that person."
We think of them as real people. We talk of what they
would have done if circumstances had been different.
It is only a great genius who can make out of words
characters that seem almost as real as the people around
us, but this is what William Shakespeare has done.


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
■





CHRISTIAN PASSES THROUGH
THE WICKET GATE
By John Bunyan
IN process of time Christian got up to the Gate.
Now over the Gate there was written, Knock and it
shall be opened unto you. He knocked therefore more
then once or twice, saying, —
"May I now enter here? Will he within
Open to sorry me, though I have bin
An undeserving Rebel? Then shall I
Not fail to sing his lasting praise on high."
At last there came a grave Person to the Gate named
Good-Will, who asked Who was there? and whence he
came ? and what he would have?
Chr. Here is a poor burdened sinner. I come from
the City of Destruction, but am going to Mount Zion,
that I may be delivered from the wrath to come. I would
therefore, Sir, since I am informed that by this Gate is
the way thither, know if you are willing to let me in.
Good-Will. I am willing with all my heart, said he;
and with that he opened the Gate.
So when Christian was stepping in, the other gave him
e, pull. Then said Christian, What means that? The
other told him, A little distance from this Gate, there is
erected a strong Castle, of which Beelzebub is the Captain;
from thence both he and they that are with him shoot
3


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
arrows at those that come up to this Gate, if haply they
may dye before they can enter in. Then said Christian,
I rejoyce and tremble. So when he was got in, the Man
of the Gate asked him, Who directed him thither?
Chr. Evangelist bid me come hither and knock (as I
did); and he said that you, Sir, would tell me what I
must do.
Good-Will. An open door is set before thee, and no
man can shut it.
Chr. Now I begin to reap the benefits of my hazards.
Good-Will. But how is it that you came alone?
Chr. Because none of my Neighbours saw their dan-
ger, as I saw mine.
Good-Will. Did any of them know of your coming?
Chr. Yes, my Wife and Children saw me at the
first, and called after me to turn again; also some of my
Neighbours stood crying and calling after me to return;
but I put my fingers in my ears, and so came on
my way.
Good-Will. But did none of them follow you, to per-
suade you to go back?
Chr. Yes, both Obstinate and Pliable; but when they
saw that they could not prevail, Obstinate went railing
back, but Pliable came with me a little way.
Good-Will. But why did he not come through?
Chr. We indeed came both together, until we came at
the Slow of Dispond, into the which we also suddenly
fell. And then was my Neighbour Pliable discouraged,
and would not adventure further. Wherefore getting out
again on that side next to his own house, he told me I
should possess the brave countrey alone for him; so he
4


THE WICKET GATE
went his way, and I came mine: he after Obstinate, and I
to this Gate.
Good-Will. Then said Good-Will, Alas, poor man, is
the Ccelestial Glory of so small esteem with him, that
he counteth it not worth running the hazards of a few
difficulties to obtain it?
Chr. Truly, said Christian, I have said the truth of
Pliable, and if I should also say all the truth of myself,
it will appear there is no betterment 'twixt him and my-
self. 'T is true, he went back to his own house, but I
also turned aside to go in the way of death, being
persuaded thereto by the carnal arguments of one Mr.
Worldly Wiseman.
Good-Will. O, did he light upon you? What! he
would have had you a sought for ease at the hands of
Mr. Legality. They are both of them a very cheat. But
did you take his counsel?
Chr. Yes, as far as I durst: I went to find out Mr.
Legality, until I thought that the Mountain that stands
by his house would have fallen upon my head; wherefore
there I was forced to stop.'
Good-Will. That Mountain has been the death of
many, and will be the death of many more; 't is well you
escaped being by it dashed in pieces.
Chr. Why truly I do not know what had become of
me there, had not Evangelist happily met me again,
as I was musing in the midst of my dumps; but't was
God's mercy that he came to me again, for else I had
never come hither. But now I am come, such a one
as I am, more fit indeed for death by that Mountain
than thus to stand talking with my Lord; but O, what a
5


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
favor is this to me, that yet I am admitted entrance
here!
Good-Will. We make no objections against any; not-
withstanding all that they have done before they come
hither, they in no wise are cast out; and therefore, good
Christian, come a little way with me, and I will teach
thee about the way thou must go. Look before thee; dost
thou see this narrow way? That is the way thou must
go; it was cast up by the Patriarchs, Prophets, Christ, his
Apostles; and it is as straight as a rule can make it: This
is the way thou must go.
Chr. But said Christian, Is there no turnings nor
windings, by which a Stranger may lose the way?
Good-Will. Yes, there are many ways butt down upon
this, and they are crooked and wide: But thus thou may-
est distinguish the right from the wrong, that only being
straight and narrow.
Then I saw in my Dream, that Christian asked him
further If he could not help him off with his Burden that
was upon his back; for as yet he had not got rid thereof,
nor could he by any means get it off without help.
He told him, As to the Burden, be content to bear it,
until thou comest to the place of Deliverance; for there
it will fall from thy back itself.
Then Christian began to gird up his loins, and to
address himself to his Journey. So the other told him,
that by that he was gone some distance from the Gate,
he would come at the House of the Interpreter, at whose
door he should knock, and he would show him excellent
things. Then Christian took his leave of his Friend, and
he again bid him God speed.
6


A VISIT TO THE HOUSE OF THE
INTERPRETER
By John Bunyan
THEN Christian went on till he came at the House
of the Interpreter, where he knocked over and over;
at last one came to the door, and asked Who was there?
Chr. Sir, here is a Travailler, who was bid by an ac-
quaintance of the Good-man of this house to call here
for my profit; I would therefore speak with the Master
of the House. So he called for the Master of the house,
who after a little time came to Christian, and asked him
what he would have?
Chr. Sir, said Christian, I am a man that am come
from the City of Destruction, and am going to the Mount
Zion; and I was told by the Man that stands at the Gate,
at the head of this way, that if I called here, you would
shew me excellent things, such as would be an help to
me in my Journey.
Inter. Then said the Interpreter, Come in, I will shew
thee that which will be profitable to thee. So he com-
manded his man to light the Candle, and bid Christian
follow him: so he had him into a private room, and bid
his man open a door; the which when he had done,
Christian saw the Picture of a very grave Person hang
up against the wall; and this was the fashion of it. It
had eyes lift up to Heaven, the best of Books in its
7


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
hand, the Law of Truth was written upon its lips, the
World was behind his back. It stood as if it pleaded
with men, and a Crown of Gold did hang over his head.
Chr. Then said Christian, What means this?
Inter. The Man whose Picture this is, is one of a
thousand; he can beget Children, travel in birth with
Children, and nurse them himself when they are born.
And whereas thou seest him with eyes lift up to Heaven,
the best of Books in his hand, and the Law of Truth
writ on his lips, it is to shew thee that his work is to
know and unfold dark things to sinners; even as also
thou seest him stand as if he pleaded with Men; and
whereas thou seest the World as cast behind him, and
that a Crown hangs over his head, that is to shew thee
that slighting and despising the things that are present,
for the love that he hath to his Master's service, he is
sure in the world that comes next to have Glory for his
reward. Now, said the Interpreter, I have shewed thee
this Picture first, because the Man whose Picture this
is, is the only man whom the Lord of the place whither
thou art going hath authorized to be thy Guide in all
difficult places thou mayest meet with in the way;
wherefore take good heed to what I have shewed thee,
and bear well in thy mind what thou hast seen, lest in
thy Journey thou meet with some that pretend to lead
thee right, but their way goes down to death.
Then he took him by the hand, and led him into a
very large Parlour that was full of dust, because never
swept; the which after he had reviewed a little while,
the Interpreter called for a man to sweep. Now when
he began to sweep, the dust began so abundantly to
8


THE HOUSE OF THE INTERPRETER
fly about, that Christian had almost therewith been
choaked. Then said the Interpreter to a Damsel that
stood by, Bring hither the Water, and sprinkle the
Room; the which when she had done, it was swept and
cleansed with pleasure.
Chr. Then said Christian, What means this?
Inter. The Interpreter answered, This Parlour is
the heart of a man that was never sanctified by the sweet
Grace of the Gospel: the dust is his Original Sin and
inward Corruptions, that have defiled the whole Man.
He that began to sweep at first, is the Law; but She
that brought water, and did sprinkle it, is the Gospel.
Now, whereas thou sawest that so soon as the first began
to sweep, the dust did so fly about that the Room by
him could not be cleansed, but that thou wast almost
choaked therewith; this is to shew thee, that the Law,
instead of cleansing the heart (by its working) from sin,
doth revive, put strength into, and increase it in the soul,
as it doth discover and forbid it, but doth not give power
to subdue.
Again, as thou sawest the Damsel sprinkle the room
with Water, upon which it was cleansed with pleasure;
this is to shew thee, that when the Gospel comes in the
sweet and precious influences thereof to the heart, then I
say, even as thou sawest the Damsel lay the dust by
sprinkling the floor with Water, so is sin vanquished and
subdued, and the soul made clean, through the Faith of
it, and consequently fit for the King of Glory to inhabit.
I saw moreover in my Dream, that the Interpreter
took him by the hand, and had him into a little room,
where sat two little Children, each one in his chair.
9


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
The name of the eldest was Passion, and the name of
the other Patience. Passion seemed to be much dis-
content; but Patience was very quiet. Then Christian
asked, What is the reason of the discontent of Passion?
The Interpreter answered, The Governour of them would
have him stay for his best things till the beginning of
the next year; but he will have all now; but Patience is
willing to wait.
Then I saw that one came to Passion, and brought
him a bag of Treasure, and poured it down at bis feet,
the which he took up and rejoyced therein; and withall,
laughed Patience to scorn. But I beheld but a while,
and he had lavished all away, and had nothing left him
but Rags.
Chr. Then said Christian to the Interpreter, Ex-
pound this matter more fully to me.
Inter. So he said, These two Lads are Figures:
Passion, of the Men of this World; and Patience of the
Men of that which is to come; for as here thou seest,
Passion will have all now this year, that is to say, in
this world; so are the men of this world: they must
have all their good things now, they cannot stay till
next year, that is, until the next world, for their portion
of good. That proverb, A Bird in the Hand is worth
two in the Bush, is of more authority with them then
are all the Divine testimonies of the good of the World
to come. But as thou sawest that he had quickly
lavished all away, and had presently left him nothing
but Raggs; so will it be with all such Men at the end of
this World.
Chr. Then said Christian, Now I see that Patience
10


THE HOUSE OF THE INTERPRETER
has the best wisdom, and that upon many accounts.
1. Because he stays for the best things. 2. And also
because he will have the Glory of his, when the other has
nothing but Raggs.
Inter. Nay, you may add another, to wit, the glory of
the next world will never wear out; but these are suddenly
gone. Therefore Passion had not so much reason to
laugh at Patience, because he had his good things first,
as Patience will have to laugh at Passion, because he had
his best things last; for first must give place to last,
because last must have his time to come: but last gives
place to nothing; for there is not another to succeed.
He therefore that hath his portion first, must needs have
a time to spend it; but he that hath his portion last, must
have it lastingly; therefore it is said of Dives, In thy
Lifetime thou hadest or receivedst thy good things, and
likewise Lazarus evil things; but now he is comforted,
and thou art tormented.
Chr. Then I perceive't is not best to covet things that
are now, but to wait for things to come.
Inter. You say the Truth: For the things which are
seen are Temporal; but the things that are not seen are
Eternal. But though this be so, yet since things present
and our fleshly appetite are such near neighbours one to
another; and, again, because things to come and carnal
sense are such strangers one to another; therefore it is
that the first of these so suddenly fall into amity, and
that distance is so continued between the second.
Then I saw in my Dream that the Interpreter took
Christian by the hand, and led him into a place where
was a Fire burning against a Wall, and one standing


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
by it, always casting Water upon it, to quench it; yet
did the Fire burn higher and hotter.
Then said Christian, What means this?
The Interpreter answered, This Fire is the work of
Grace that is wrought in the heart; he that casts Water
upon it, to extinguish and put it out, is the Devil; but in
that thou seest the Fire notwithstanding burn higher
and hotter, thou shalt also see the reason of that. So
he had him about to the backside of the wall, where he
saw a man with a Vessel of Oyl in his hand, of the which
he did also continually cast (but secretly) into the Fire.
Then said Christian, What means this?
The Interpreter answered, This is Christ, who con-
tinually, with the Oyl of his Grace, maintains the work
already begun in the heart: by the means of which,
notwithstanding what the Devil can do, the souls of his
people prove gracious still. And in that thou sawest that
the man stood behind the Wall to maintain the Fire,
this is to teach thee that it is hard for the tempted to
see how this word of Grace is maintained in the soul.
I saw also that the Interpreter took him again by the
hand, and led him into a pleasant place, where was
builded a stately Palace, beautiful to behold; at the sight
of which Christian was greatly delighted: he saw also
upon the top thereof, certain Persons walking, who were
cloathed all in gold.
Then said Christian May we go in thither?
Then the Interpreter took him, and led him up toward
the door of the Palace; and behold, at the door stood a
great company of men, as desirous to go in, but durst
not. There also sat a Man at a little distance from the
12


THE HOUSE OF THE INTERPRETER
door, at a table-side, with a Book and his Inkhorn
before him, to take the name of him that should enter
therein. He saw also, that in the door-way stood many
men in armour to keep it, being resolved to do the men
that would enter what hurt and mischief they could.
Now was Christian somewhat in a muse. At last, when
every man started back for fear of the armed men,
Christian saw a man of a very stout countenance come
up to the man that sat there to write, saying, Set down
my name, Sir: the which when he had done, he saw the
man draw his Sword, and put an Helmet upon his head,
and rush toward the door upon the armed men, who laid
upon him with deadly force; but the man, not at all
discouraged, fell to cutting and hacking most fiercely.
So after he had received and given many wounds to those
that attempted to keep him out, he cut his way through
them all, and pressed forward into the Palace, at which
there was a pleasant voice heard from those that were
within, even of the Three that walked upon the top of the
Palace, saying,—
Come in, Come in;
Eternal Glory thou shalt win.
So he went in, and was cloathed with such Garments
as they. Then Christian smiled, and said, I think verily
I know the meaning of this.
Now, said Christian, let me go hence. Nay stay, said
the Interpreter, till I have shewed thee a little more, and
after that thou shalt go on thy way. So he took him by
the hand again, and led him into a very dark room,
where there sat a Man in an Iron Cage.
Now the Man, to look on, seemed very sad; he sat
13


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
with his eyes looking down to the ground, his hands
folded together; and he sighed as if he would break his
heart. Then said Christian, What means this? At which
the Interpreter bid him talk with the Man.
Then said Christian to the Man, What art thou?
The man answered, I am what I was not once.
Chr. What wast thou once?
Man. The Man said, I was once a fair and flourish-
ing Professor, both in mine own eyes, and also in the
eyes of others; I once was, as I thought, fair for the
Ccelestial City, and had then even joy at the thoughts
that I should get thither.
Chr. Well, but what art thou now?
Man. I am now a man of Despair, and am shut up in
it, as in this Iron Cage. I cannot get out; O now I
cannot.
Chr. But how comest thou in this condition?
Man. I left off to watch and be sober; I laid the reins
upon the neck of my lusts; I sinned against the light of
the Word and the goodness of God; I have grieved the
Spirit, and he is gone; I tempted the Devil, and he is
come to me; I have provoked God to anger, and he has
left me; I have so hardened my heart, that I cannot
repent.
Then said Christian to the Interpreter, But are there
no hopes for such a man as this? Ask him, said the
Interpreter. Nay, said Christian, pray Sir, do you.
Inter. Then said the Interpreter, Is there no hope,
but you must be kept in this Iron Cage of Despair?
Man. No, none at all.
Inter. Why ? the Son of the Blessed is very pitiful.
14


THE HOUSE OF THE INTERPRETER
Man. I have crucified him to myself afresh, I have
despised his Person, I have despised his Righteousness,
I have counted his Blood an unholy thing; I have done
despite to the Spirit of Grace. Therefore I have shut
myself out of all the Promises, and there now remains
to me nothing but threatnings, dreadful threatnings,
fearful threatnings of certain Judgement which shall
devour me as an Adversary.
Chr. For what did you bring yourself into this
condition?
Man. For the Lusts, Pleasures, and Profits of this
World; in the injoyment of which I did then promise
myself much delight; but now even every one of those
things also bite me, and gnaw me like a burning worm.
Chr. But canst thou not now repent and turn?
Man. God hath denied me repentance: his Word gives
me no encouragement to believe; yea, himself hath shut
me up in this Iron Cage; nor can all the men in the
world let me out. O Eternity! Eternity! how shall I
grapple with the misery that I must meet with in
Eternity!
Inter. Then said the Interpreter to Christian, Let
this man's misery be remembred by thee, and be an
everlasting caution to thee.
Chr. Well, said Christian, this is fearful; God help
me to watch and be sober, and to pray that I may shun
the cause of this man's misery. Sir, is it not time for me
to go on my way now?
Inter. Tarry till I shall shew thee one thing more,
and then thou shalt go on thy way.
So he took Christian by the hand again, and led him
15


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
into a Chamber, where there was one rising out of bed;
and as he put on his Rayment, he shook and trembled.
Then said Christian, Why doth this man thus tremble?
The Interpreter then bid him tell to Christian the reason
of his so doing. So he began and said, This night, as I
was in my sleep, I dreamed, and behold the Heavens
grew exceeding black; also it thundered and lightnedin
most fearful wise, that it put me into an Agony; so I
looked up in my Dream, and saw the Clouds rack at an
unusual rate, upon which I heard a great sound of a
Trumpet, and saw also a Man sit upon a Cloud, attended
with the thousands of Heaven; they were all in flaming
fire, also the Heavens was on a burning flame. I heard
then a voice saying, Arise ye Dead, and come to Judge-
ment; and with that the Rocks rent, the Graves opened,
and the Dead that were therein came forth. Some of
them were exceeding glad, and looked upward; and
some sought to hide themselves under the Mountains.
Then I saw the Man that sat upon the Cloud open the
Book, and bid the World draw near. Yet there was, by
reason of a fierce Flame which issued out and came from
before him, a convenient distance betwixt him and them,
as betwixt the Judge and the Prisoners at the bar. I
heard it also proclaimed to them that attended on the
Man that sat on the Cloud, Gather together the Tares, the
Chaff, and Stubble, and cast them into the burning Lake.
And with that, the bottomless pit opened, just where-
about I stood; out of the mouth of which there came in
an abundant manner, Smoak and Coals of fire, with
hideous noises. It was also said to the same persons,
Gather my Wheat into my Garner. And with that I saw
16


THE HOUSE OF THE INTERPRETER
many catch't up and carried away into the Clouds, but
I was left behind. I also sought to hide myself, but I
could not, for the Man that sat upon the Cloud still
kept his eye upon me: my sins also came into my mind;
and my Conscience did accuse me on every side. Upon
this I awaked from my sleep.
Chr. But what was it that made you so afraid of this
sight?
Man. Why, I thought that the day of Judgement was
come, and that I was not ready for it: but this frighted
me most, that the Angels gathered up several, and left me
behind; also the pit of Hell opened her mouth just where
I stood: my Conscience too within afflicted me; and as I
thought, the Judge had always his eye upon me, shewing
indignation in his countenance.
Then said the Interpreter to Christian, Hast thou con-
sidered all these things?
Chr. Yes, and they put me in hope and fear.
Inter. Well, keep all things so in thy mind that they
may be as a Goad in thy sides, to prick thee forward in
the way thou must go. Then Christian began to gird up
his loins, and to address himself to his Journey. Then
said the Interpreter, The Comforter be always with thee,
good Christian, to guide thee in the way that leads to the
City. So Christian went on his way, saying —
Here I have seen things rare and profitable;
Things pleasant, dreadful, things to make me stable
In what I have began to take in hand;
Then let me think on them, and understand
Wherefore they shew'd me was, and let me be
Thankful, O good Interpreter, to thee.


AT THE HOUSE BEAUTIFUL
By John Bunyan
BEHOLD there was a very stately Palace before him,
the name of which was Beautiful; and it stood just
by the High-way side.
So I saw in my Dream that he made haste and went
forward, that if possible he might get Lodging there.
Now before he had gone far, he entered into a very
narrow passage, which was about a furlong off of the
Porter's lodge; and looking very narrowly before him
as he went, he espied two Lions in the way. Now,
thought he, I see the dangers that Mistrust and Timorus
were driven back by. (The Lions were chained, but he
saw not the chains.) Then he was afraid, and thought
also himself to go back after them, for he thought nothing
but death was before him: But the Porter at the lodge,
whose name is Watchful, perceiving that Christian made
a halt as if he would go back, cried unto him, saying, Is
thy strength so small? Fear not the Lions, for they are
chained, and are placed there for trial of faith where
it is, and for discovery of those that have none. Keep
in the midst of the Path, and no hurt shall come unto
thee.
Then I saw that he went on, trembling for fear of the
Lions, but taking good heed to the directions of the Por-
ter; he heard them roar, but they did him no harm.
18


THE HOUSE BEAUTIFUL
Then he clapt his hands, and went on till he came and
stood before the Gate where the Porter was. Then said
Christian to the Porter, Sir, what House is this? and
may I lodge here to-night? The Porter answered, This
House was built by the Lord of the Hill, and he built it
for the relief and security of Pilgrims. The Porter also
asked whence he was, and whither he was going?
Chr. I am come from the City of Destruction, and am
going to Mount Zion; but because the Sun is now set, I
desire, if I may, to lodge here to-night.
Por. What is your name?
Chr. My name is now Christian, but my name at the
first was Graceless; I came of the race of Japhet, whom
God will perswade to dwell in the Tents of Skem.
Por. But how doth it happen that you come so late?
The Sun is set.
Chr. I had been here sooner, but that, wretched man
that I am! I slept in the Arbour that stands on the Hill-
side; nay, I had notwithstanding that been here much
sooner, but that in my sleep I lost my Evidence, and
came without it to the brow of the Hill; and then feeling
for it, and finding it not, I was forced with sorrow of
heart to go back to the place where I slept my sleep,
where I found it, and now I am come.
Por. Well, I will call out one of the Virgins of this
place, who will, if she likes your talk, bring you in to the
rest of the Family, according to the rules of the house.
So Watchful the Porter rang a bell, at the sound of which
came out at the door of the house, a grave and beautiful
Damsel named Discretion, and asked why she was called.
The Porter answered, This man is in a Journey from
19


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
the City of Destruction to Mount Zion, but being weary
and benighted, he asked me if he might lodge here to-
night; so I told him I would call for thee, who, after
discourse had with him, mayest do as seemeth thee good,
even according to the Law of the House.
Then she asked him whence he was, and whither he
was going; and he told her. She asked him also, how
he got into the way, and he told her. Then she asked
him what he had seen and met with in the way; and he
told her. And last she asked his name; so he said, It is
Christian; and I have so much the more a desire to lodge
here to-night, because, by what I perceive, this place
was built by the Lord of the Hill, for the relief and
security of Pilgrims. So she smiled, but the water stood
in her eyes; and after a little pause, she said, I will call
forth two or three more of the Family. So she ran to the
door, and called out Prudence, Piety, and Charity, who
after a little more discourse with him, had him in to
the Family; and many of them, meeting him at the
threshold of the house, said, Come in, thou blessed of
the Lord; this house was built by the Lord of the Hill, on
purpose to entertain such Pilgrims in. Then he bowed
his head, and followed them into the house. So when he
was come in and set down, they gave him something to
drink, and consented together, that until supper was
ready, some of them should have some particular dis-
course with Christian, for the best improvement of time;
and they appointed Piety, and Prudence, and Charity to
discourse with him; and thus they began:—
Piety. Come, good Christian, since we have been so
loving to you, to receive you into our house this night,
20


THE HOUSE BEAUTIFUL
let us, if perhaps we may better ourselves thereby, talk
with you of all things that have happened to you in your
Pilgrimage.
Chr. With a very good will, and I am glad that you
are so well disposed.
Piety. What moved you at first to betake yourself to
a Pilgrim's life?
Chr. I was driven out of my Native Country, by a
dreadful sound that was in mine ears, to wit, That
unavoidable destruction did attend me, if I abode in
that place where I was.
Piety. But how did it happen that you came out of
your Country this way?
Chr. It was as God would have it; for when I was
under the fears of destruction, I did not know whither
to go; but by chance there came a man, even to me, as
I was trembling and weeping, whose name is Evange-
list, and he directed me to the Wicket-gate, which else I
should never have found, and so set me into the way that
hath led me directly to this house.
Piety. But did you not come by the House of the
Interpreter?
Chr. Yes, and did see such things there, the re-
membrance of which will stick by me as long as I live;
specially three things: to wit, How Christ, in despite of
Satan, maintains his work of Grace in the heart; how
the Man had sinned himself quite out of hopes of God's
mercy; and also the Dream of him that thought in his
sleep the day of Judgement was come.
Piety. Why, did you hear him tell his Dream?
Chr. Yes, and a dreadful one it was. I thought it
21


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
made my heart ake as he was telling of it; but yet I am
glad I heard it.
Piety. Was that all that you saw at the House of the
Interpreter?
Chr. No, he took me and had me where he shewed
me a stately Palace, and how the people were clad in
Gold that were in it; and how there came a venturous
man and cut his way through the armed men that stood
in the door to keep him out, and how he was bid to come
in, and win eternal Glory. Methought those things did
ravish my heart; I could have stayed at that good man's
house a twelve-month, but that I knew I had further to
go.
Piety. And what saw you else in the way?
Chr. Saw! Why, I went but a little further, and I
saw one, as I thought in my mind, hang bleeding upon
the Tree; and the very sight of him made my Burden
fall off my back (for I groaned under a weary Burden),
but then it fell down from off me. 'T was a strange
thing to me, for I never saw such a thing before; yea,
and while I stood looking up (for then I could not for-
bear looking) three Shining Ones came to me. One of
them testified that my sins were forgiven me; another
stript me of my Rags, and gave me this broidred Coat
which you see; and the third set the Mark which you
see, in my forehead, and gave me this sealed Roll
(and with that he plucked it out of his bosom).
Piety. But you saw more then this, did you not?
Chr. The things that I have told you were the best;
yet some other matters I saw, as namely I saw three
men, Simple, Sloth, and Presumption, lye asleep a little
22


THE HOUSE BEAUTIFUL
out of the way as I came, with Irons upon their heels;
but do you think I could awake them? I also saw
Formalist and Hypocrisie come tumbling over the wall,
to go, as they pretended, to Sion; but they were quickly
lost; even as I myself did tell them, but they would
not believe. But, above all, I found it hard work to
get up this Hill, and as hard to come by the Lion's
mouths; and truly if it had not been for the good man,
the Porter that stands at the Gate, I do not know but
that after all I might have gone back again; but now I
thank God I am here, and I thank you for receiving
of me.
Then Prudence thought good to ask him a few
questions, and desired his answer to them.
Prud. Do you not think sometimes of the Country
from whence you came?
Chr. Yes, but with much shame and detestation: -
Truly, if I had been mindful of that Country from
whence I came out, I might have had opportunity to
have returned; but now I desire a better Country, that
is, an Heavenly.
Prud. Do you not yet bear away with you some of the
things that then you were conversant withal?
Chr. Yes, but greatly against my will; especially
my inward and carnal cogitations, with which all my
countrymen, as well as myself, were delighted; but now
all those things are my grief; and might I but chuse
mine own things, I would chuse never to think of those
things more; but when I would be doing of that which is
best, that which is worst is with me.
Prud. Do you not find sometimes, as if those things
23


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
were vanquished, which at other times are your per-
plexity?
Chr. Yes, but that is seldom; but they are to me
golden hours in which such things happen to me.
Prud. Can you remember by what means you find
your annoyances at times, as if they were vanquished?
Chr. Yes, when I think what I saw at the Cross, that
will do it; and when I look upon my broidered Coat, that
will do it; also when I look into the Roll that I carry in
my bosom, that will do it; and when my thoughts wax
warm about whither I am going, that will do it.
Prud. And what is it that makes you so desirous to go
to Mount Zion?
Chr. Why, there I hope to see him alive that did
hang dead on the Cross; and there I hope to be rid of
all those things that to this day are in me an annoyance to
me; there, they say, there is no death; and there I shall
dwell with such Company as I like best. For to tell you
truth, I love him, because I was by him eased of my
Burden, and I am weary of my inward sickness; I would
fain be where I shall die no more, and with the Company
that shall continually cry, Holy, Holy, Holy.
Then said Charity to Christian, Have you a family?
Are you a married man?
Chr. I have a Wife and four small Children.
Char. And why did you not bring them along with
you?
Chr. Then Christian wept, and said, Oh, how will-
ingly would I have done it, but they were all of them
utterly averse to my going on Pilgrimage.
Char. But you should have talked to them, and have
24


THE HOUSE BEAUTIFUL
endeavoured to have shewen them the danger of being
behind.
Chr. So I did, and told them also what God had
shewed to me of the destruction of our City; but I
seemed to them as one that mocked, and they believed
me not.
Char. And did you pray to God that he would bless
your counsel to them?
Chr. Yes, and that with much affection; for you
must think that my Wife and poor Children were very
dear unto me.
Char. But did you tell them of your own sorrow,
and fear of destruction? For I suppose that destruc-
tion was visible enough to you.
Chr. Yes, over, and over, and over. They might also
see my fears in my countenance, in my tears, and also
in my trembling under the apprehension of the Judgment
that did hang over our heads; but all was not sufficient
to prevail with them to come with me.
Char. But what could they say for themselves, why
they came not?
Chr. Why, my Wife was afraid of losing this World,
and my Children were given to the foolish Delights of
youth: so what by one thing, and what by another, they
left me to wander in this manner alone.
Char. But did you not with your vain life, damp all
that you by words used by way of persuasion to bring
them away with you?
Chr. Indeed I cannot commend my life; for I am
conscious to myself of many failings therein: I know
also, that a man by his conversation may soon over-
85


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
throw, what by argument or persuasion he doth labour
to fasten upon others for their good. Yet this I can say,
I was very wary of giving them occasion, by any un-
seemly action, to make them averse to going on Pilgri-
mage. Yea, for this very thing they would tell me I was
too precise, and that I denied myself of things (for their
sakes) in which they saw no evil. Nay, I think I may
say, that if what they saw in me did hinder them, it
was my great tenderness in sinning against God, or of
doing any wrong to my Neighbour.
Char. Indeed Cain hated his Brother, because his
own works were evil, and his Brother's righteous; and
if thy Wife and Children have been offended with thee
for this, they thereby shew themselves to be implacable
to good, and thou hast delivered thy soul from their
blood.
Now I saw in my Dream, that thus they sat talking
together until supper was ready. So when they had
made ready, they sat down to meat. Now the Table
was furnished with fat things, and with Wine that was
4 well refined: and all their talk at the Table was about
the Lord of the Hill; as namely, about what he had
done, and wherefore he did what he did, and why he
had builded that House: and by what they said, I per-
ceived that he had been a great Warriour, and had fought
with and slain him that had the power of Death, but
not without great danger to himself, which made me
love him the more.
For, as they said, and as I believe (said Christian), he
did it with the loss of much blood; but that which put
Glory of Grace into all he did, was, that he did it out of
26


THE HOUSE BEAUTIFUL
pure love to his Country. And besides, there were some
of them of the Household that said they had seen and
spoke with him since he did dye on the Cross; and they
have attested that they had it from his own lips, that he
is such a lover of poor Pilgrims, that the like is not to be
found from the East to the West.
They moreover gave ah instance of what they affirmed,
and that was, He had stript himself of his glory, that
he might do this for the Poor; and that they heard him
say and affirm, That he would not dwell in the Mountain
of Zion alone. They said moreover, that he had made
many Pilgrims Princes, though by nature they were
Beggars born, and their original had been the Dung-
hill.
Thus they discoursed together till late at night; .and
after they had committed themselves to their Lord for
protection, they betook themselves to rest. The Pilgrim
they laid in a large upper chamber, whose window
opened towards the Sun-rising; the name of the cham-
ber was Peace, where he slept till break of day; and
then he awoke and sang, —
"Where am I now? Is this the love and care
Of Jesus for the men that Pilgrims are
Thus to provide! That I should be forgiven 1
And dwell already the next door to Heaven 1"
So in the morning they all got up, and after some
more discourse, they told him that he should not depart
till they had shewed him the Rarities of that place. And
first they had him into the Study, where they shewed
him Records of the greatest Antiquity; in which, as I
remember my Dream, they shewed him first the Pedi-
27


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
gree of the Lord of the Hill, that he was the Son of the
Ancient of Days, and came by an Eternal Generation.
Here also was more fully recorded the Acts that he had
done, and the names of many hundreds that he had
taken into his service; and how he had placed them in
such Habitations that could neither by length of Days,
nor decaies of Nature, be dissolved.
Then they read to him some of the worthy Acts
that some of his Servants had done: as, how they had
subdued Kingdoms, wrought Righteousness, obtained
Promises, stopped the mouths of Lions, quenched the
violence of Fire, escaped the edge of the Sword; out of
weakness were made strong, waxed valiant in fight,
and turned to flight the Armies of the Aliens.
Then they read again in another part of the Records
of the house, where it was shewed how willing their
Lord was to receive into his favour any, even any, though
they in time past had offered great affronts to his Person
and proceedings. Here also were several other Histories
of many other famous things, of all which Christian had
a view; as of things both Ancient and Modern; together
with Prophecies and Predictions of things that have
their certain accomplishment, both to the dread and
amazement of Enemies, and the comfort and solace of
Pilgrims.
The next day they took him and had him into the
Armory, where they shewed him all manner of Fur-
niture, which their Lord had provided for Pilgrims,
as Sword, Shield, Helmet; Brestplate, All-prayer, and
Shooes that would not wear out. And there was here
enough of this to harness out as many men for the ser-
28


THE HOUSE BEAUTIFUL
vice of their Lord as there be Stars in the Heaven for
multitude.
They also shewed him some of the Engines with which
some of his Servants had done wonderful things. They
shewed him Moses' Rod; the Hammer and Nail with
which Joel slew Sisera; the Pitchers, Trumpets, and
Lamps too, with which Gideon put to flight the Armies of
Midian. Then they shewed him the Oxes goad where-
with Shamger slew six hundred men. They shewed him
also the Jaw-bone with which Samson did such mighty
feats. They shewed him moreover the Sling and Stone
with which David slew Goliath of Goth; and the Sword
also with which their Lord will kill the Man of Sin, in
the day that he shall rise up to the prey. They shewed
him besides many excellent things, with which Christian
was much delighted. This done, they went to their rest
again.
Then I saw in my Dream, that on the morrow he got
up to go forwards, but they desired him to stay till the
next day also; and then, said they, we will (if the day be
clear) shew you the Delectable Mountains, which, they
said, would yet further add to his comfort, because they
were nearer the desired Haven then the place where at
present he was. So he consented and staid. When the
morning was up, they had him to the top of the House,
and bid him look South; so he did: and behold at a great
distance he saw a most pleasant Mountainous Country,
beautified with Woods, Vinyards, Fruits of all sorts,
Flowers also; Springs and Fountains, very delectable to
behold. Then he asked the name of the Country. They
said it was Immanuel's Land; and it is as common, said


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
they, as this Hill is, to and for all the Pilgrims. And
when thou comest there, from thence, said they, thou
maist see to the gate of the Ccelestial City, as the Shep-
heards that live there will make appear.
Now he bethought himself of setting forward, and they
were willing he should: but first, said they, let us go again
into the Armory. So they did; and when they came there
they harnessed him from head to foot with what was of
proof, lest perhaps he should meet with assaults in the
way. He being therefore thus acoutred.walketh out with
his friends to the Gate, and there he asked the Porter if
he saw any Pilgrims pass by. Then the Porter answered,
Yes.
Chr. Pray, did you know him?
Por. I asked his name, and he told me it was Faithful.
Chr. O, said Christian, I know him; he is my Towns-
man, my near Neighbour, he comes from the place where
I was born. How far do you think he may be before? "*
Por. He has got by this time below the Hill.
Chr. Well, said Christian, good Porter, the Lord be
with thee, and add to all thy blessings much increase,
for the kindness that thou hast shewed to me.
Then he began to go forward; but Discretion, Piety,
Charity, and Prudence would accompany him down to
the foot of the Hill. So they went on together, reiterating
their former discourses, till they came to go down the
Hill. Then said Christian, As it was difficult coming up,
so (so far as I can see) it is dangerous going down. Yes,
said Prudence, so it is, for it is an hard matter for a man
to go down into the Valley of Humiliation, as thou art
now, and to catch no slip by the way; therefore, said
30



NOW HE BETHOUGHT HIMSELF OF SETTING FORWARD, AND
THEY WERE WILLING HE SHOULD: BUT FIRST, SAID THEY, LET
US GO AGAIN INTO THE ARMORY. SO THEY DID; AND WHEN
THEY CAME THERE THEY HARNESSED HIM FROM HEAD TO FOOT
WITH WHAT WAS OF PROOF, LEST PERHAPS HE SHOULD MEET
WITH ASSAULTS IN THE WAY. HE BEING THEREFORE THUS
AOOUTRED, WALKETH OUT WITH HIS FRIENDS TO THE GATE, AND
THERE HE ASKED THE PORTER IF HE SAW ANY PILGRIMS PASS BY

=3*


THE NEW YORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY
ASTOR, LF.NOX AND
T1LD1.N FOUNDATIONS


CHRISTIAN'S FIGHT WITH
APOLLYON
By John Bunyan
IN this Valley of Humiliation, poor Christian was hard
put up to it; for he had gone but a little way, before
he espied a foul Fiend coming over the field to meet him;
his name is Apollyon. Then did Christian begin to be
afraid, and to cast in his mind whither to go back or to
stand his ground. But he considered again that he had
no Armour for his back, and therefore thought that to
turn the back to him might give him greater advantage
with ease to pierce him with his Darts. Therefore he
resolved to venture and stand his ground. For, thought
he, had I no more in mine eye then the saving of my life,
't would be the best way to stand.
So he went on, and Apollyon met him. Now the Mon-
ster was hidious to behold; he was cloathed with scales
like a Fish (and they are his pride); he had wings like a
Dragon, and out of his belly came Fire and Smoak; and
his mouth was as the mouth of a Lion. When he was
come up to Christian, he beheld him with a disdainful
countenance, and thus began to question with him.
Apol. Whence come you ? and whitherare you bound?
Chr. I come from the City of Destruction, which is the
place of all evil, and am going to the City of Zion.
Apol. By this I perceive thou art one of my Subjects,
32


CHRISTIAN'S FIGHT WITH APOLLYON
for all that Country is mine, and I am the Prince and
God of it. How is it then that thou hast run away from
thy king? Were it not that I hope thou maiest do me
more service, I would strike thee now at one blow to the
ground.
Chr. I was born indeed in your dominions, but your
service was hard, and your wages such as a man could
not live on, for the Wages of Sin is death; therefore when
I was come to years, I did as other considerate persons
do, look out, if perhaps I might mend myself.
Apol. There is no Prince that will thus lightly lose his
Subjects, neither will I as yet lose thee: but since thou
complainest of thy service and wages, be content to go
back; what our Country will afford, I do here promise
to give thee.
Chr. But I have let myself to another, even to the
King of Princes, and how can I with fairness go back
with thee?
Apol. Thou hast done in this, according to the Pro-
verb, changed a bad for a worse; but it is ordinary for
those that have professed themselves his Servants, after
a while to give him the slip, and return again to me: do
thou so too, and all shall be well.
Chr. I have given him my faith, and sworn my
Allegiance to him; how then can I go back from this, and
not be hanged as a Traitor?
Apol. Thou diddest the same to me, and yet I am
willing to pass by all, if now thou will turn again and go
back.
Chr. What I promised thee was in my nonage; and
besides, I count that the Prince under whose Banner now
33


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
I stand is able to absolve me; yea, and to pardon also
what I did as to my compliance with thee; and besides,
0 thou destroying Apollyon, to speak truth, I like his
Service, his Wages, his Servants, his Government, his
Company and Country, better than thine; and therefore
leave off to perswade me further; I am his Servant, and
1 will follow him.
Apol. Consider again when thou art in cool blood,
what thou art like to meet with in the way that thou goest.
Thou knowest that for the most part, his Servants come
to an ill end, because they are transgressors against me
and my ways. How many of them have been put to
shameful deaths; and besides, thou countest his service
better than mine, whereas he never came yet from the
place where he is to deliver any that served him out of our
hands; but as for me, how many times, as all the World
very well knows, have I delivered, either by power or
fraud, those that have faithfully served me, from him
and his, though taken by them; and so I will deliver thee.
Chr. His forbearing at present to deliver them is on
purpose to try their love, whether they will cleave to him
to the end; and as for the ill end thou sayest they come
to, that is most glorious in their account; for, for present
deliverance, they do not much expect it, for they stay
for their Glory, and then they shall have it, when their
Prince comes in his and the Glory of the Angels.
Apol. Thou hast already been unfaithful in thy service
to him, and how dost thou think to receive wages of him?
Chr. Wherein, O Apollyon, have I been unfaithful
to him?
Apol. Thou didst faint at first setting out, when thou
34


CHRISTIAN'S FIGHT WITH APOLLYON
wast almost choked in the Gulf of Dispond; thou diddest
attempt wrong ways to be rid of thy Burden, whereas
thou shouldest have stayed till thy Prince had taken it
off; thou didst sinfully sleep and lose thy choice thing;
thou wast also almost perswaded to go back, at the
sight of the Lions; and when thou talkest of thy Journey,
and of what thou hast heard and seen, thou art inwardly
desirous of vainglory in all that thou sayest or doest.
Chr. All this is true, and much more which thou
hast left out; but the Prince whom I serve and honour
is merciful, and ready to forgive; but besides, these
infirmities possessed me in thy Country, for there I
sucked them in, and I have groaned under them, been
sorry for them, and have obtained pardon of my Prince.
Apol. Then Apollyon broke out into a grievous rage,
saying, I am an enemy to this Prince; I hate his Person,
his Laws, and People; I am come out on purpose to
withstand thee.
Chr. Apollyon, beware what you do, for I am in the
King's High-way, the way of Holiness, therefore take heed
to yourself.
Apol. Then Apollyon strodled quite over the whole
breadth of the way, and said, I am void of fear in this
matter, prepare thyself to dye; for I swear thou shalt
go no further; here will I spill thy soul.
And with that he threw a flaming Dart at his brest,
but Christian had a Shield in his hand, with which he
caught it, and so prevented the danger of that.
Then did Christian draw, for he saw't was time to
bestir him: and Apollyon as fast made at him, throwing
Darts as thick as Hail: by the which, notwithstanding
35


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
all that Christian could do to avoid it, Apollyon wounded
him in his head, his hand, and foot. This made Christian
give a little back; Apollyon therefore followed his work
amain, and Christian again took courage, and resisted
as manfully as he could. This sore Combat lasted for
above half a day, even till Christian was almost quite
spent. For you must know that Christian, by reason of
his wounds, must needs grow weaker and weaker.
Then Apollyon espying his opportunity, began to
gather up close to Christian, and wrestling with him,
gave him a dreadful fall; and with that Christian's
Sword flew out of his hand. Then said Apollyon, I am
sure of thee now: and with that he had almost prest him
to death, so that Christian began to despair of life.
But as God would have it, while Apollyon was fetching
of his last blow, thereby to make a full end of this good
Man, Christian nimbly reached out his hand for his
Sword, and caught it, saying, Rejoyce not against me, O
mine Enemy I when I fall I shall arise; and with that
gave him a deadly thrust, which made him give back, as
one that had received his mortal wound: Christian per-
ceiving that, made at him again, saying, Nay, in all
these things we are more then Conquerours. And with
that Apollyon spread forth his Dragon's wings, and sped
him away, that Christian for a season saw him no more.
In this Combat no man can imagine, unless he had
seen and heard as I did, what yelling and hideous roar-
ing Apollyon made all the time of the fight; he spake
like a Dragon: and on the other side, what sighs and
groans brast from Christian's heart. I never saw him all
the while give so much as one pleasant look, till he per-
36


CHRISTIAN'S FIGHT WITH APOLLYON
ceived he had wounded Apollyon with his two-edged
Sword; then indeed he did smile, and look upward;
but't was the dreadfullest sight that ever I saw.
So when the Battel was over, Christian said, I will
here give thanks to him that hath delivered me out of
the mouth of the Lion, to him that did help me against
Apollyon. And so he did, saying, —
"Great Beelzebub, the Captain of this Fiend,
Design'd my ruin; therefore to this end
He sent him harnest out: and he with rage
That hellish was, did fiercely me ingage:
But blessed Michael helped me, and I
By dint of Sword did quickly make him fly.
Therefore to him let me give lasting praise,
And thank and bless his holy name always."
Then there came to him an hand, with some of the
leaves of the Tree of Life, the which Christian took, and
applyed to the wounds that he had received in the
Battel, and was healed immediately. He also sat down
in that place to eat Bread, and to drink of the Bottle
that was given him a little before; so being refreshed,
he addressed himself to his Journey, with his Sword
drawn in his hand; for he said, I know not but some
other Enemy may be at hand. But he met with no
other affront from Apollyon quite through this Valley.


THE CASTLE OF GIANT DESPAIR
By John Bunyan
ISAW then that they went on their way to a pleasant
River, which David the King called the River of
God, but John, the River of the Water of Life. Now their
way lay just upon the bank of the River; here therefore
Christian and his Companion walked with great delight;
they drank also of the water of the River, which was
pleasant and enlivening to their weary spirits: besides,
on the banks of this River on either side were green
Trees, that bore all manner of Fruit; and the Leaves
of the Trees were good for Medicine; with the Fruit of
these Trees they were also much delighted; and the
Leaves they eat to prevent Surfeits, and other Diseases
that are incident to those that heat their blood by
Travels. On either side of the River was also a Meadow,
curiously beautified with Lilies; and it was green all the
year long. In this Meadow they lay down and slept,
for here they might lie down safely. When they awoke,
they gathered again of the Fruit of the Trees, and drank
again of the water of the River, and then lay down again
to sleep. Thus they did several days and nights. Then
they sang,—
"Behold ye how these Christal streams do glide,
(To comfort Pilgrims) by the High-way side;
The Meadows green, besides their fragrant smell,
38


THE CASTLE OF GIANT DESPAIR
Yield dainties for them: and he that can tell
What pleasant Fruit, yea Leaves, these Trees do yield,
Will soon sell all, that he may buy this Field."
So when they were disposed to go on (for they were not
as yet at their Journey's end), they eat and drank, and
departed.
Now I beheld in my Dream, that they had not jour-
nied far, but the River and the way for a time parted; at
which they were not a little sorry, yet they durst not go
out of the way. Now the way from the River was rough,
and their feet tender by reason of their Travels; so the
soul of the Pilgrims was much discouraged because of the
way. Wherefore still as they went on, they wished for
better way. Now a little before them, there was on the
left hand of the road a Meadow, and a Stile to go over
into it, and that Meadow is called Bypath-Meadow.
Then said Christian to his fellow, If this Meadow lieth
along by our way-side, let's go over into it. Then he
went to the Stile to see, and behold a Path lay along by
the way on the other side of the fence. 'T is according
to my wish, said Christian, here is the easiest going;
come, good Hopeful, and let us go over.
Hope. But how if this Path should lead us out of the
way?
Chr. That's not like, said the other; look, doth it not
go along by the way-side? So Hopeful, being perswaded
by his fellow, went after him over the Stile. When they
were gone over, and were got into the Path, they found it
very easie for their feet: and withal, they looking before
them, espied a man walking as they did (and his name
was Vain-confidence), so they called after him, and asked
39


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
him whither that way led? He said, To the Ccelestial
Gate. Look, said Christian, did I not tell you so? By
this you may see we are right. So they followed, and he
went before them. But behold the night came on, and it
grew very dark, so that they that were behind lost the
sight of him that went before.
He therefore that went before (Vain-confidence by
name), not seeing the way before him, fell into a deep
Pit, which was on purpose there made by the Prince of
those grounds, to catch vain-glorious fools withall, and
was dashed in pieces with his fall.
Now Christian and his fellow heard him fall. So they
called to know the matter, but there was none to answer,
only they heard a groaning. Then said Hopeful, Where
are we now? Then was his fellow silent as mistrusting
that he had led him out of the way; and now it began to
rain, and thunder, and lighten in a very dreadful man-
ner, and the water rose amain.
Then Hopeful groaned in himself, saying, Oh that I
had kept on my way!
Chr. Who could have thought that this Path should
have led us out of the way?
Hope. I was afraid on't at very first, and therefore
gave you that gentle caution. I would havespoke plainer,
but that you are older then I.
Chr. Good Brother, be not offended; I am sorry I
have brought thee out of the way, and that I have put
thee into such eminent danger; pray, my Brother, for-
give me, I did not do it of an evil intent.
Hope. Be comforted, my Brother, for I forgive thee;
and believe too that this shall be for our good.
40


THE CASTLE OF GIANT DESPAIR
Chr. I am glad I have with me a merciful Brother;
but we must not stand thus, let's try to go back again.
Hope. But, good Brother, let me go before.
Chr. No, if you please, let me go first, that if there be
any danger, I may be first therein, because by my means
we are both gone out of the way.
Hope. No, said Hopeful, you shall not go first; for
your mind being troubled may lead you out of the way
again. Then for their encouragement, they heard the
voice of one saying Let thine heart be towards the High-
way, even the way that thou wentest, turn again. But by
this time the waters were greatly risen, by reason of
which the way of going back was very dangerous. (Then
I thought that it is easier going out of the way when we
are in, than going in when we are out.) Yet they adven-
tured to go back; but it was so dark, and the flood was so
high, that in their going back they had liked to have been
drowned nine or ten times.
Neither could they, with all the skill they had, get again
to the Stile that night. Wherefore at last, lighting under
a little shelter, they sat down there till the day brake;
but being weary, they fell asleep. Now there was not far
from the place where they lay, a Castle called Doubting
Castle, the owner whereof was Giant Despair, and it
was in his grounds they now were sleeping: wherefore
he, getting up in the morning early, and walking up and
down in his Fiejds, caught Christian and Hopeful asleep
in his grounds. Then with a grim and surly voice he bid
them awake, and asked them whence they were? and
what they did in his grounds? They told him they were
Pilgrims, and that they had lost their way. Then said
41


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
the Giant, You have this night trespassed on me, by
trampling in and lying on my grounds, and therefore
you must go along with me. So they were forced to go,
because he was stronger then they. They also had but
little to say, for they knew themselves in a fault. The
Giant therefore drove them before him, and put them
into his Castle, into a very dark Dungeon, nasty and
stinking to the spirits of these two men. Here then they
lay from Wednesday morning till Saturday night, with-
out one bit of bread, or drop of drink, or light, or any to
ask how they did; they were therefore here in evil case,
and were far from friends and acquaintance. Now in
this place Christian had double sorrow, because't was
through his unadvised haste that they were brought into
this distress.
Now Giant Despair had a Wife and her name was
Diffidence. So when he was gone to bed, he told his
Wife what he had done, to wit, that he had taken a
couple of Prisoners and cast them into his Dungeon, for
trespassing on his grounds. Then he asked her also
what he had best do further to them. So she asked him
what they were, whence they came, and whither they
were bound; and he told her. Then she counselled him
that when he arose in the morning he should beat them
without any mercy. So when he arose, he getteth him
a grievous Crab-tree Cudgel, and goes down into the
Dungeon to them, and there first falls to rating of them
as if they were dogs, although they gave him never a
word of distaste. Then he falls upon them, and beats
them fearfully, in such sort, that they were not able to
help themselves, or to turn them upon the floor. This
42



NOW THERE WAS NOT FAR FROM THE PLACE WHERE THEY LAY, A
CASTLE CALLED DOUBTING CASTLE, THE OWNER WHEREOF WAS
GIANT DESPAIR HE GETTING UP IN THE MORNING EARLY, AND
WALKING UP AND DOWN IN HIS FIELDS, CAUGHT CHRISTIAN AND
HOPEFUL ASLEEP IN HIS GROUNDS. THEN WITH A GRIM AND SURLY
VOICE HE BID THEM AWAKE, AND ASKED THEM WHENCE THEY
WERE AND WHAT THEY DID IN HIS GROUNDS.THEY TOLD HIM THAT
THEY WERE PILGRIMS. AND THAT THEY HAD LOST THEIR WAY.
THEN SAID THE GIANT, YOU HAVE THIS NIGHT TRESPASSED ON ME





THE CASTLE OF GIANT DESPAIR
done, he withdraws and leaves them, there to condole
their misery, and to mourn under their distress: so all
that day they spent the time in nothing but sighs and
bitter lamentations. The next night she talking with her
Husband about them further, and understanding that
they were yet alive, did advise him to counsel them to
make away themselves. So when morning was come,
he goes to them in a surly manner as before, and per-
ceiving them to be very sore with the stripes that he had
given them the day before, he told them, that since they
were never like to come out of that place, their only way
would be forthwith to make an end of themselves, either
with Knife, Halter, or Poison. For why, said he, should
you chuse life, seeing it is attended with so much bitter-
ness? But they desired him to let them go. With that
he looked ugly upon them, and rushing to them had
doubtless made an end of them himself, but that he
fell into one of his Fits (for he sometimes in Sunshine
weather fell into Fits) and lost for a time the use of his
hand; wherefore he withdrew, and left them as before,
to consider what to do. Then did the Prisoners con-
sult between themselves, whether't was best to take his
counsel or no; and thus they began to discourse:—
Chr. Brother, said Christian, what shall we do?
The life that we now live is miserable: for my part I
know not whether is best, to live thus, or to die out of
hand. My soul chuseth strangling rather than life, and
the Grave is more easy for me than this Dungeon.
Shall we be ruled by the Giant?
Hope. Indeed our present condition is dreadful, and
death would be far more welcome to me than thus for
43


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
ever to abide; but yet let us consider, the Lord of the
Country to which we are going hath said, Thou shalt
do no murder, no not to another man's person; much
more then are we forbidden to take his counsel to kill
ourselves. Besides, he that kills another can but com-
mit murder upon his body; but for one to kill himself
is to kill body and soul at once. And moreover, my
Brother, thou talkest of ease in the Grave; but hast thou
forgotten the Hell, whither for certain the murderers
go? For no murderer hath eternal life, &c. And let
us consider again, that all the Law is not in the hand
of Giant Despair. Others, so far as I can understand,
have been taken by him as well as we, and yet have
escaped out of his hand. Who knows but that God
that made the world may cause that Giant Despair may
die? Or that at some time or other he may forget to
lock us in? Or but he may in short time have another of
his Fits before us, and may lose the use of his limbs?
And if ever that should come to pass again, for my part
I am resolved to pluck up the heart of a man, and to
try my utmost to get from under his hand. I was a fool
that I did not try to do it before; but however, my
Brother, let's be patient, and endure a while; the time
may come that may give us a happy release; but let us
not be our own murderers. With these words Hopeful
at present did moderate the mind of his Brother. So
they continued together (in the dark) that day, in their
sad and doleful condition.
Well, towards evening the Giant goes down into the
Dungeon again, to see if his Prisoners had taken his
counsel; but when he came there he found them alive,
44


THE CASTLE OF GIANT DESPAIR
and truly, alive was all; for now, what for want of Bread
and Water, and by reason of the Wounds they received
when he beat them, they could do little but breathe.
But, I say, he found them alive; at which he fell into a
grievous rage, and told them that seeing they had dis-
obeyed his counsel, it should be worse with them than
if they had never been born.
At this they trembled greatly, and I think that
Christian fell into a Swound; but coming a little to him-
self again, they renewed their discourse about the Giant's
counsel, and whether yet they had best to take it or no.
Now Christian again seemed to be for doing it, but
Hopeful made his second reply as followeth:
Hope. My Brother, said he, rememberest thou not
how valiant thou hast been heretofore? Apollyon could
not crush thee, nor could all that thou didst hear, or see,
or feel in the Valley of the Shadow of Death. What
hardship, terror, and amazement hast thou already
gone through, and art thou now nothing but fear?
Thou seest that I am in the Dungeon with thee, a far
weaker man by nature than thou art; also this Giant has
wounded me as well as thee, and hath also cut off the
Bread and Water from my mouth; and with thee I
mourn without the light. But let's exercise a little more
patience; remember how thou played'st the man at
Vanity Fair, and wast neither afraid of the Chain, nor
Cage, nor yet of bloody Death: wherefore let us (at least
to avoid the shame, that becomes not a Christian to be
found in) bear up with patience as well as we can.
Now night being come again, and the Giant and his
Wife being in bed, she asked him concerning the
45


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
Prisoners, and if they had taken his counsel. To which
he replied, They are sturdy Rogues, they chuse rather to
bear all hardship, than to make away themselves. Then
said she, Take them into the Castle-yard to-morrow, and
shew them the Bones and Skulls of those that thou hast
already dispatch'd, and make them believe, e're a week
comes to an end, thou also wilt tear them in pieces, as
thou hast done their fellows before them.
So when the morning was come, the Giant goes to
them again, and takes them into the Castle-yard and
shews them as his Wife had bidden him. These, said
he, were Pilgrims as you are, once, and they trespassed
in my grounds, as you have done; and when I thought
fit I tore them in pieces, and so within ten days I will do
you. Go get you down to your Den again; and with
that he beat them all the way thither. They lay there-
fore all day on Saturday in a lamentable case, as before.
Now when night was come, and when Mrs. Diffidence
and her Husband the Giant were got to bed, they began
to renew their discourse of their Prisoners; and withal
the old Giant wondered, that he could neither by bis
blows nor counsel bring them to an end. And with that
his Wife replied, I fear, said she, that they live in hope
that some will come to relieve them, or that they have
pick-locks about them, by the means of which they
hope to escape. And sayest thou so, my dear? said the
Giant, I will therefore search them in the morning.
Well on Saturday about midnight they began to
pray, and continued in Prayer till almost break of
day.
Now a little before it was day, good Christian, as one
46


THE CASTLE OF GIANT DESPAIR
half amazed, brake out in this passionate speech: What
a fool, quoth he, am I, thus to lie in a stinking Dungeon,
when I may as well walk at liberty! I have a Key in
my bosom called Promise, that will, I am persuaded,
open any Lock in Doubting Castle. Then said Hopeful,
That's good news; good Brother, pluck it out of thy
bosom and try.
Then Christian pulled it out of his bosom, and began
to try at the Dungeon door, whose bolt (as he turned the
Key) gave back, and the door flew open with ease, and
Christian and Hopeful both came out. Then he went
to the outward door that leads into the Castle-yard, and
with his Key opened that door also. After, he went to
the iron Gate, for that must be opened too, but that Lock
went damnable hard, yet the Key did open it. Then
they thrust open the Gate to make their escape with
speed, but that Gate as it opened made such a creaking,
that it waked Giant Despair, who hastily rising to pursue
his Prisoners, felt his limbs to fail, so that he could by no
means go after them. Then they went on, and came to
the King's High-way again, and so were safe, because
they were out of his Jurisdiction.
'Now when they were gone over the Stile, they began to
contrive with themselves what they should do at that
Stile, to prevent those that should come after from falling
into the hands of Giant Despair. So they consented to
erect there a Pillar, and to engrave upon the side thereof
this sentence, Over this Stile is the way to Doubting
Castle, which is kept by Giant Despair, who despiseth the
King of the Ccelestial Country, and seeks to destroy his
holy Pilgrims. Many therefore that followed after read
47


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
what was written, and escaped the danger. This done,
they sang as follows: —
"Out of the way we went, and then we found
What't was to tread upon forbidden ground;
And let them that come after have a care,
Lest heedlessness makes them, as we, to fare;
Lest they for trespassing his prisoners are,
Whose Castle's Doubting, and whose name's Despair."


THE DELECTABLE MOUNTAINS
By John Bunyan
THEY went then till they came to the Delectable
Mountains, which Mountains belong to the Lord
of that Hill of which we have spoken before; so they
went up to the Mountains, to behold the Gardens
and Orchards, the Vineyards and Fountains of water;
where also they drank, and washed themselves, and
did freely eat of the Vineyards. Now there was on the
tops of these Mountains Shepherds feeding their flocks,
and they stood by the High-way side. The Pilgrims
therefore went to them, and leaning upon their staves
(as is common with weary Pilgrims, when they stand
to talk with any by the way) they asked, Whose
Delectable Mountains are these? And whose be the sheep
that feed upon them?
Shep. These mountains are Immanuel's Land, and
they are within sight of his City; and the sheep also are
his, and he laid down his life for them.
Chr. Is this the way to the Coelestial City?
Shep. You are just in your way.
Chr. How far is it thither?
Shep. Too far for any but those that shall get thither
indeed.
Chr. Is the way safe or dangerous?
49


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
Shep. Safe for those for whom it is to be safe, but
transgressors shall fall therein.
Chr. Is there in this place any relief for Pilgrims that
are weary and faint in the way?
Shep. The Lord of these Mountains hath given us a
charge not to be forgetful to entertain strangers; therefore
the good of the place is before you.
I saw also in my Dream, that when the Shepherds
perceived that they were way-fairing men, they also put
questions to them, (to which they made answer as in
other places) as, Whence came you ? and, How got you
into the way? and, By what means have you so perse-
vered therein? For but few of them that begin to come
hither do shew their face on these Mountains. But when
the Shepherds heard their answers, being pleased there-
with, they looked very lovingly upon them, and said,
Welcome to the Delectable Mountains.
The Shepherds, I say, whose names were Knowledge,
Experience, Watchful, and Sincere, took them by the
hand, and had them to their Tents, and made them
partake of that which was ready at present. They said
moreover, We would that ye should stay here a while, to
acquaint with us; and yet more to solace yourselves with
the good of these Delectable Mountains. They told them
that they were content to stay; and so they went to their
rest that night, because it was very late.
Then I saw in my Dream, that in the morning the
Shepherds called up Christian and Hopeful to walk with
them upon the Mountains; so they went forth with them,
and walked a while, having a pleasant prospect on every
side. Then said the Shepherds one to another, Shall we
50


THE DELECTABLE MOUNTAINS
shew these Pilgrims some wonders? So when they had
concluded to do it, they had them first to the top of an
Hill called Errour, which was very steep on the furthest
side, and bid them look down to the bottom. So Chris-
tian and Hopeful lookt down, and saw at the bottom
several men dashed all to pieces by a fall that they had
from the top. Then said Christian, What meaneth this?
The Shepherds answered, Have you not heard of them
that were made to err, by hearkening to Hymeneus and
Philetus, as concerning the Faith of the Resurrection of
the Body? They answered, Yes. Then said the Shep-
herds, Those that you see lie dashed in pieces at the
bottom of this Mountain are they; and they have con-
tinued to this day unburied (as you see) for an example
to others to take heed how they clamber too high, or how
they come too near the brink of this Mountain.
Then I saw that they had them to the top of another
Mountain, and the name of that is Caution, and bid them
look afar off; which when they did, they perceived, as
they thought, several men walking up and down among
the Tombs that were there; and they perceived that the
men were blind, because they stumbled sometimes upon
the Tombs, and because they could not get out from
among them. Then said Christian, What means this?
The Shepherds then answered. Did you not see a
little below these Mountains a Stile, that led into a
Meadow, on the left hand of this way? They answered,
Yes. Then said the Shepherds, From that Stile there
goes a path that leads directly to Doubting Castle, which
is kept by Giant Despair; and these men (pointing to
them among the Tombs) came once on Pilgrimage, as
51


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
you do now, even till they came to that same Stile; and
because the right way was rough in that place, they
chose to go out of it into that Meadow, and there were
taken by Giant Despair, and cast into Doubting Castle;
where after they had been awhile kept in the Dungeon,
he at last did put out their eyes, and led them among
those Tombs, where he has left them to wander to this
very day, that the saying of the Wise Man might be
fulfilled, He that wander eth out of the way of understand-
ing, shall remain in the Congregation of the dead. Then
Christian and Hopeful looked upon one another, with
tears gushing out, but yet said nothing to the Shepherds.
Then I saw in my Dream, that the Shepherds had
them to another place, in a bottom, where was a door
in the side of a Hill; and they opened the door, and bid
them look in. They looked in therefore, and saw that
within it was very dark and smoaky; they also thought
that they heard there a lumbring noise as of Fire, and
a cry of some tormented, and that they smelt the scent
of Brimstone. Then said Christian, What means this?
The Shepherds told them, This is a by-way to Hell, a
way that Hypocrites go in at; namely, such as sell their
Birthright, with Esau; such as sell their Master, as
Judas; such as blaspheme the Gospel, with Alexander;
and that lie and dissemble, with Ananias and Sapphira
his Wife.
Hope. Then said Hopeful to the Shepherds, I per-
ceive that these had on them, even every one, a shew of
Pilgrimage, as we have now; had they not?
Shep. Yes, and held it a long time too.
Hope. How far might they go on Pilgrimage in their
52


THE DELECTABLE MOUNTAINS
day, since they notwithstanding were thus miserably cast
away?
Shep. Some further, and some not so far as these
Mountains.
Then said the Pilgrims one to another, We had need
to cry to the Strong for strength.
Shep. Ay, and you will have need to use it when you
have it too.
By this time the Pilgrims had a desire to go forwards,
and the Shepherds a desire they should; so they walked
together towards the end of the Mountains. Then said
the Shepherds one to another, Let us here shew to the
Pilgrims the Gates of the Coelestial City, if they have
still to look through our Perspective-Glass. The Pil-
grims then lovingly accepted the motion; so they had
them to the top of an high Hill, called Clear, and gave
them their Glass to look.
Then they assayed to look, but the remembrance of
that last thing that the Shepheards had shewed them,
made their hands shake, by means of which impedi-
ment they could not look steddily through the Glass;
yet they thought they saw something like the Gate, and
also some of the Glory of the place. Then they went
away.


THE PILGRIMS WANDER FROM
THE WAY
By John Bunyan
CHRISTIAN and Hopeful went then till they came at
a place where they saw a way put itself into their
way, and seemed withal to lie as straight as the way which
they should go: and here they knew not which of the
two to take, for both seemed straight before them; there-
fore here they stood still to consider. And as they were
thinking about the way, behold a man black of flesh, but
covered with a very light Robe, came to them, and asked
them why they stood there? They answered they were
going to the Ccelestial City, but knew not which of these
ways to take. Follow me, said the man, it is thither that
I am going. So they followed him in the way that but
now came into the road, which by degrees turned, and
turned them so from the City that they desired to go
to, that in little time their faces were turned away from
it: yet they followed him. But by-and-by, before they
were aware, he led them both within the compass of a
Net, in which they were both so intangled, that they
knew not what to do; and with that the white Robe fell
off the black man's back: then they saw where they were.
Wherefore there they lay crying some time, for they
could not get themselves out.
Chr. Then said Christian to his fellow, Now do I
54


THE PILGRIMS WANDER FROM THE WAY
see myself in an errour. Did not the Shepherds bid us
beware of the Flatterers? As is the saying of the Wise
man, so we have found it this day, A man that flattereth
his Neighbour, spreadeth a Net for his feet.
Hope. They also gave us a Note of directions about
the way, for our more sure finding thereof; but therein
we have also forgotten to read, and have not kept our-
selves from the Paths of the Destroyer. Here David
was wiser than wee; for saith he, Concerning the works
of men, by the word of thy lips I have kept me from the
Paths of the Destroyer. Thus they lay bewailing them-
selves in the Net. At last they espied a Shining One
coming towards them with a Whip of small cord in his
hand. When he was come to the place where they were,
he asked them whence they came? and what they did
there? They told him that they were poor Pilgrims
going to Sion, but were led out of their way by a black
man, cloathed in white, who bid us, said they, follow
him, for he was going thither too. Then said he with the
Whip, It is Flatterer, a false Apostle, that hath trans-
formed himself into an Angel of Light. So he rent the
Net, and let the men out. Then said he to them, Fol-
low me, that I may set you in your way again: so he
led them back to the way which they had left to follow
the Flatterer. Then he asked them, saying, Where did
you lie the last night? They said, With the Shepherds
upon the Delectable Mountains. He asked them then,
If they had not of them Shepherds a Note of direction
for the way? They answered, Yes. But did you, said
he, when you was at a stand, pluck out and read your
. Note? They answered, No. He asked them, Why?
55


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
They said they forgot. He asked moreover, If the
Shepherds did not bid them beware of the Flatterer?
They answered, Yes; but we did not imagine, said they,
that this fine-spoken man had been he.
Then I saw in my Dream, that he commanded them
to lie down; which when they did, he chastised them sore,
to teach them the good way wherein they should walk;
and as he chastised them he said, As many as I love,
I rebuke and cliasten; be zealous therefore, and repent.
This done, he bids them go on their way, and take good
heed to the other directions of the Shepherds. So they
thanked him for all his kindness, and went softly along
the right way.
"Come hither, you that walk along the way,
See how the Pilgrims fare that go astray;
They catched are in an intangling Net,
'Cause they good Counsel lightly did forget;
'T is true they rescu'd were, but yet you see
They 're scourg'd to boot: Let this your caution be."
Now after a while, they perceived afar off one coming
softly and alone all along the High-way to meet them.
Then said Christian to his fellow, Yonder is a man with
his back toward Sion, and he is coming to meet us.
Hope. I see him, let us take heed to ourselves now,
lest he should prove a Flatterer also. So he drew nearer
and nearer, and at last came up unto them. His name
was Atheist, and he asked them whither they were
going?
Chr. We are going to Mount Zion.
Then Atheist fell into a very great Laughter.
Chr. What is the meaning of your Laughter?
56


THE PILGRIMS WANDER FROM THE WAY
Atheist. I laugh to see what ignorant persons you are,
to take upon you so tedious a Journey, and yet are like
to have nothing but your travel for your paines.
Chr. Why, man? Do you think we shall not be re-
ceived?
Atheist. Received! There is no such place as you
dream of in all this World.
Chr. But there is in the World to come.
Atheist. When I was at home in mine own Country, I
heard as you now affirm, and from that hearing went out
to see, and have been seeking this City this twenty years;
but find no more of it than I did the first day I set out.
Chr. We have both heard and believe that there is
such a place to be found.
Atheist. Had not I when at home believed, I had not
come thus far to seek; but finding none, (and yet I should,
had there been such a place to be found, for I have gone
to seek it further than you) I am going back again, and
will seek to refresh myself with the things that I then
cast away, for hopes of that which I now see is not.
Chr. Then said Christian to Hopeful his fellow, Is it
true which this man hath said?
Hope. Take heed, he is one of the Flatterers; remem-
ber what it hath cost us once already for our harkening
to such kind of Fellows. What! no Mount Sion? Did
we not see from the Delectable Mountains the Gate of
the City? Also, are we not now to walk by Faith? Let
us go on, said Hopeful, lest the man with the Whip over-
takes us again. You should have taught me that lesson,
which I will round you in the ears withall: Cease, my Son,
to hear the instruction that causeth to err from the words of
57


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
knowledge. I say, my Brother, cease to hear him, and
let us believe to the saving of the Soul.
Chr. My Brother, I did not put the question to thee
for that I doubted of the Truth of our belief myself, but
to prove thee, and to fetch from thee a fruit of the hon-
esty of thy heart. As for this man, I know that he is
blinded by the god of this World. Let thee and I go on,
knowing that we have belief of the Truth, and no lie is
of the Truth.
Hope. Now do I rejoyce in hope of the glory of God.
So they turned away from the man; and he laughing at
them went his way.


THE CELESTIAL CITY
. By John Bunyan
OW I saw in my Dream, that by this time the
Pilgrims were entering into the Country of
Beulah, whose air was very sweet and pleasant, the
way lying directly through it, they solaced themselves
there for a season. Yea, here they heard continually
the singing of Birds, and saw every day the Flowers
appear in the earth, and heard the voice of the Turtle
in the Land. In this Country the Sun shineth night
and day; wherefore this was beyond the Valley of the
Shadow of Death, and also out of the reach of Giant
Despair, neither could they from this place so much
as see Doubting Castle. Here they were within sight
of the City they were going to, also here met them some
of the inhabitants thereof; for in this land the Shin-
ing Ones commonly walked, because it was upon the
borders of Heaven. In this land also the contract
between the Bride and the Bridegroom was renewed;
yea, here, as the Bridegroom rejoyceth over the Bride, so
did their God rejoice over them. Here they had no want
of Corn and Wine; for in this place they met with abun-
dance of what they had sought for in all their Pilgrimage.
Here they heard voices from out of the City, loud voices,
saying, Say ye to the dnughter of Zion, Behold thy salva-
tion cometh, behold his reward is with him. Here all the

59


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
inhabitants of the Country called them, The holy People,
The redeemed of the Lord, Sought out, &c.
Now as they walked in this land, they had more re-
joicing then in parts more remote from the Kingdom to
which they were bound; and drawing near to the City,
they had yet a more perfect view thereof. It was builded
of Pearls and Precious Stones, also the Stfeet thereof was
paved with Gold; so that by reason of the natural glory
of the City, and the reflection of the Sun-beams upon it,
Christian with desire fell sick; Hopeful also had a fit or
two of the same disease, therefore here they lay by it a
while, crying out because of their pangs, If you see my
Beloved, tell him that I am sick of love.
But being a little strengthened, and better able to bear
their sickness, they walked on their way, and came yet
nearer and nearer, where were Orchards, Vineyards, and
Gardens, and their gates opened into the High-way.
Now as they came up to these places, behold the Gar-
diner stood in the way, to whom the Pilgrims said,
Whose goodly Vineyards and Gardens are these? He
answered, They are the King's, and are planted here for
his own delights, and also for the solace of Pilgrims. So
*Jie Gardiner had them into the Vineyards, and bid them
refresh themselves with Dainties. He also shewed them
there the King's walks, and the Arbors where he delighted
to be; and here they tarried and slept.
Now I beheld in my Dream, that they talked more in
their sleep at this time then ever they did in all their
Journey, and being in a muse thereabout, the Gardiner
said even to me, Wherefore musest thou at the matter?
It is the nature of the fruit of the grapes of these Vine-
60


THE CELESTIAL CITY
yards to go down so sweetly as to cause the lips of them
that are asleep to speak.
So I saw that when they awoke, they addressed them-
selves to go unto the City. But, as I said, the reflections
of the Sun upon the City (for the City was pure Gold)
was so extreamly glorious, that they could not as yet with
open face behold it, but through an Instrument made for
that purpose. So I saw that as they went on, there met
them two men, in Raiment that shone like Gold, also
their faces shone as the light.
These men asked the Pilgrims whence they came, and
they told them. They also asked them where they had
lodged, what difficulties and dangers, what comforts and
pleasures they had met in the way, and they told them.
Then said the men that met them, You have but two
difficulties more to meet with, and then you are in the
City.
Christian then and his Companion asked the men to
go along with them, so they told them they would. But
said they, you must obtain it by your own Faith. So I
saw in my Dream that they went on together till they
came in sight of the Gate.
Now I further saw that betwixt them and the Gate
was a River, but there was no Bridge to go over; the
River was very deep: at the sight therefore of this River
the Pilgrims were much stounded; but the men that went
with them said, You must go through, or you cannot
come at the Gate.
The Pilgrims then began to enquire if there was no
other way to the Gate; to which they answered, Yes,
but there hath not any, save two, to wit, Enoch and
61


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
Elijah, been permitted to tread that path, since the
foundation of the World, nor shall, untill the last Trum-
pet shall sound. The Pilgrims then, especially Christian,
began to dispond in his mind, and looked this way and
that, but no way could be found by them by which they
might escape the River. Then they asked the men if
the Waters were all of a depth? They said, No; yet
they could not help them in that case, for said they,
you shall find it deeper or shallower, as you believe in the
King of the place.
They then addressed themselves to the Water; and
entring, Christian began to sink, and crying out to his
good friend Hopeful, he said, I sink in deep Waters;
the Billows go over my head, all his Waves go over me,
Selah.
Then said the other, Be of good chear, my Brother, I
feel the bottom, and it is good. Then said Christian, Ah
my friend, the sorrows of death have compassed me
about, I shall not see the land that flows with milk and
honey. And with that a great darkness and horror fell
upon Christian, so that he could not see before him.
Also here he in great measure lost his senses, so that he
could neither remember, nor orderly talk of any of those
sweet refreshments that he had met with in the way of his
Pilgrimage. But all the words that he spake, still tended
to discover that he had horror of mind, and heart-fears
that he should die in that River, and never obtain en-
trance in at the Gate. Here also, as they that stood by
perceived, he was much in the troublesome thoughts of
the sins that he had committed, both since and before
he began to be a Pilgrim. 'T was also observed that he
62


THE CELESTIAL CITY
was troubled with apparitions of Hobgoblins and evil
Spirits, for ever and anon he would intimate so much by
words. Hopeful therefore here had much adoe to keep
his Brother's head above water; yea sometimes he would
be quite gone down, and then ere a while he would rise
up again half dead. Hopeful also would endeavour to
comfort him, saying, Brother, I see the Gate, and men
standing by to receive us. But Christian would answer,
'T is you, 't is you they wait for, you have been hopeful
ever since I knew you. And so have you, said he to
Christian. Ah Brother, said he, surely if I was right, he
would now arise to help me; but for my sins he hath
brought me into the snare, and hath left me. Then said
Hopeful, My Brother, you have quite forgot the Text,
where it is said of the wicked, There is no band in their
death, but their strength is firm, they are not troubled as
other men, neither are they plagued like other men. These
troubles and distresses that you go through in these
Waters are no sign that God hath forsaken you, but are
sent to try you, whether you will call to mind that which
heretofore you have received of his goodness, and live
upon him in your distresses.
Then I saw in my Dream, that Christian was as in a
muse a while. To whom also Hopeful added this word,
Be of good cheer, Jesus Christ maketh thee whole; and
with that Christian brake out with a loud voice, Oh
I see him again, and he tells me, When thou passest
through the Waters, I will be with thee; and through the
Rivers, they shall not overflow thee. Then they both took
courage, and the Enemy was after that as still as a stone
untill they were gone over. Christian therefore presently
63


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
found ground to stand upon, and so it followed that the
rest of the River was but shallow. Thus they got over.
Now upon the bank of the River on the other side, they
saw the two shining men again, who there waited for
them; wherefore being come out of the River, they
saluted them saying, We are ministring Spirits, sent
forth to minister for those that shall be heirs of salvation.
Thus they went along towards the Gate. Now you must
note that the City stood upon a mighty Hill, but the
Pilgrims went up that Hill with ease because they had
these two men to lead them up by the arms; also they
had left their Mortal Garments behind them in the River,
for though they went in with them, they came out with-
out them. They therefore went up here with much
agility and speed, though the foundation upon which the
City was framed was higher than the Clouds. They
therefore went up through the Regions of the Air,
sweetly talking as they went, being comforted, because
they safely got over the River, and had such glorious
Companions to attend them.
The talk they had with the Shining Ones was about
the glory of the place, who told them that the beauty
and glory of it was inexpressible. There, said they,
is the Mount Sion, the heavenly Jerusalem, the innu-
merable company of Angels, and the Spirits of Just Men
made perfect. You are going now, said they, to the
Paradice of God, wherein you shall see the Tree of Life,
and eat of the never-fading fruits thereof; and when you
come there, you shall have white Robes given you, and
your walk and talk shall be every day with the King,
even all the days of Eternity. There you shall not see
64


THE CELESTIAL CITY
again such things as you saw when you were in the
lower Region upon the earth, to wit, sorrow, sickness,
affliction, and death, for the former things are passed
away. You are now going to Abraham, to Isaac, and
Jacob, and to the Prophets, men that God hath taken
away from the evil to come, and that are now resting
upon their Beds, each one walking in his righteousness.
The men then asked, What must we do in the holy
place? To whom it was answered, You must there
receive the comfort of all your toil, and have joy for all
your sorrow; you must reap what you have sown, even
the fruit of all your Prayers and Tears, and sufferings
for the King by the way. In that place you must wear
Crowns of Gold, and enjoy the perpetual sight and
vision of the Holy One, for there you shall see him as he
is. There also you shall serve him continually with
praise, with shouting, and thanksgiving, whom you
desired to serve in the World, though with much diffi-
culty, because of the infirmity of your flesh. There
your eyes shall be delighted with seeing, and your ears
with hearing the pleasant voice of the Mighty One.
There you shall enjoy your friends again, that are gone
thither before you; and there you shall with joy receive
even every one that follows into the holy place after you.
There also shall you be cloathed with Glory and
Majesty, and put into an equipage fit to ride out with
the King of Glory. When he shall come with sound of
Trumpet in the Clouds, as upon the wings of the Wind,
you shall come with him; and when he shall sit upon the
Throne of Judgement, you shall sit by him; yea, and
when he shall pass sentence upon all the workers of
65


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
Iniquity, let them be Angels or Men, you also have a
voice in that Judgement, because they were his and your
Enemies. Also when he shall again return to the City,
you shall go too, with sound of Trumpet, and be ever
with him.
Now while they were thus drawing towards the Gate,
behold a company of the Heavenly Host came out to
meet them; to whom it was said by the other two Shining
Ones, These are the men that have loved our Lord when
they were in the World, and that have left all for his holy
Name, and he hath sent us to fetch them, and we have
brought them thus far on their desired Journey, that they
may go in and look their Redeemer in the face with joy.
Then the Heavenly Host gave a great shout, saying,
Blessed are they that are called to the Marriage Supper of
the Lamb. There came out also at this time to meet them
several of the King's Trumpeters, cloathed in white and
shining Raiment, who with melodious noises and loud,
made even the Heavens to echo with their sound. These
Trumpeters saluted Christian and his fellow with ten
thousand welcomes from the World, and this they did
with shouting and sound of Trumpet.
This done, they compassed them round on every side;
some went before, some behind, and some on the right
hand, some on the left, (as't were to guard them through
the upper Regions) continually sounding as they went
with melodious noise, in notes on high: so that the very
sight was to them that could behold it, as if Heaven itself
was come down to meet them. Thus therefore they
walked on together; and as they walked, ever and anon
these Trumpeters, even with joyful sound, would, by
66


THE CELESTIAL CITY
mixing their musick with looks and gestures, still signify
to Christian and his Brother, how welcome they were
into their company, and with what gladness they came
to meet them; and now were these two men as't were in
Heaven before they came at it, being swallowed up with
the sight of Angels, and with hearing of their melodious
notes. Here also they had the City itself in view, and
they thought they heard all the Bells therein ring to wel-
come them thereto. But above all, the warm and joyful
thoughts that they had about their own dwelling there,
with such company, and that for ever and ever. Oh, by
what tongue or pen can their glorious joy be expressed!
And thus they came up to the Gate.
Now when they were come up to the Gate, there was
written over it in Letters of Gold, Blessed are they that
do his Commandments, that they may have right to the
Tree of Life, and may enter in through the Gates into the
City.
Then I saw in my Dream, that the Shining Men bid
them call at the Gate; the which when they did, some
from above looked over the Gate, to wit, Enoch, Moses,
and Elijah, &c. to whom it was said, These Pilgrims are
come from the City of Destruction for the love that they
bear to the King of this place; and then the Pilgrims gave
in unto them each man his Certificate, which they had
received in the beginning; those therefore were carried in
to the King, who when he had read them, said, Where
are the men? To whom it was answered, They are
standing without the Gate. The King then commanded
to open the Gate, That the righteous nation, said he, that
keepeth Truth may enter in.
67


THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
Now I saw in my Dream that these two men went in
at the Gate: and loe, as they entered, they were trans-
figured, and they had Raiment put on that shone like
Gold. There was also that met them with Harps and
Crowns, and gave them to them, the Harps to praise
withall, and the Crowns in token of honor. Then I
heard in my Dream that all the Bells in the City rang
again for joy, and that it was said unto them, Enter ye
into the joy of your Lord. I also heard the men them-
selves, that they sang with a loud voice, saying, Blessing,
Honour, Glory, and Power be to him that sitteth upon the
Throne, and to the Lamb for ever and ever.
Now just as the Gates were opened to let in the men,
I looked in after them, and behold, the City shone like
the Sun; the Streets also were paved with Gold, and in
them walked many men, with Crowns on their heads,
Palms in their hands, and golden Harps to sing praises
withall.
There were also of them that had wings, and they
answered one another without intermission, saying,
Holy, Holy, Holy,'is the Lord. And after that they shut
up the Gates. Which when I had seen, I wished myself
among them.
Now while I was gazing upon all these things, I turned
my head to look back, and saw Ignorance come up to the
River-side; but he soon got over, and that without half
that difficulty which the other two men met with. For it
happened that there was then in that place one Vain-
hope a Ferry-man, that with his Boat helped him over;
so he, as the other I saw, did ascend the Hill to come up
to the Gate, only he came alone; neither did any man
68


THE CELESTIAL CITY
meet him with the least incouragement. When he was
come up to the Gate, he looked up to the writing that was
above, and then began to knock, supposing that entrance
should have been quickly administered to him; but he
was asked by the men that lookt over the top of the Gate,
Whence came you? and what would you have? He
answered, I have eat and drank in the presence of the
King, and he has taught in our Streets. Then they asked
him for his Certificate, that they might go in and shew it
to the King. So he fumbled in his bosom for one, and
found none. Then said they, Have you none? But the
man answered never a word. So they told the King, but
he would not come down to see him, but commanded the
two Shining Ones that conducted Christian and Hopeful
to the City, to go out and take Ignorance, and bind him
hand and foot, and have him away. Then they took him
up, and carried him through the air to the door that I saw
in the side of the Hill, and put him in there. Then I
saw that there was a way to Hell even from the Gates
of Heaven, as well as from the City of Destruction. So I
awoke, and behold it was a Dream.


ROBINSON CRUSOE





ROBINSON CRUSOE IS SHIP-
WRECKED
By Daniel Defoe
OUR ship was about a hundred and twenty tons'
burthen, carried six guns and fourteen men, besides
the master, his boy, and myself. We had on board no
large cargo of goods, except of such toys as were fit for
our trade with the negroes, — such as beads, bits of
glass, shells, and odd trifles, especially little looking-
glasses, knives, scissors, hatchets, and the like.
The same day I went on board we set sail, standing
away to the northward upon our own coast, with design
to stretch over for the African coast, when they came
about ten or twelve degrees of northern latitude, which,
it seems, was the manner of their course in those days.
We had very good weather, only excessive hot, all the
way upon our own coast, till we came the height of
Cape St. Augustino, from whence, keeping farther off
at sea, we lost sight of land, and steered as if we were
bound for the Isle Fernando de Noronha, holding our
course N. E. by N., and leaving those isles on the east.
In this course we passed the line in about twelve days'
time, and were, by our last observation, in 7° 22' northern
latitude, when a violent tornado, or hurricane, took us
quite out of our knowledge. It began from the southeast,
came about to the northwest, and then settled into the
73


ROBINSON CRUSOE
northeast, from whence it blew in such a terrible manner
that for twelve days together we could do nothing but
drive, and, scudding away before it, let it carry us where-
ever fate and the fury of the winds directed; and during
these twelve days, I need not say that I expected every
day to be swallowed up, nor, indeed, did any in the ship
expect to save their lives.
In this distress we had, besides the terror of the storm,
one of our men die of the calenture, and one man and
the boy washed overboard. About the twelfth day, the
weather abating a little, the master made an observa-
tion as well as he could, and found that he was in about
eleven degrees north latitude, but that he was twenty-
two degrees of longitude difference west from Cape St.
Augustino; so that he found he was gotten upon the
coast of Guiana, or the north part of Brazil, beyond the
river Amazon, toward that of the river Orinoco, com-
monly called the Great River, and began to consult with
me what course he should take, for the ship was leaky
and very much disabled, and he was going directly back
to the coast of Brazil.
I was positively against that; and looking over the
charts of the sea-coast of America with him, we con-
cluded there was no inhabited country for us to have
recourse to till we came within the circle of the Caribbee
Islands and therefore resolved to stand away for Barba-
does, which by keeping off at sea, to avoid the indraft
of the Bay or Gulf of Mexico, we might easily perform,
as we hoped, in about fifteen days' sail; whereas we could
not possibly make our voyage to the coast of Africa with-
out some assistance, both to our ship and to ourselves.
74


ROBINSON CRUSOE IS SHIPWRECKED
With this design we changed our course, and steered
away N. W. by W. in order to reach some of our Eng-
lish islands, where I hoped for relief; but our voyage
was otherwise determined; for being in the latitude of
12° 18', a second storm came upon us, which carried us
away with the same impetuosity westward, and drove
us so out of the very way of all human commerce that
had all our lives been saved as to the sea, we were ra-
ther in danger of being devoured by savages than ever
returning to our own country.
In this distress, the wind still blowing very hard, one
of our men early in the morning cried out, "Land!" and
we had no sooner ran out of the cabin to look out, in
hopes of seeing whereabouts in the world we were, but
the ship struck upon a sand, and in a moment, her
motion being so stopped, the sea broke over her in such
a manner that we expected we should all have perished
immediately; and we were immediately driven into our
close quarters, to shelter us from the very foam and spray
of the sea.
It is not easy for any one who has not been in the like
condition to describe or conceive the consternation of
men in such circumstances. We knew nothing where we
were, or upon what land it was we were driven, whether
an island or the main, whether inhabited or not in-
habited; and as the rage of the wind was still great,
though rather less than at first, we could not so much as
hope to have the ship hold many minutes without break-
ing in pieces, unless the winds, by a kind of miracle,
should turn immediately about. In a word, we sat
looking one upon another, and expecting death every
75


ROBINSON CRUSOE
moment, and every man acting accordingly, as pre-
paring for another world; for there was little or nothing
more for us to do in this. That which was our present
comfort, and all the comfort we had, was that, contrary
to our expectation, the ship did not break yet, and that
the master said the wind began to abate.
Now, though we thought that the wind did a little
abate, yet the ship having thus struck upon the sand,
and sticking too fast for us to expect her getting off, we
were in a dreadful condition indeed, and had nothing to
do but to think of saving our lives as well as we could.
We had a boat at our stern just before the storm, but she
was first staved by dashing against the ship's rudder, and
in the next place she broke away, and either sunk or was
driven off to sea, so there was no hope from her; we had
another boat on board, but how to get her off into the
sea was a doubtful thing. However, there was no room
to debate, for we fancied the ship would break in pieces
every minute, and some told us she was actually broken
already.
In this distress, the mate of our vessel lays hold of
the boat, and with the help of the rest of the men they
got her slung over the ship's side; and getting all into
her, let go, and committed ourselves, being eleven in
number, to God's mercy and the wild sea; for though
the storm was abated considerably, yet the sea went
dreadful high upon the shore, and might well be called
den wild Zee, as the Dutch call the sea in a storm.
And now our case was very dismal indeed, for we all
saw plainly that the sea went so high that the boat
could not live, and that we should be inevitably drowned.
76


ROBINSON CRUSOE IS SHIPWRECKED
As to making sail, we had none; nor if we had, could we
have done anything with it; so we worked at the oar
towards the land, though with heavy hearts, like men
going to execution, for we all knew that when the boat
came nearer the shore, she would be dashed in a thous-
and pieces by the breach of the sea. However, we com-
mitted our souls to God in the most earnest manner;
and the wind driving us towards the shore, we hastened
our destruction with our own hands, pulling as well as
we could towards land.
What the shore was, whether rock or sand, whether
steep or shoal, we knew not; the only hope that could
rationally give us the least shadow of expectation was,
if we might happen into some bay or gulf, or the mouth
of some river, where by great chance we might have run
our boat in, or got under the lee of the land, and per-
haps made smooth water. But there was nothing of this
appeared; but as we made nearer and nearer the shore,
the land looked more frightful than the sea.
After we had rowed, or rather driven, about a league
and a half, as we reckoned it, a raging wave, mountain-
like, came rolling astern of us, and plainly bade us ex-
pect the coup de grace. In a word, it took us with such a
fury that it overset the boat at once; and separating us,
as well from the boat as from one another, gave us not
time hardly to say, "O God!" for we were all swallowed
up in a moment.
Nothing can describe the confusion of thought which
I felt when I sunk into the water; for though I swam
very well, yet I could not deliver myself from the waves
so as to draw breath, till that wave having driven me,
77


ROBINSON CRUSOE
or rather carried me, a vast way on towards the shore,
and having spent itself, went back, and left me upon the
land almost dry, but half dead with the water I took in.
I had so much presence of mind, as well as breath left,
that seeing myself nearer the mainland than I expected,
I got upon my feet, and endeavored to make on towards
the land as fast as I could, before another wave should
return and take me up again. But I soon found it was
impossible to avoid it; for I saw the sea come after me
as high as a great hill, and as furious as an enemy, which
I had no means Or strength to contend with. My busi-
ness was to hold my breath, and raise myself upon the
water, if I could; and so, by swimming, to preserve my
breathing, and pilot myself towards the shore, if possible;
my greatest concern now being that the sea, as it would
carry me a great way towards the shore when it came on,
might not carry me back again with it when it gave back
towards the sea.
The wave that came upon me again buried me at once
twenty or thirty feet deep in its own body, and I could
feel myself carried with a mighty force and swiftness
towards the shore a very great way; but I held my breath,
and assisted myself to swim still forward with all my
might. I was ready to burst with holding my breath
when, as I felt myself rising up, so, to my immediate
relief, I found my head and hands shoot out above the
surface of the water; and though it was not two seconds
of time that I could keep myself so, yet it relieved me
greatly, gave me breath and new courage. I was covered
again with water a good while, but not so long but I held
it out; and finding the water had spent itself, and began
78


ROBINSON CRUSOE IS SHIPWRECKED
to return, I struck forward against the return of the
waves, and felt ground again with my feet. I stood still
a few moments to recover breath, and till the water went
from me, and then took to my heels and ran with what
strength I had farther towards the shore. But neither
would this deliver me from the fury of the sea, which
came pouring in after me again, and twice more I was
lifted up by the waves and carried forwards as before,
the shore being very flat.
The last time of these two had well near been fatal to
me; for the sea, having hurried me along as before,
landed me, or rather dashed me, against a piece of a rock,
and that with such force as it left me senseless, and in-
deed helpless as to my own deliverance; for the blow
taking my side and breast, beat the breath as it were
quite out of my body; and had it returned again imme-
diately, I must have been strangled in the water. But
I recovered a little before the return of the waves, and
seeing I should be covered again with the water, I re-
solved to hold fast by a piece of the rock, and so to hold
my breath, if possible, till the wave went back. Now as
the waves were not so high as at first, being near land,
I held my hold till the wave abated, and then fetched
another run, which brought me so near the shore that the
next wave, though it went over me, yet did not so swallow
me up as to carry me away, and the next run I took I got
to the mainland, where, to my great comfort, I clam-
bered up the cliffs of the shore, and sat me down upon
the grass, free from danger, and quite out of the reach of
the water.
I was now landed, and safe on shore, and began to
79


ROBINSON CRUSOE
look up and thank God that my life was saved in a case
wherein there was some minutes before scarce any room
to hope. I believe it is impossible to express to the life
what the ecstasies and transports of the soul are when it
is so saved, as I may say, out of the very grave; and I do
not wonder now at that custom, viz., that when a male-
factor who has the halter about his neck, is tied up, and
just going to be turned off, and has a reprieve brought to
him — I say, I do not wonder that they bring a surgeon
with it, to let him blood that very moment they tell him of
it, that the surprise may not drive the animal spirits from
the heart, and overwhelm him: —
"For sudden joys, like griefs, confound at first."
I walked about on the shore, lifting up my hands, and
my whole being, as I may say, wrapt up in the contem-
plation of my deliverance, making a thousand gestures
and motions which I cannot describe, reflecting upon all
my comrades that were drowned, and that there should
not be one soul saved but myself; for, as for them, I
never saw them afterwards, or any sign of them, except
three of their hats, one cap, and two shoes that were not
fellows.
I cast my eyes to the stranded vessel, when the breach
and froth of the sea being so big I could hardly see it, it
lay so far off, and considered, Lord! how was it possible
I could get on shore?
After I had solaced my mind with the comfortable part
of my condition, I began to look round me to see what
kind of place I was in, and what was next to be done, and
I soon found my comforts abate, and that, in a word, I
80


ROBINSON CRUSOE IS SHIPWRECKED
had a dreadful deliverance; for I was wet, had no clothes
to shift me, nor anything either to eat or drink to comfort
me, neither did I see any prospect before me but that of
perishing with hunger, or being devoured by wild beasts;
and that which was particularly afflicting to me was, that
I had no weapon either to hunt and kill any creature for
my sustenance, or to defend myself against any other crea-
tures that might desire to kill me for theirs. In a word, I
had nothing about me but a knife, a tobacco-pipe, and a
little tobacco in a box. This was all my provision; and
this threw me into terrible agonies of mind, that for a
while I ran about like a madman. Night coming upon me,
I began, with a heavy heart, to consider what would be
my lot if there were any ravenous beasts in that country,
seeing at night they always come abroad for their prey.
All the remedy that offered to my thoughts at that
time was, to get up into a thick bushy tree like a fir, but
thorny, which grew near me, and where I resolved to sit
all night, and consider the next day what death I should
die, for as yet I saw no prospect of life. I walked about
a furlong from the shore, to see if I could find any fresh
water to drink, which I did, to my great joy; and having
drank, and put a little tobacco in my mouth to prevent
hunger, I went to the tree, and getting up into it, endeav-
ored to place myself so, as that if I should sleep I might
not fall; and having cut me a short stick, like a truncheon
for my defense, I took up my lodging, and having been
excessively fatigued, I fell fast asleep, and slept as com-
fortably as, I believe, few could have done in my con-
dition, and found myself the most refreshed with it that
I think I ever was on such an occasion.


UNLOADING A WRECK
By Daniel Defoe
MY next work was to view the country and seek a
proper place for my habitation, and where to stow
my goods to secure them from whatever might happen.
Where I was, I yet knew not; whether on the continent
or on an island; whether inhabited or not inhabited;
whether in danger of wild beasts or not. There was a
hill, not above a mile from me, which rose up very steep
and high, and which seemed to overtop some other hills,
which lay as in a ridge from it, northward. I took out
one of the fowling-pieces and one of the pistols, and a
horn of powder; and thus armed, I traveled for discovery
up to the top of that hill, where, after I had with great
labor and difficulty got to the top, I saw my fate to my
great affliction, viz., that I was in an island environed
every way with the sea, no land to be seen, except some
rocks which lay a great way off, and two small islands
less than this, which lay about three leagues to the west.
I found, also, that the island I was in was barren,
and, as I saw good reason to believe, uninhabited, ex-
cept by wild beasts, of whom, however, I saw none; yet
I saw abundance of fowls, but knew not their kinds;
neither, when I killed them, could I tell what was fit
for food, and what not. At my coming back, I shot at a
great bird which I saw sitting upon a tree on the side of
82


UNLOADING A WRECK
a great wood. I believe it was the first gun that had
been fired there since the creation of the world. I had
no sooner fired, but from all the parts of the wood there
arose an innumerable number of fowls of many sorts,
making a confused screaming, and crying every one ac-
cording to his usual note; but not one of them of any
kind that I knew. As for the creature I killed, I took it
to be a kind of a hawk, its color and beak resembling it,
but it had no talons or claws more than common; its
flesh was carrion, and fit for nothing.
Contented with this discovery, I came back to my
raft, and fell to work to bring my cargo on shore, which
took me up the rest of that day; and what to do with
myself at night I knew not, nor indeed where to rest; for
I was afraid to lie down on the ground, not knowing but
some wild beast might devour me, though, as I after-
wards found, there was really no need for those fears.
However, as well as I could, I barricaded myself round
with the chests and boards that I had brought on shore,
and made a kind of a hut for that night's lodging; as for
food, I yet saw not which way to supply myself, except
that I had seen two or three creatures like hares run out
of the wood where I shot the fowl.
I now began to consider, that I might yet get a great
many things out of the ship which would be useful to me,
and particularly some of the rigging and sails, and such
other things as might come to land; and I resolved to
make another voyage on board the vessel, if possible.
And as I knew that the first storm that blew must
necessarily break her all in pieces, I resolved to set all
other things apart till I got everything out of the ship
83


ROBINSON CRUSOE
that I could get. Then I called a council, that is to say,
in my thoughts, whether I should take back the raft,
but this appeared impracticable; so I resolved to go as
before, when the tide was down; and I did so, only that
I stripped before I went from my hut, having nothing on
but a chequered shirt and a pair of linen drawers, and a
pair of pumps on my feet.
* I got on board the ship as before, and prepared a
second raft, and having had experience of the first, I
neither made this so unwieldy, nor loaded it so hard;
but yet I brought away several things very useful to me;
as, first, in the carpenter's stores I found two or three
bags full of nails and spikes, a great screw-jack, a dozen
or two of hatchets, and, above all, that most useful thing
called a grindstone. All these I secured, together with
several things belonging to the gunner, particularly two
or three iron crows, and two barrels of musket bullets,
seven muskets, and another fowling-piece, with some
small quantity of powder more; a large bag full of small-
shot, and a great roll of sheet lead; but this last was so
heavy I could not hoist it up to get it over the ship's side.
Besides these things, I took all the men's clothes that I
could find, and a spare foretop sail, a hammock, and
some bedding; and with this I loaded my second ra£t,
and brought them all safe on shore, to my very great
comfort.
I was under some apprehensions during my absence
from the land that at least my provisions might be
devoured on shore; but when I came back, I found no
sign of any visitor, only there sat a creature like a wild-
cat upon one of the chests, which, when I came towards
84





PUBLIC LIBRAE'


UNLOADING A WRECK
it, ran away a little distance, and then stood still. She
sat very composed and unconcerned, and looked full in
my face, as if she had a mind to be acquainted with me.
I presented my gun at her; but as she did not understand
it, she was perfectly unconcerned at it, nor did she offer
to stir away; upon which I tossed her a bit of biscuit,
though, by the way, I was not very free of it, for my store
was not great. However, I spared her a bit, I say, and
she went to it, smelled of it, and ate it, and looked (as
pleased) for more; but I thanked her, and could spare
no more, so she marched off.
Having got my second cargo on shore, though I was
fain to open the barrels of powder and bring them by
parcels, for they were too heavy, being large casks, I
went to work to make me a little tent with the sail and
some poles which I cut for that purpose; and into this
tent I brought everything that I knew would spoil either
with rain or sun; and I piled all the empty chests and
casks up in a circle round the tent, to fortify it from any
sudden attempt, either from man or beast.
When I had done this I blocked up the door of the
tent with some boards within, and an empty chest set
up on end without; and spreading one of the beds upon
the ground, laying my two pistols just at my head, and
my gun at length by me, I went to bed for the first time,
and slept very quietly all night, for I was very weary
and heavy; for the night before I had slept little, and
had labored very hard all day, as well to fetch all those
things from the ship, as to get them on shore.
I had the biggest magazine of all kinds now that ever
was laid up, I believe, for one man; but I was not satis-
85


ROBINSON CRUSOE
fied still, for while the ship sat upright in that posture,
I thought I ought to get everything out of her that I
could. So every day at low water I went on board, and
brought away something or other; but, particularly,
the third time I went I brought away as much of the
rigging as I could, as also all the small ropes and rope-
twine I could get, with a piece of spare canvas, which
was to mend the sails upon occasion, and the barrel of
wet gunpowder; in a word, I brought away all the sails
first and last, only that I was fain to cut them in pieces,
and bring as much at a time as I could; for they were no
more useful to be sails, but as mere canvas only.
But that which comforted me more still was that, at
last of all, after I had made five or six such voyages as
these, and thought I had nothing more to expect from
the ship that was worth my meddling with, — I say,
after all this, I found a great hogshead of bread, and
three large runlets of rum or spirits, and a box of sugar,
and a barrel of fine flour; this was surprising to me,
because I had given over expecting any more provisions,
except what was spoilt by the water. I soon emptied the
hogshead of that bread, and wrapped it up parcel by
parcel in pieces of the sails, which I cut out; and, in a
word, I got all this safe on shore also.
The next day I made another voyage. And now,
having plundered the ship of what was portable and fit
to hand out, I began with the cables; and cutting the
great cable into pieces, such as I could move, I got two
cables and a hawser on shore, with all the iron-work I
could get; and having cut down the sprit-sail yard, and
the mizzen yard, and everything I could to make a large
86


UNLOADING A WRECK
raft, I loaded it with all those heavy goods, and came
away. But my good luck began now to leave me; for
this raft was so unwieldy, and so overladen, that after I
was entered the little cove where I had landed the rest of
my goods, not being able to guide it so handily as I did
the other, it overset, and threw me and all my cargo
into the water. As for myself, it was no great harm,
for I was near the shore; but as to my cargo, it was
great part of it lost, especially the iron, which I ex-
pected would have been of great use to me. However,
when the tide was out I got most of the pieces of cable
ashore, and some of the iron, though with infinite labor;
for I was fain to dip for it into the water, a work which
fatigued me very much. After this I went every day on
board, and brought away what I could get.
I had been now thirteen days on shore, and had been
eleven times on board the ship; in which time I had
brought away all that one pair of hands could well be
supposed capable to bring, though I believe verily, had
the calm weather held, I should have brought away the
whole ship piece by piece. But preparing the twelfth
time to go on board, I found the wind begin to rise. How-
ever, at low water I went on board, and though I thought
I had rummaged the cabin so effectually as that nothing
more could be found, yet I discovered a locker with ,
drawers in it, in one of which I found two or three
razors, and one pair of large scissors, with some ten or a
dozen of good knives and forks; in another, I found about
thirty-six pounds value in money, some European coin,
some Brazil, some pieces of eight, some gold, some silver.
I smiled to myself at the sight of this money. "O
87


ROBINSON CRUSOE
drug!" said I aloud, "what art thou good for? Thou
art not worth to me, no, not the taking off of the ground;
one of those knives is worth all this heap. I have no
manner of use for thee; even remain where thou art, and
go to the bottom as a creature whose life is not worth
saving." However, upon second thoughts I took it away;
and wrapping all this in a piece of canvas, I began to
think of making another raft; but while I was pre-
paring this, I found the sky overcast, and the wind be-
gan to rise, and in a quarter of an hour it blew a fresh
gale from the shore. It presently occurred to me that
it was in vain to pretend to make a raft with the wind off
shore, and that it was my business to be gone before the
tide of flood began, otherwise I might not be able to
reach the shore at all. Accordingly I let myself down
into the water, and swam across the channel, which lay
between the ship and the sands, and even that with
difficulty enough, partly with the weight of the things
I had about me, and partly the roughness of the water;
for the wind rose very hastily, and before it was quite
high water it blew a storm.
But I was gotten home to my little tent, where I lay
with all my wealth about me very secure. It blew very
hard all that night, and in the morning when I looked
out, behold, no more ship was to be seen. I was a little
surprised, but recovered myself with this satisfactory
reflection, viz., that I had lost no time, nor abated no
diligence, to get everything out of her that could be use-
ful to me, and that indeed there was little left in her that
I was able to bring away if I had had more time.


ROBINSON CRUSOE'S FIRST
HOME ON THE ISLAND
By Daniel Defoe
INOW gave over any more thoughts of the ship, or
of anything out of her, except what might drive on
shore from her wreck, as indeed divers pieces of her after-
wards did; but those things were of small use to me.
My thoughts were now wholly employed about securing
myself against either savages, if any should appear, or
wild beasts, if any were in the island; and I had many
thoughts of the method how to do this, and what kind
of dwelling to make, whether I should make me a cave
in the earth, or a tent upon the earth; and, in short, I
resolved upon both, the manner and description of which
it may not be improper to give an account of.
I soon found the place I was in was not for my settle-
ment, particularly because it was upon a low moorish
ground near the sea, and I believed would not be whole-
some; and more particularly because there was no fresh
water near it. So I resolved to find a more healthy and
more convenient spot of ground.
I consulted several things in my situation, which I
found would be proper for me. First, health and fresh
water, I just now mentioned. Secondly, shelter from the
heat of the sun. Thirdly, security from ravenous crea-
tures, whether men or beasts. Fourthly, a view to the


ROBINSON CRUSOE
sea, that if God sent any ship in sight I might not lose
any advantage for my deliverance, of which I was not
to banish all my expectation yet.
In search of a place proper for this, I found a little
plain on the side of a rising hill, whose front towards this
little plain was steep as a house-side, so that nothing
could come down upon me from the top. On the side of
this rock there was a hollow place, worn a little way in,
like the entrance or door of a cave; but there was not
really any cave, or way into the rock at all.
On the flat of the green, just before this hollow place,
I resolved to pitch my tent. This plain was not above an
hundred yards broad, and about twice as long, and lay
like a green before my door, and at the end of it de-
scended irregularly every way down into the low grounds
by the seaside. It was on the N. N. W. side of the hill, so
that I was sheltered from the heat every day, till it came
to a W. and by S. sun, or thereabouts, which in those
countries is near the setting.
Before I set up my tent, I drew a half-circle before the
hollow place, which took in about ten yards in its semi-
diameter from the rock, and twenty yards in its diameter
from its beginning and ending. In this half-circle I
pitched two rows of strong stakes, driving them into the
ground till they stood very firm like piles, the biggest end
being out of the ground about five feet and a half, and
sharpened on the top. The two rows did not stand above
six inches from one another.
Then I took the pieces of cable which I had cut in the
ship, and laid them in rows one upon another, within the
circle, between these two rows of stakes, up to the top,
90


FIRST HOME ON THE ISLAND
placing other stakes in the inside leaning against them,
about two feet and a half high, like a spur to a post; and
this fence was so strong that neither man nor beast could
get into it, or over it. This cost me a great deal of time
and labor, especially to cut the piles in the woods, bring
them to the place, and drive them into the earth.
The entrance into this place I made to be not by a
door, but by a short ladder to go over the top; which
ladder, when I was in, I lifted over after me, and so I was
completely fenced in, and fortified, as I thought, from all
the world, and consequently slept secure in the night,
which otherwise I could not have done; though, as it
appeared afterward, there was no need of all this caution
from the enemies that I apprehended danger from.
Into this fence or fortress, with infinite labor, I carried
all my riches, all my provisions, ammunition, and stores,
of which you have the account above; and I made me a
large tent, which, to preserve me from the rains that in
one part of the year are very violent there, I made double,
viz., one smaller tent within, and one larger tent above it,
and covered the uppermost with a large tarpaulin, which
I had saved among the sails. And now I lay no more for
a while in the bed which I had brought on shore, but
in a hammock, which was indeed a very good one, and
belonged to the mate of the ship.
Into this tent I brought all my provisions, and every-
thing that would spoil by the wet; and having thus en-
closed all my goods, I made up the entrance, which, till
now, I had left open, and so passed and repassed, as I
said, by a short ladder.
When I had done this, I began to work my way into
91


ROBINSON CRUSOE
the rock; and bringing all the earth and stones that I
dug down out through my tent, I laid them up within
my fence in the nature of a terrace, so that it raised the
ground within about a foot and a half; and thus I made
me a cave just behind my tent which served me like a
cellar to my house.
It cost me much labor and many days before all these
things were brought to perfection, and therefore I must
go back to some other things which took up some of my
thoughts. At the same time it happened, after I had laid
my scheme for the setting up my tent and making the
cave, that a storm of rain falling from a thick dark
cloud, a sudden flash of lightning happened, and after
that a great clap of thunder, as is naturally the effect of
it. I was not so much surprised with the lightning as I
was with a thought which darted into my mind as swift
as the lightning itself. Oh, my powder! My very heart
sunk within me when I thought, that at one blast all my
powder might be destroyed, on which, not my defense
only, but the providing me food, as I thought, entirely
depended. I was nothing near so anxious about my
own danger; though had the powder taken fire, I had
never known who had hurt me.
Such impression did this make upon me that after the
storm was over I laid aside all my works, my building
and fortifying, and applied myself to make bags and
boxes to separate the powder, and keep it a little and a
little in a parcel, in hope that whatever might come it
might not all take fire at once, and to keep it so apart
that it should not be possible to make one part fire
another. I finished this work in about a fortnight; and I
92


FIRST HOME ON THE ISLAND
think my powder, which in all was about 240 pounds'
weight, was divided in not less than a hundred parcels.
As to the barrel that had been wet, I did not apprehend
any danger from that, so I placed it in my new cave,
which in my fancy I called my kitchen, and the rest I
hid up and down in holes among the rocks, so that no
wet might come to it, marking very carefully where I
laid it.
In the interval of time while this was doing, I went out
once, at least, every day with my gun, as well to divert
myself as to see if I could kill anything fit for food, and
as near as I could to acquaint myself with what the
island produced. The first time I went out, I presently
discovered that there were goats in the island, which
was a great satisfaction to me; but then it was attended
with this misfortune to me, viz., that they were so shy,
so subtle, and so swift of foot that it was the difficultest
thing in the world to come at them. But I was not dis-
couraged at this, not doubting but I might now and
then shoot one, as it soon happened; for after I had
found their haunts a little, I laid wait in this manner for
them. I observed if they saw me in the valleys, though
they were upon the rocks, they would run away as in a
terrible fright; but if they were feeding in the valleys,
and I was upon the rocks, they took no notice of me,
from whence I concluded that, by the position of their
optics, their sight was so directed downward that they
did not readily see objects that were above them. So
afterward I took this method: I always climbed the rocks
first to get above them, and then had frequently a fair
mark. The first shot I made among these creatures I
93


ROBINSON CRUSOE
killed a she-goat, which had a little kid by her, which
she gave suck to, which grieved me heartily; but when
the old one fell, the kid stood stock still by her tin I
came and took her up; and not only so, but when I
carried the old one with me upon my shoulders, the kid
followed me quite to my enclosure; upon which I laid
down the dam, and took the kid in my arms, and carried
it over my pale, in hopes to have bred it up tame; but it
would not eat, so I was forced to kill it, and eat it myself.
These two supplied me with flesh a great while, for I eat
sparingly, and saved my provisions, my bread especially,
as much as possibly I could.
Having now fixed my habitation, I found it absolutely
necessary to provide a place to make a fire in, and fuel to
burn; and what I did for that, as also how I enlarged my
cave, and what conveniences I made, I shall give a full
account of in its place. But I must first give some little
account of myself, and of my thoughts about living,
which it may well be supposed were not a few.
I had a dismal prospect of my condition; for as I was
not cast away upon that island without being driven, as
is said, by a violent storm, quite out of the course of our
intended voyage, and a great way, viz., some hundreds
of leagues, out of the ordinary course of the trade of
mankind, I had great reason to consider it as a deter-
mination of Heaven that in this desolate place, and in
this desolate manner, I should end my life. The tears
would run plentifully down my face when I made these
reflections, and sometimes I would expostulate with my-
self, why Providence should thus completely ruin its
creatures, and render them so absolutely miserable, so
94


FIRST HOME ON THE ISLAND
without help abandoned, so entirely depressed, that it
could hardly be rational to be thankful for such a life.
But something always returned swift upon me to check
these thoughts, and to reprove me; and particularly one
day, walking with my gun in my hand by the seaside, I
was very pensive upon the subject of my present con-
dition, when Reason, as it were, expostulated with me
t' other way, thus: "Well, you are in a desolate con-
dition, it is true, but pray remember, where are the rest
of you? Did not you come eleven of you into the boat?
Where are the ten? Why were not they saved, and you
lost? Why were you singled out? Is it better to be here,
or there?" And then I pointed to the sea. All evils are
to be considered with the good that is in them, and with
what worse attends them.
Then it occurred to me again, how well I was furnished
for my subsistence, and what would have been my case
if it had not happened, which was an hundred thousand
to one, that the ship floated from the place where she
first struck and was driven so near to the shore that I had
time to get all these things out of her; what would have
been my case, if I had been to have lived in the condition
in which I at first came on shore, without necessaries of
life, or necessaries to supply and procure them ?" Par-
ticularly," said I aloud (thoughto myself), "whatshould
I have done without a gun, without ammunition, without
any tools to make anything or to work with, without
clothes, bedding, a tent, or any manner of covering?"
and that now I had all these to a sufficient quantity, and
was in a fair way to provide myself in such a manner, as
to live without my gun when my ammunition was spent;
95


ROBINSON CRUSOE
so that I had a tolerable view of subsisting without any
want as long as I lived. For I considered from the be-
ginning how I would provide for the accidents that might
happen, and for the time that was to come, even not only
after my ammunition should be spent, but even after my
health or strength should decay.
I confess I had not entertained any notion of my am-
munition being destroyed at one blast — I mean, my
powder being blown up by lightning; and this made the
thoughts of it so surprising to me when it lightened and
thundered, as I observed just now.


ROBINSON CRUSOE BUILDS A BOAT
By Daniel Defoe
YOU may be sure my thoughts ran many times upon
the prospect of land which I had seen from the
other side of the island, and I was not without secret
wishes that I were on shore there, fancying that seeing
the mainland, and in an inhabited country, I might find
some way or other to convey myself farther, and per-
haps at last find some means of escape.
But all this while I made no allowance for the dangers
of such a condition, and how I might fall into the hands
of savages, and perhaps such as I might have reason to
think far worse than the lions and tigers of Africa; that
if I once came into their power, I should run a hazard
more than a thousand to one of being killed, and perhaps
of being eaten; for I had heard that the people of the
Caribbean coasts were cannibals, or man-eaters, and I
knew by the latitude that I could not be far off from that
shore. That suppose they were not cannibals, yet that
they might kill me, as many Europeans who had fallen
into their hands had been served, even when they had
been ten or twenty together, much more I, that was but
one, and could make little or no defense, — all these
things, I say, which I ought to have considered well of,
and did cast up in my thoughts afterwards, yet took
up none of my apprehensions at first, but my head
97


ROBINSON CRUSOE
ran mightily upon the thought of getting over to the
shore.
Now I wished for my boy Xury, and the long-boat
with the shoulder-of-mutton sail, with which I sailed
above a thousand miles on the coast of Africa; but this
was in vain. Then I thought I would go and look at our
ship's boat, which, as I have said, was blown up upon
the shore a great way, in the storm, when we were first
cast away. She lay almost where she did at first, but not
quite; and was turned, by the force of the waves and the
winds, almost bottom upwards, against a high ridge of
beachy rough sand, but no water about her, as before.
If I had had hands to have refitted her, and to have
launched her into the water, the boat would have done
well enough, and I might have gone back into the Brazils
with her easily enough; but I might have foreseen that I
could no more turn her, and set her upright upon her
bottom, than I could remove the island. However, I
went to the woods, and cut levers and rollers, and brought
them to the boat, resolved to try what I could do; sug-
gesting to myself that if I could but turn her down, I
might easily repair the damage she had received, and
she would be a very good boat, and I might go to sea in
her very easily.
I spared no pains, indeed, in this piece of fruitless toil,
and spent, I think, three or four weeks about it. At last,
finding it impossible to heave it up withmy little strength,
I fell to digging away the sand, to undermine it, and so
to make it fall down, setting pieces of wood to thrust and
guide it right in the fall. But when I had done this, I
was unable to stir it up again, or to get under it, much
98


ROBINSON CRUSOE BUILDS A BOAT
less to move it forward towards the water; so I was forced
to give it over. And yet, though I gave over the hopes of
the boat, my desire to venture over for the main in-
creased, rather than decreased, asthemeans foritseemed
impossible.
This at length put me upon thinking whether it was
not possible to make myself a canoe, or periagua, such
as the natives of those climates make, even without tools,
or, as I might say, without hands, viz., of the trunk of a
great tree. This I not only thought possible, but easy, and
pleased myself extremely with the thoughts of making it,
and with my having much more convenience for it than
any of the negroes or Indians; but not at all considering
the particular inconveniences which I lay under more
than the Indians did, viz., want of hands to move it,
when it was made, into the water, a difficulty much
harder for me to surmount than all the consequences of
want of tools could be to them. For what was it to me,
that when I had chosen a vast tree in the woods, I might
with much trouble cut it down, if, after I might be able
with my tools to hew and dub the outside into the proper
shape of a boat, and burn or cut out the inside to make
it hollow, so to make a boat of it; if, after all this, I must
leave it just there where I found it, and was not able to
launch it into the water?
One would have thought I could not have had the
least reflection upon my mind of my circumstance while
I was making this boat, but I should have immediately
thought how I should get it into the sea; but my thoughts
were so intent upon my voyage over the sea in it that I
never once considered how I should get it off of the land;
810166 A
99


ROBINSON CRUSOE
and it was really, in its own nature, more easy for me to
guide it over forty-five miles of sea than about forty-
five fathoms of land, where it lay, to set it afloat in the
water.
I went to work upon this boat the most like a fool
that ever man did who had any of his senses awake.
I pleased myself with the design, without determining
whether I was ever able to undertake it. Not but that
the difficulty of launching my boat came often into my
head; but I put a stop to my own inquiries into it by
this foolish answer which I gave myself: "Let's first
make it; I 'll warrant I 'll find some way or other to get
it along when't is done."
This was a most preposterous method; but the eager-
ness of my fancy prevailed, and to work I went. I
felled a cedar-tree: I question much whether Solomon
ever had such a one for the building of the Temple at
Jerusalem. It was five feet ten inches diameter at the
lower part next the stump, and four feet eleven inches
diameter at the end of twenty-two feet, after which it
lessened for a while, and then parted into branches. It
was not without infinite labor that I felled this tree. I
was twenty days hacking and hewing at it at the bottom;
I was fourteen more getting the branches and limbs, and
the vast spreading head of it cut off, which I hacked and
hewed through with axe and hatchet, and inexpressible
labor. After this, it cost me a month to shape it and
dub it to a proportion, and to something like the bottom
of a boat, that it might swim upright as it ought to do.
It cost me near three months more to clear the inside,
and work it so as to make an exact boat of it. This I
100


ROBINSON CRUSOE BUILDS A BOAT
did, indeed, without fire, by mere mallet and chisel, and
by the dint of hard labor, till I had brought it to be a
very handsome periagua, and big enough to have carried
six and twenty men, and consequently big enough to have
carried me and all my cargo.
When I had gone through this work, I was extremely
delighted with it. The boat was really much bigger than
I ever saw a canoe or periagua that was made of one
tree, in my life. Many a weary stroke it had cost, you
may be sure; and there remained nothing but to get it
into the water; and had I gotten it into the water, I
make no question but I should have begun the maddest
voyage, and the most unlikely to be performed, that
ever was undertaken.
But all my devices to get it into the water failed me,
though they cost me infinite labor too. It lay about one
hundred yards from the water, and not more; but the
first inconvenience was, it was uphill towards the creek.
Well, to take away this discouragement, I resolved to
dig into the surface of the earth, and so make a declivity.
This I began, and it cost me a prodigious deal of pains;
but who grudges pains that have their deliverance in
view? But when this was worked through, and this
difficulty managed, it was still much at one, for I could
no more stir the canoe than I could the other boat.
Then I measured the distance of ground, and resolved
to cut a dock or canal, to bring the water up to the canoe,
seeing I could not bring the canoe down to the water.
Well, I began this work; and when I began to enter into
it, and calculate how deep it was to be dug, how broad,
how the stuff to be thrown out, I found that by the
101


ROBINSON CRUSOE
number of hands I had, being none but my own, it must
have been ten or twelve years before I should have gone
through with it; for the shore lay high, so that at the
upper end it must have been at least twenty feet deep;
so at length, though with great reluctancy, I gave this
attempt over also.
This grieved me heartily; and now I saw, though too
late, the folly of beginning a work before we count the
cost and before we judge rightly of our own strength to
go through with it.


THE MYSTERIOUS FOOTPRINT
By Daniel Defoe
IWAS something impatient to have the use of my
boat, though very loath to run any more hazards;
and therefore sometimes I sat contriving ways to get
her about the island, and at other times I sat myself
down contented enough without her. But I had a strange
uneasiness in my mind to go down to the point of the
island where, as I have said, in my last ramble, I went
up the hill to see how the shore lay, and how the current
set, that I might see what I had to do. This inclination
increased upon me every day, and at length I resolved
to travel thither by land, following the edge of the shore.
I did so; but had any one in England been to meet such
a man as I was, it must either have frighted him, or
raised a great deal of laughter; and as I frequently stood
still to look at myself, I could not but smile at the notion
of my traveling through Yorkshire, with such an equi-
page, and in such a dress. Be pleased to take a sketch of
my figure, as follows: —
I had a great high shapeless cap, made of a goat-
skin, with a flap hanging down behind, as well to keep
the sun from me, as to shoot the rain off from running
into my neck; nothing being so hurtful in these climates
as the rain upon the flesh, under the clothes.
I had a short jacket of goat-skin, the skirts coming
103


ROBINSON CRUSOE
down to about the middle of my thighs; and a pair of
open-kneed breeches of the same. The breeches were
made of the skin of an old he-goat, whose hair hung
down such a length on either side, that, like pantaloons,
it reached to the middle of my legs. Stockings and shoes
I had none, but had made me a pair of somethings, I
scarce know what to call them, like buskins, to flap over
my legs, and lace on either side like spatterdashes; but
of a most barbarous shape, as indeed were all the rest
of my clothes.
I had on a broad belt of goat-skin dried, which I
drew together with two thongs of the same, instead of
buckles; and in a kind of frog on either side of this,
instead of a sword and a dagger, hung a little saw and
a hatchet, one on one side, one on the other. I had
another belt, not so broad, and fastened in the same
manner, which hung over my shoulder; and at the end
of it, under my left arm, hung two pouches, both made
of goat-skin too; in one of which hung my powder, in
the other my shot. At my back I carried my basket, on
my shoulder my gun, and over my head a great clumsy,
ugly goat-skin umbrella, but which, after all, was the
most necessary thing I had about me, next to my gun.
As for my face, the color of it was really not so mulatto-
like as one might expect from a man not at all careful of
it, and living within nineteen degrees of the equinox.
My beard I had once suffered to grow till it was about a
quarter of a yard long; but as I had both scissors and
razors sufficient, I had cut it pretty short, except what
grew on my upper lip, which I had trimmed into a large
pair of Mahometan whiskers such as I had seen worn
104


THE MYSTERIOUS FOOTPRINT
by some Turks whom I saw at Sallee; for the Moors did
not wear such, though the Turks did. Of these mus-
tachios or whiskers, I will not say they were long enough
to hang my hat upon them, but they were of a length
and shape monstrous enough, and such as, in England,
would have passed for frightful.
But all this is by the bye; for as to my figure I had so
few to observe me that it was of no manner of conse-
quence; so I say no more to that part. In this kind of
figure I went my new journey, and was out five or six
days. I traveled first along the seashore, directly to the
place where I first brought my boat to an anchor, to
get up upon the rocks. And having no boat now to take
care of, I went over the land, a nearer way, to the same
height that I was upon before; when, looking forward to
the point of the rocks which lay out, and which I was
obliged to double with my boat, as is said above, I was
surprised to see the sea all smooth and quiet, no rippling,
no motion, no current, any more there than in other
places.
I was at a strange loss to understand this, and re-
solved to spend some time in the observing it, to see if
nothing from the sets of the tide had occasioned it. But
I was presently convinced how it was, viz., that the tide
of ebb setting from the west, and joining with the cur-
rent of waters from some great river on the shore, must
be the occasion of this current; and that according as
the wind blew more forcibly from the west, or from the
north, this current came near, or went farther from the
shore; for waiting thereabouts till evening, I went up to
the rock again, and then the tide of ebb being made, I
105


ROBINSON CRUSOE
plainly saw the current again as before, only that it run
farther off, being near half a league from the shore;
whereas in my case it set close upon the shore, and
hurried me and my canoe along with it, which, at
another time, it would not have done.
This observation convinced me that I had nothing to
do but to observe the ebbing and the flowing of the tide,
and I might very easily bring my boat about the island
again. But when I began to think of putting it in prac-
tice, I had such a terror upon my spirits at the remem-
brance of the danger I had been in that I could not think
of it again with any patience; but, on the contrary, I
took up another resolution, which was more safe, though
more laborious; and this was, that I would build, or
rather make me another periagua, or canoe, and so have
one for one side of the island, and one for the other.
You are to understand that now I had, as I may call it,
two plantations in the island; one, my little fortification
or tent, with the wall about it, under the rock, with the
cave behind me, which, by this time, I had enlarged
into several apartments or caves, one within another.
One of these, which was the driest and largest, and had
a door out beyond my wall or fortification, that is to
say, beyond where my wall joined to the rock, was all
filled up with the large earthen pots, of which I have
given an account, and with fourteen or fifteen great
baskets, which would hold five or six bushels each,
where I laid up my stores of provision, especially my
corn, some in the ear, cut off short from the straw, and
the other rubbed out with my hand.
As for my wall, made, as before, with long stakes or
106


THE MYSTERIOUS FOOTPRINT
piles, those piles grew all like trees, and were by this
time grown so big, and spread so very much, that there
was not the least appearance, to any one's view, of any
habitation behind them.
Near this dwelling of mine, but a little farther within
the land, and upon lower ground, lay my two pieces of
corn ground, which I kept duly cultivated and sowed,
and which duly yielded me their harvest in its season;
and whenever I had occasion for more corn, -I had more
land adjoining as fit as that.
Besides this, I had my country seat, and I had now
a tolerable plantation there also; for, first, I had my
little bower, as I called it, which I kept in repair; that is
to say, I kept the hedge which circled it in constantly
fitted up to its usual height, the ladder standing always
in the inside. I kept the trees, which at first were no
more than my stakes, but were now grown very firm and
tall, — I kept them always so cut that they might spread
and grow thick and wild, and make the more agreeable
shade, which they did effectually to my mind. In the
middle of this, I had my tent always standing, being a
piece of a sail spread over poles, set up for that purpose,
and which never wanted any repair or renewing; and
under this I had made me a squab or couch, with the
skins of the creatures I had killed, and with other soft
things, and a blanket laid on them, such as belonged to
our sea-bedding, which I had saved, and a great watch- \
coat to cover me; and here, whenever I had occasion to
be absent from my chief seat, I took up my country
habitation.
Adjoining to this I had my enclosures for my cattle,
107


ROBINSON CRUSOE
that is to say, my goats. And as I had taken an incon-
ceivable deal of pains to fence and enclose this ground, so
I was so uneasy to see it kept entire, lest the goats should
break through, that I never left off till, with infinite
labor, I had stuck the outside of the hedge so full of
small stakes, and so near to one another, that it was
rather a pale than a hedge, and there was scarce room
to put a hand through between them; which afterwards,
when those stakes grew, as they all did in the next rainy
season, made the enclosure strong like a wall,—indeed,
stronger than any wall.
This will testify for me that I was not idle, and that I
spared no pains to bring to pass whatever appeared
necessary for my comfortable support; for I considered
the keeping up a breed of tame creatures thus at my
hand would be a living magazine of flesh, milk, butter,
and cheese for me as long as I lived in the place, if it were
to be forty years; and that keeping them in my reach
depended entirely upon my perfecting my enclosures to
such a degree that I might be sure of keeping them to-
gether; which, by this method, indeed, I so effectually
secured that when these little stakes began to grow, I
had planted them so very thick I was forced to pull some
of them up again.
In this place also I had my grapes growing, which I
principally depended on for my winter store of raisins,
and which I never failed to preserve very carefully, as
the best and most agreeable dainty of my whole diet.
And indeed they were not agreeable only, but physi-
cal, wholesome, nourishing, and refreshing to the last
degree.
108





THE NEW YORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY


THE MYSTERIOUS FOOTPRINT
As this was also about halfway between my other
habitation and the place where I had laid up my boat,
I generally stayed and lay here in my way thither; for
I used frequently to visit my boat, and I kept all things
about or belonging to her in very good order. Some-
times I went out in her to divert myself, but no more
hazardous voyages would I go, nor scarce ever above a
stone's cast or two from the shore, I was so apprehen-
sive of being hurried out of my knowledge again by
the currents or winds, or any other accident. But now
I come to a new scene of my life.
It happened one day, about noon, going towards my
boat, I was exceedingly surprised with the print of a
man's naked foot on the shore, which was very plain to
be seen in the sand. I stood like one thunderstruck, or
as if I had seen an apparition. I listened, I looked
round me, I could hear nothing, nor see anything. I
went up to a rising ground, to look farther. I went up
the shore, and down the shore, but it was all one; I
could see no other impression but that one. I went to it
again to see if there were any more, and to observe if it
might not be my fancy; but there was no room for that,
for there was exactly the very print of a foot — toes, heel,
and every part of a foot. How it came thither I knew
not, nor could in the least imagine. But after innumer-
able fluttering thoughts, like a man perfectly confused
and out of myself, I came home to my fortification, not
feeling, as we say, the ground I went on, but terrified to
the last degree, looking behind me at every two or three
steps, mistaking every bush and tree, and fancying every
stump at a distance to be a man; nor is it possible to
109


ROBINSON CRUSOE
describe how many various shapes affrighted imagi-
nation represented things to me in, how many wild
ideas were found every moment in my fancy, and what
strange, unaccountable whimsies came into my thoughts
by the way.
When I came to my castle, for so I think I called it
ever after this, I fled into it like one pursued. Whether I
went over by the ladder, as first contrived, or went in at
the hole in the rock, which I called a door, I cannot
remember; no, nor could I remember the next morning,
for never frighted hare fled to cover, or fox to earth, with
more terror of mind than I to this retreat.
I slept none that night. The farther I was from the
occasion of my fright, the greater my apprehensions
were; which is something contrary to the nature of such
things, and especially to the usual practice of all creatures
in fear. But I was so embarrassed with my own fright-
ful ideas of the thing, that I formed nothing but dismal
imaginations to myself, even though I was now a great
way off it. Sometimes I fancied it must be the devil, and
reason joined in with me upon this supposition; for how
should any other thing in human shape come into the
place? Where was the vessel that brought them? What
marks were there of any other footsteps? And how was
it possible a man should come there? But then to think
that Satan should take human shape upon him in such
a place, where there could be no manner of occasion for
it, but to leave the print of his foot behind him, and that
even for no purpose too, for he could not be sure I should
see it; this was an amusement the other way. I con-
sidered that the devil might have found out abundance
110


THE MYSTERIOUS FOOTPRINT
of other ways to have terrified me than this of the single
print of a foot; that as I lived quite on the other side of
the island, he would never have been so simple to leave
a mark in a place where it was ten thousand to one
whether I should ever see it or not, and in the sand too,
which the first surge of the sea, upon a high wind, would
have defaced entirely. All this seemed inconsistent with
the thing itself, and with all the notions we usually enter-
tain of the subtilty of the devil.
Abundance of such things as these assisted to argue
me out of all apprehensions of its being the devil; and I
presently concluded, then, that it must be some more
dangerous creature, viz., that it must be some of the
savages of the mainland over against me, who had
wandered out to sea in their canoes, and, either driven
by the currents or by contrary winds, had made the
island, and had been on shore, but were gone away
again to sea, being as loath, perhaps, to stay in this
desolate island as I should have been to have them.
While these reflections were rolling upon my mind, I
was very thankful in my thoughts that I was so happy as
not to be thereabouts at that time, or that they did not
see my boat, by which they would have concluded that
some inhabitants had been in the place, and perhaps
have searched farther for me. Then terrible thoughts
racked my imagination about their having found my
boat, and that there were people here; and that if so,
I should certainly have them come again in greater
numbers, and devour me; that if it should happen
so that they should not find me, yet they would find
my enclosure, destroy all my corn, carry away all my
111


ROBINSON CRUSOE
flock of tame goats, and I should perish at last for mere
want.
Thus my fear banished all my religious hope. All
that former confidence in God, which was founded
upon such wonderful experience as I had had of His
goodness, now vanished, as if He that had fed me by
miracle hitherto could not preserve, by His power, the
provision which He had made for me by His goodness.
I reproached myself with my easiness, that would not
sow any more corn one year than would just serve me
till the next season, as if no accident could intervene to
prevent my enjoying the crop that was upon the ground.
And this I thought so just a reproof that I resolved for
the future to have two or three years' corn beforehand,
so that, whatever might come, I might not perish for
want of bread.
How strange a chequer work of Providence is the
life of man! and by what secret differing springs are
the affections hurried about as differing circumstances
present! To-day we love what to-morrow we hate; to-
day we seek what to-morrow we shun; to-day we desire
what to-morrow we fear; nay, even tremble at the ap-
prehensions of. This was exemplified in me, at this time,
in the most lively manner imaginable; for I, whose only
affliction was that I seemed banished from human
society, that I was alone, circumscribed by the boundless
ocean, cut off from mankind, and condemned to what I
called silent life; that I was as one whom Heaven thought
not worthy to be numbered among the living, or to
appear among the rest of His creatures; that to have
seen one of my own species would have seemed to me a
112


THE MYSTERIOUS FOOTPRINT
raising me from death to life, and the greatest blessing
that Heaven itself, next to the supreme blessing of sal-
vation, could bestow; I say, that I should now tremble
at the very apprehensions of seeing a man, and was
ready to sink into the ground at but the shadow or silent
appearance of a man's having set his foot in the
island!
Such is the uneven state of human life; and it afforded
me a great many curious speculations afterwards, when
I had a little recovered my first surprise. I considered
that this was the station of life the infinitely wise and
good providence of God had determined for me; that,
as I could not foresee what the ends of Divine wisdom
might be in all this, so I was not to dispute His sover-
eignty, who, as I was His creature, had an undoubted
right, by creation, to govern and dispose of me absolutely
as He thought fit, and who, as I was a creature who had
offended Him, had likewise a judicial right to condemn
me to what punishment He thought fit; and that it was
my part to submit to bear His indignation, because I had
sinned against Him.
I then reflected that God, who was not only righteous,
but omnipotent, as He had thought fit thus to punish and
afflict me, so He was able to deliver me; that if He did
not think fit to do it, 't was my unquestioned duty to re-
sign myself absolutely and entirely to His will; and, on
the other hand, it was my duty also to hope in Him, pray
to Him, and quietly to attend the dictates and directions
of His daily providence.
These thoughts took me up many hours, days, nay, I
may say, weeks and months; and one particular effect of
113


ROBINSON CRUSOE
my cogitations on this occasion I cannot omit, viz., one
morning early, lying in my bed, and filled with thought
about my danger from the appearance of savages, I
found it discomposed me very much; upon which those
words of the Scripture came into my thoughts, "Call
upon Me in the day of trouble, and I will deliver thee,
and thou shalt glorify Me."
Upon this, rising cheerfully out of my bed, my heart
was not only comforted, but I was guided and encouraged
to pray earnestly to God for deliverance. When I had
done praying, I took up my Bible, and opening it to read,
the first words that presented to me were, "Wait on the
Lord, and be of good cheer, and He shall strengthen thy
heart; wait, I say, on the Lord." It is impossible to
express the comfort this gave me. In answer, I thank-
fully laid down the book, and was no more sad, at least,
not on that occasion.
In the middle of these cogitations, apprehensions, and
reflections, it came into my thought one day that all this
might be a mere chimera of my own; and that this foot
might be the print of my own foot, when I came on shore
from my boat. This cheered me up a little too, and I
began to persuade myself it was all a delusion, that it was
nothing else but my own foot; and why might not I come
that way from the boat, as well as I was going that way
to the boat? Again, I considered also that I could by no
means tell, for certain, where I had trod, and where I had
not; and that if, at last, this was only the print of my own
foot, I had played the part of those fools who strive to
make stories of spectres and apparitions, and then are
frighted at them more than anybody.
114


THE MYSTERIOUS FOOTPRINT
Now I began to take courage, and to peep abroad
again, for I had not stirred out of my castle for three days
and nights, so that I began to starve for provision; for I
had little or nothing within doors but some barley-cakes
and water. Then I knew that my goats wanted to be
milked too, which usually was my evening diversion; and
the poor creatures were in great pain and inconvenience
for want of it; and, indeed, it almost spoiled some of
them, and almost dried up their milk.
Heartening myself, therefore, with the belief that this
was nothing but the print of one of my own feet, and so
I might be truly said to start at my own shadow, I began
to go abroad again, and went to my country house to
milk my flock. But to see with what fear I went forward,
how often I looked behind me, how I was ready, every
now and then, to lay down my basket, and run for my
life, it would have made any one have thought I was
haunted with an evil conscience, or that I had been
lately most terribly frighted; and so, indeed, I had.
However, as I went down thus two or three days, and
having seen nothing, I began to be a little bolder, and to
think there was really nothing in it but my own imagi-
nation. But I could not persuade myself fully of this till
I should go down to the shore again, and see this print of
a foot, and measure it by my own, and see if there was
any similitude or fitness, that I might be assured it was
my own foot. But when I came to the place, first, it
appeared evidently to me that when I laid up my boat,
I could not possibly be on shore anywhere thereabout;
secondly, when I came to measure the mark with my own
foot, I found my foot not so large by a great deal. Both
115


ROBINSON CRUSOE
these things filled my head with new imaginations, and
gave me the vapors again to the highest degree; so that I
shook with cold, like one in an ague; and I went home
again, filled with the belief that some man or men had
been on shore there; or, in short, that the island was in-
habited, and I might be surprised before I was aware.
And what course to take for my security, I knew not.
Oh, what ridiculous resolution men take when pos-
sessed with fear! It deprives them of the use of those
means which reason offers for their relief. The first
thing I proposed to myself was to throw clown my en-
closures, and turn all my tame cattle wild into the woods,
that the enemy might not find them, and then frequent
the island in prospect of the same or the like booty;
then to the simple thing of digging up my two corn-fields,
that they might not find such a grain there, and still be
prompted to frequent the island; then to demolish my
bower and tent, that they might not see any vestiges of
habitation, and be prompted to look farther, in order to
find out the persons inhabiting.
These were the subject of the first night's cogitation,
after I was come home again, while the apprehensions
which had so overrun my mind were fresh upon me, and
my head was full of vapors, as above. Thus fear of
. danger is ten thousand times more terrifying than danger
itself when apparent to the eyes; and we find the burden
of anxiety greater, by much, than the evil which we are
anxious about; and, which was worse than all this, I had
not that relief in this trouble from the resignation I used
to practice that I hoped to have. I looked, I thought,
like Saul, who complained not only that the Philistines
116


THE MYSTERIOUS FOOTPRINT
were upon him, but that God had forsaken him; for I
did not now take due ways to compose my mind, by
crying to God in my distress, and resting upon His
providence, as I had done before, for my defense and
deliverance; which, if I had done, I had at least been
more cheerfully supported under this new surprise, and
perhaps carried through it with more resolution.
This confusion of my thoughts kept me waking all
night, but in the morning I fell asleep; and having, by
the amusement of my mind, been, as it were, tired, and
my spirits exhausted, I slept very soundly, and waked
much better composed than I had ever been before. And
now I began to think sedately; and upon the utmost
debate with myself, I concluded that this island, which
was so exceeding pleasant, fruitful, and no farther from
the mainland than as I had seen, was not so entirely
abandoned as I might imagine; that although there were
no stated inhabitants who lived on the spot, yet that
there might sometimes come boats off from the shore,
who, either with design, or perhaps never but when they
were driven by cross winds, might come to this place;
that I had lived here fifteen years now, and had not met
with the least shadow or figure of any people yet; and
that if at any time they should be driven here, it was
probable they went away again as soon as ever they
could, seeing they had never thought fit to fix there upon
any occasion to this time; that the most I could suggest
any danger from, was from any such casual accidental
landing of straggling people from the main, who, as it
was likely, if they were driven hither, were here against
their wills; so they made no stay here, but went off again
117


ROBINSON CRUSOE
with all possible speed, seldom staying one night on
shore, lest they should not have the help of the tides and
daylight back again; and that, therefore, I had nothing
to do but to consider of some safe retreat, in case I should
see any savages land upon the spot.


THE COMING OF FRIDAY
By Daniel Defoe
IWAS surprised, one morning early, with seeingno less
than five canoes all on shore together on my side the
island, and the people who belonged to them all landed,
and out of my sight. The number of them broke all my
measures; for seeing so many, and knowing that they
always came four, or six, or sometimes more, in a boat, I
could not tell what to think of it, or how to take my
measures to attack twenty or thirty men single-handed;
so I lay still in my castle, perplexed and discomforted.
However, I put myself into all the same postures for an
attack that I had formerly provided, and was just ready
for action if anything had presented. Having waited a
good while, listening to hear if they made any noise, at
length, being very impatient, I set my guns at the foot
of my ladder, and clambered up to the top of the hill,
by my two stages, as usual; standing so, however, that
my head did not appear above the hill, so that they
could not perceive me by any means. Here I observed,
by the help of my perspective glass, that they were no
less than thirty in number, that they had a fire kindled,
that they had had meat dressed. How they had cooked
it, that I knew not, or what it was; but they were all
dancing, in I know not how many barbarous gestures
and figures, their own way, round the fire.
119


ROBINSON CRUSOE
While I was thus looking on them, I perceived by my
perspective two miserable wretches dragged from the
boats, where, it seems, they were laid by, and were now
brought out for the slaughter. I perceived one of them
immediately fell, being knocked down, I suppose, with a
club or wooden sword, for that was their way, and two
or three others were at work immediately, cutting him
open for their cookery, while the other victim was left
standing by himself, till they should be ready for him.
In that very moment, this poor wretch seeing himself a
little at liberty, Nature inspired him with hopes of life,
and he started away from them, and ran with incredible
swiftness along the sands directly towards me,—I mean
towards that part of the coast where my habitation was.
I was dreadfully frighted (that I must acknowledge)
when I perceived him to run my way, and especially
when, as I thought, I saw him pursued by the whole
body; and now I expected that part of my dream was
coming to pass, and that he would certainly take shelter
in my grove; but I could not depend, by any means,
upon my dream for the rest of it, viz., that the other
savages would not pursue him thither, and find him there.
However, I kept my station, and my spirits began to
recover when I found that there were not above three
men that followed him; and still more was I encouraged
when I found that he outstripped them exceedingly in
running, and gained ground of them; so that if he could
but hold it for half an hour, I saw easily he would fairly
get away from them all.
There was between them and my castle the creek, •
which I mentioned often at the first part of my story,
120


THE COMING OF FRIDAY
when I landed my cargoes out of the ship; and this I saw
plainly he must necessarily swim over, or the poor wretch
would be taken there. But when the savage escaping
came thither he made nothing of it, though the tide was
then up; but plunging in, swam through in about thirty
strokes or thereabouts, landed, and ran on with exceed-
ing strength and swiftness. When the three persons came
to the creek, I found that two of them could swim,
but the third could not, and that, standing on the other
side, he looked at the other, but went no further, and
soon after went softly back, which, as it happened, was
very well for him in the main.
I observed that the two who swam were yet more than
twice as long swimming over the creek as the fellow was
that fled from them. It came now very warmly upon my
thoughts, and indeed irresistibly, that now was my time
to get me a servant, and perhaps a companion or assist-
ant, and that I was called plainly by Providence to save
this poor creature's life. I immediately run down the
ladders with all possible expedition, fetched my two guns,
for they were both but at the foot of the ladders, as I
observed above, and getting up again, with the same
haste, to the top of the hill, I crossed toward the sea, and
having a very short cut, and all down hill, clapped myself
in the way between the pursuers and the pursued, hal-
looing aloud to him that fled, who, looking back, was at
first perhaps as much frighted at me as at them; but I
beckoned with my hand to him to come back; and, in
the meantime, I slowly advanced towards the two that
followed; then rushing at once upon the foremost, I
knocked him down with the stock of my piece. I was
121


THE COMING OF FRIDAY
I took him up, and made much of him, and encouraged
him all I could. But there was more work to do yet; for
I perceived the savage whom I knocked down was not
killed, but stunned with the blow, and began to come
to himself; so I pointed to him, and showing him the
savage, that he was not dead, upon this he spoke some
words to me; and though I could not understand them,
yet I thought they were pleasant to hear; for they were
the first sound of a man's voice that I had heard, my own
excepted, for above twenty-five years. But there was no
time for such reflections now. The savage who was
knocked down recovered himself so far as to sit up upon
the ground, and I perceived that my savage began to be
afraid; but when I saw that, I presented my other piece
at the man, as if I would shoot him. Upon this my sav-
age, for so I call him now, made a motion to me to lend
him my sword, which hung naked in a belt by my side;
so I did. He no sooner had it but he runs to his enemy,
and, at one blow, cut off his head as cleverly, no execu-
tioner in Germany could have done it sooner or better;
which I thought very strange for one who, I had reason
to believe, never saw a sword in his life before, except
their own wooden swords. However, it seems, as I
learned afterwards, they make their wooden swords so
sharp, so heavy, and the wood is so hard, that they will
cut off heads even with them, ay, and arms, and that
at one blow too. When he had done this, he comes
laughing to me in sign of triumph, and brought me
the sword again, and with abundance of gestures, which
I did not understand, laid it down, with the head of the
savage that he had killed, just before me.
123


ROBINSON CRUSOE
But that which astonished him most was to know how
I had killed the other Indian so far off; so pointing to
him, he made signs to me to let him go to him; so I bade
him go, as well as I could. When he came to him, he
stood like one amazed, looking at him, turned him
first on one side, then on t'other, looked at the wound
the bullet had made, which, it seems, was just in his
breast, where it had made a hole, and no great quantity
of blood had followed; but he had bled inwardly, for he
was quite dead. He took up his bow and arrows, and
came back; so I turned to go away, and beckoned to
him to follow me, making signs to him that more might
come after them.
Upon this he signed to me that he should bury them
with sand, that they might not be seen by the rest if they
followed; and so I made signs again to him to do so. He
fell to work, and in an instant he had scraped a hole in
the sand with his hands big enough to bury the first in,
and then dragged him into it, and covered him, and did
so also by the other. I believe he had buried them both
in a quarter of an hour. Then calling him away, I
carried him, not to my castle, but quite away to my cave,
on the farther part of the island; so I did not let my
dream come to pass in that part, viz., that he came into
my grove for shelter.
Here I gave him bread and a bunch of raisins to eat,
and a draught of water, which I found he was indeed
in great distress for, by his running; and having refreshed
him, I made signs for him to go lie down and sleep, point-
ing to a place where I had laid a great parcel of rice-
straw, and a blanket upon it, which I used to sleep upon
124


THE COMING OF FRIDAY
myself sometimes; so the poor creature laid down, and
went to sleep. )
He was a comely, handsome fellow, perfectly well
made, with straight strong limbs, not too large, tall and
well-shaped, and, as I reckon, about twenty-six years of
age. He had a very good countenance, not a fierce and
surly aspect, but seemed to have something very manly
in his face; and yet he had all the sweetness and softness
of an European in his countenance too, especially when
he smiled. His hair was long and black, not curled like
wool; his forehead very high and large; and a great
vivacity and sparkling sharpness in his eyes. The color
of his skin was not quite black, but very tawny; and yet
not of an ugly, yellow, nauseous tawny, as the Brazilians
and Virginians, and other natives of America are, but of
a bright kind of a dun olive color, that had in it some-
thing very agreeable, though not very easy to describe.
His face was round and plump; his nose small, not flat
like the negroes; a very good mouth, thin lips, and his
fine teeth well set, and white as ivory.
After he had slumbered, rather than slept, about half
an hour, he waked again, and comes out of the cave to
me, for I had been milking my goats, which I had in the
enclosure just by. When he espied me, he came running
to me, laying himself down again upon the ground, with
all the possible signs of an humble, thankful disposition,
making a many antic gestures to show it. At last he
lays his head flat upon the ground, close to my foot, and
sets my other foot upon his head, as he had done before,
and after this made all the signs to me of subjection, ser-
vitude, and submission imaginable, to let me know how he
125


ROBINSON CRUSOE
would serve me as long as he lived. I understood him
in many things, and let him know I was very well pleased
with him. In a little time I began to speak to him, and
teach him to speak to me; and first I made him know
his name should be Friday, which was the day I saved
his life. I called him so for the memory of the time. I
likewise taught him to say master, and then let him krfcw
that was to be my name. I likewise taught him to say
yes and no, and to know the rrfeaning of them. I gave
him some milk in an earthen pot, and let him see me
drink it before him, and sop my bread in it; and I gave
him a cake of bread to do the like, which he quickly com-
plied with, and made signs that it was very good for him.
I kept there with him all that night; but as soon as
it was day, I beckoned to him to come with me, and let
him know I would give him some clothes; at which he
seemed very glad, for he was stark naked. As we went
by the place where he had buried the two men, he
pointed exactly to the place, and showed me the marks
that he had made to find them again, making signs to
me that we should dig them up again, and eat them. At
this I appeared very angry, expressed my abhorrence of
it, made as if I would vomit at the thoughts of it, and
beckoned with my hand to him to come away; which he
did immediately, with great submission. I then led him
up to the top of the hill, to see if his enemies were gone;
and pulling out my glass, I looked, and saw plainly the
place where they had been, but no appearance of them or
of their canoes; so that it was plain that they were gone,
and had left their two comrades behind them, without
any search after them.
126


THE COMING OF FRIDAY
But I was not content with this discovery; but having
now more courage, and consequently more curiosity, I
took my man Friday with me, giving him the sword in
his hand, with the bow and arrows at his back, which I
found he could use very dexterously, making him carry
one gun for me, and I two for myself, and away we
marched to the place where these creatures had been; for
I had a mind now to get some fuller intelligence of them.
When I came to the place, my very blood ran chill in my
veins, and my heart sunk within me, at the horror of the
spectacle. Indeed, it was a dreadful sight, at least it was
so to me, though Friday made nothing of it. The place
was covered with human bones, the ground dyed with
their blood, great pieces of flesh left here and there, half-
eaten, mangled, and scorched; and, in short, all the
tokens of the triumphant feast they had been making
there, after a victory over their enemies. I saw three
skulls, five hands, and the bones of three or four legs and
feet, and abundance of other parts of the bodies; and
Friday, by his signs, made me understand that they
brought over four prisoners to feast upon; that three of
them were eaten up, and that he, pointing to himself, was
the fourth; that there had been a great battle between
them and their next king, whose subjects it seems he had
been one of, and that they had taken a great number of
prisoners; all which were carried to several places by
those that had taken them in the fight, in order to feast
upon them, as was done here by these wretches upon
those they brought hither.
I caused Friday to gather all the skulls, bones, flesh,
and whatever remained, and lay them together on a heap,
127


ROBINSON CRUSOE
and make a great fire upon it, and burn them all to ashes.
I found Friday had still a hankering stomach after some
of the flesh, and was still a cannibal in his nature; but I
discovered so much abhorrence at the very thoughts of
it, and at the least appearance of it, that he durst not
discover it; for I had, by some means, let him know that
I would kill him if he offered it.
When we had done this we came back to our castle,
and there I fell to work for my man Friday; and, first of
all, I gave him a pair of linen drawers, which I had out of
the poor gunner's chest I mentioned, and which I found
in the wreck; and which, with a little alteration, fitted
him very well. Then I made him a jerkin of goat-skin,
as well as my skill would allow, and I was now grown a
tolerable good tailor; and I gave him a cap, which I had
made of a hare-skin, very convenient and fashionable
enough; and thus he was clothed for the present tol-
erably well, and was mighty well pleased to see himself
almost as well clothed as his master. It is true he went
awkwardly in these things at first; wearing the drawers
was very awkward to him, and the sleeves of the waist-
coat galled his shoulders, and the inside of his arms; but
a little easing them where he complained they hurt him,
and using himself to them, at length he took to them very
well.
The next day after I came home to my hutch with him,
I began to consider where I should lodge him. And that
I might do well for him, and yet be perfectly easy myself,
I made a little tent for him in the vacant place between
my two fortifications, in the inside of the last and in the
outside of the first; and as there was a door or entrance
128


THE COMING OF FRIDAY
there into my cave, I made a formal framed door-case,
and a door to it of boards, and set it up in the passage,
a little within the entrance; and causing the door to open
on the inside, I barred it up in the night, taking in my
ladders too; so that Friday could no way come at me in
the inside of my innermost wall without making so much
noise in getting over that it must needs waken me; for
my first wall had now a complete roof over it of long
poles, covering all my tent, and leaning up to the side of
the hill, which was again laid cross with smaller sticks
instead of laths, and then thatched over a great thick-
ness with the rice-straw, which was strong, like reeds;
and at the hole or place which was left to go in or out by
the ladder, I had placed a kind of trap-door, which, if it
had been attempted on the outside, would not have
opened at all, but would have fallen down, and made a
great noise; and as to weapons, I took them all into my
side every night.
But I needed none of all this precaution; for never man
had a more faithful, loving, sincere servant than Friday
was to me; without passions, sullenness, or designs, per-
fectly obliged and engaged; his very affections were tied
to me, like those of a child to a father; and I dare say
he would have sacrificed his life for the saving mine,
upon any occasion whatsoever. The many testimonies
he gave me of this put it out of doubt, and soon con-
vinced me that I needed to use no precautions as to my
safety on his account.


HOMEWARD BOUND
By Daniel Defoe
[After Crusoe has spent some years on the island,
an English vessel appears and a number of men come
ashore. They prove to be mutineers who have brought
their captain and two other men to be left on the
island. By the aid of Crusoe and Friday, the captain
regains possession of his vessel.]
ILAID me down; and it having been a day of great
fatigue to me, I slept very sound, till I was something
surprised with the noise of a gun; and presently starting
up, I heard a man call me by the name of " Governor,"
"Governor," and presently I knew the captain's voice;
when climbing up to the top of the hill, there he stood,
and pointing to the ship, he embraced me in his arms.
"My dear friend and deliverer," says he, "there's your
ship, for she is all yours, and so are we, and all that
belong to her." I cast my eyes to the ship, and there she
rode within little more than half a mile of the shore; for
they had weighed her anchor as soon as they were
masters of her, and, the weather being fair, had brought
her to anchor just against the mouth of the little creek,
and the tide being up, the captain had brought the pin-
nace in near the place where I at first landed my rafts
and so landed just at my door.
130


HOMEWARD BOUND
I was at first ready to sink down with the surprise;
for I saw my deliverance, indeed, visibly put into my
hands, all things easy, and a large ship just ready to
carry me away whither I pleased to go. At first, for
some time, I was not able to answer him one word; but as
he had taken me in his arms, I held fast by him, or I
should have fallen to the ground.
He perceived the surprise, and immediately pulls a
bottle out of his pocket, and gave me a dram of cordial,
which he had brought on purpose for me. After I had
drank it, I sat down upon the ground; and though it
brought me to myself, yet it was a good while before I
could speak a word to him.
All this while the poor man was in as great an ecstasy
as I, only not under any surprise, as I was; and he said
a thousand kind, tender things to me, to compose me
and bring me to myself. But such was the flood of joy
in my breast that it put all my spirits into confusion.
At last it broke out into tears, and in a little while after
I recovered my speech.
Then I took my turn, and embraced him as my
deliverer, and we rejoiced together. I told him I looked
upon him as a man sent from heaven to deliver me, and
that the whole transaction seemed to be a chain of won-
ders; that such things as these were the testimonies we
had of a secret hand of Providence governing the world,
and an evidence that the eyes of an infinite Power could
search into the remotest corner of the world, and send
help to the miserable whenever He pleased. .
I forgot not to lift up my heart in thankfulness to
heaven; and what heart could forbear to bless Him,
131


ROBINSON CRUSOE
who had not only in a miraculous manner provided for
one in such a wilderness, and in such a desolate con-
dition, but from whom every deliverance must always
be acknowledged to proceed?
When we had talked a while, the captain told me he
had brought me some little refreshment, such as the ship
afforded, and such as the wretches that had been so long
his masters had not plundered him of. Upon this he
called aloud to the boat, and bid his men bring the things
ashore that were for the governor; and, indeed, it was a
present as if I had been one, not that was to be carried
away along with them, but as if I had been to dwell upon
the island still, and they were to go without me.
First, he had brought me a case of bottles full of
excellent cordial waters, six large bottles of Madeira
wine (the bottles held two quarts apiece), two pounds of
excellent good tobacco, twelve good pieces of the ship's
beef, and six pieces of pork, with a bag of peas, and
about a hundred-weight of biscuit.
He had brought me also a box of sugar, a box of flour,
a bag full of lemons, and two bottles of lime juice, and
abundance of other things; but besides these, and what
was a thousand times more useful to me, he brought me
six clean new shirts, six very good neck-cloths, two pair of
gloves, one pair of shoes, a hat, and one pair of stockings,
and a very good suit of clothes of his own, which had
been worn but very little; in a word, he clothed me
from head to foot.
It was a very kind and agreeable present, as any one
may imagine, to one in my circumstances; but never
was anything in the world of that kind so unpleasant,
132


HOMEWARD BOUND
awkward, and uneasy as it was to me to wear such
clothes at their first putting on.
After these ceremonies passed, and after all his good
things were brought into my little apartment, we began
to consult what was to be done with the prisoners we
had; for it was worth considering whether we might
venture to take them away with us or no, especially two
of them, whom we knew to be incorrigible and refrac-
tory to the last degree; and the captain said he knew they
were such rogues that there was no obliging them; and
if he did carry them away, it must be in irons, as male-
factors, to be delivered over to justice at the first English
colony he could come at; and I found that the captain
himself was very anxious about it.
Upon this I told him that, if he desired it, I durst
undertake to bring the two men he spoke of to make it
their own request that he should leave them upon the
island. "I should be very glad of that," says the captain,
"with all my heart."
"Well," says I, "I will send for them up, and talk
with them for you." So I caused Friday and the two
hostages, for they were now discharged, their comrades
having performed their promise,— I say, I caused them
to go to the cave and bring up the five men, pinioned
as they were, to the bower, and keep them there till I
came.
After some time I came thither, dressed in my new
habit; and now I was called governor again. Being all
met, and the captain with me, I caused the men to be
brought before me, and I told them I had had a full
account of their villainous behavior to the captain, and
133


ROBINSON CRUSOE
how they had run away with the ship, and were preparing
to commit further robberies, but that Providence had
ensnared them in their own ways, and that they were
fallen into the pit which they had digged for others.
I let them know that by my direction the ship had been
seized, that she lay now in the road, and they might see,
by and by, that their new captain had received the re-
ward of his villainy, for that they might see him hanging
at the yard-arm; that as to them, I wanted to know what
they had to say why I should not execute them as pirates,
taken in the fact, as by my commission they could not
doubt I had authority to do.
One of them answered in the name of the rest that
they had nothing to say but this, that when they were
taken the captain promised them their lives, and they
humbly implored my mercy. But I told them I knew
not what mercy to show them; for as for myself, I had
resolved to quit the island with all my men, and had
taken passage with the captain to go for England. And
as for the captain, he could not carry them to England
other than as prisoners in irons, to be tried for mutiny,
and running away with the ship; the consequence of
which, they must needs know, would be the gallows; so
that I could not tell which was best for them, unless they
had a mind to take their fate in the island. If they de-
sired that, I did not care, as I had liberty to leave it. I
had some inclination to give them their lives, if they
thought they could shift on shore.
They seemed very thankful for it, said they would
much rather venture to stay there than to be carried to
England to be hanged; so I left it on that issue.
134


HOMEWARD BOUND
However, the captain seemed to make some difficulty
of it, as if he durst not leave them there. Upon this I
seemed a little angry with the captain, and told him that
they were my prisoners, not his; and that seeing I had
offered them so much favor, I would be as good as my
word; and that if he did not think fit to consent to it, I
would set them at liberty, as I found them; and if he did
not like it, he might take them again if he could catch
them.
Upon this they appeared very thankful, and I accord-
ingly set them at liberty, and bade them retire into the
woods to the place whence they came, and I would leave
them some firearms, some ammunition, and some direc-
tions how they should live very well, if they thought fit.
Upon this I prepared to go on board the ship, but told
the captain that I would stay that night to prepare my
things, and desired him to go on board in the meantime,
and keep all right in the ship, and send the boat on shore
the next day for me; ordering him, in the meantime, to
cause the new captain, who was killed, to be hanged at
the yard-arm, that these men might see him.
When the captain was gone, I sent for the men up to
me to my apartment, and entered seriously into discourse
with them of their circumstances. I told them I thought
they had made a right choice; that if the captain car-
ried them away, they would certainly be hanged. I
showed them the new captain hanging at the yard-arm
of the ship, and told them they had nothing less to
expect.
When they had all declared their willingness to stay,
I then told them I would let them into the story of my
135


ROBINSON CRUSOE
living there, and put them into the way of making it easy
to them. Accordingly I gave them the whole history of
the place, and of my coming to it, showed them my forti-
fications, the way I made my bread, planted my corn,
cured my grapes; and in a word, all that was necessary
to make them easy. I told them the story also of the
sixteen Spaniards that were to be expected, for whom
I left a letter, and made them promise to treat them in
common with themselves.
I left them my firearms, viz., five muskets, three
fowling-pieces, and three swords. I had above a barrel
and a half of powder left; for after the first year or two
I used but little, and wasted none. I gave them a de-
scription of the way I managed the goats, and direc-
tions to milk and fatten them, and to make both butter
and cheese.
In a word, I gave them every part of my own story,
and I told them I would prevail with the captain to leave
them two barrels of gunpowder more, and some garden
seeds, which I told them I would have been very glad of.
Also I gave them the bag of peas which the captain had
brought me to eat, and bade them be sure to sow and
increase them.
Having done all this, I left them the next day, and went
on board the ship. We prepared immediately to sail, but
did not weigh that night. The next morning early two
of the five men came swimming to the ship's side, and,
making a most lamentable complaint of the other three,
begged to be taken into the ship for God's sake, for they
should be murdered, and begged the captain to take
them on board, though he hanged them immediately.
136


HOMEWARD BOUND
Upon this the captain pretended to have no power
without me; but after some difficulty, and after their
solemn promises of amendment, they were taken on
board, and were some time after soundly whipped and
pickled, after which they proved very honest and quiet
fellows.
Some time after this the boat was ordered on shore,
the tide being up, with the things promised to the men,
to which the captain, at my intercession, caused their
chests and clothes to be added, which they took, and
were very thankful for. I also encouraged them by
telling them that if it lay in my way to send any vessel
to take them in, I would not forget them.
When I took leave of this island, I carried on board,
for relics, the great goat-skin cap I had made, my
umbrella, and my parrot; also I forgot not to take the
money I formerly mentioned, which had lain by me so
long useless that it was grown rusty or tarnished, and
could hardly pass for silver till it had been a little rubbed
and handled; as also the money I found in the wreck of
the Spanish ship.





GULLIVER'S TRAVELS





GULLIVER IS SHIPWRECKED ON
THE COAST OF LILLIPUT
By Jonathan Swift
MY father had a small estate in Nottinghamshire; I
was the third of five sons. He sent me to Eman-
uel College in Cambridge, at fourteen years old, where
I resided three years, and applied myself close to my
studies; but the charge of maintaining me (although I
had a very scanty allowance) being too great for a nar-
row fortune, I was bound apprentice to Mr. James Bates,
an eminent surgeon in London, with whom I continued
four years; and my father now and then sending me
small sums of money, I laid them out in learning navi-
gation, and other parts of the mathematics, useful to
those who intend to travel, as I always believed it would
be some time or other my fortune to do. When I left
Mr. Bates, I went down to my father; where, by the
assistance of him and my uncle John, and some other
relations, I got forty pounds, and a promise of thirty
pounds a year to maintain me at Leyden; there I studied
physic two years and seven months, knowing it would
be useful in long voyages. Soon after my return from
Leyden, I was recommended by my good master, Mr.
Bates, to be surgeon to the Swallow, Captain Abraham
Pannell, commander, with whom I continued three
years and a half, making a voyage or two into the
141


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
Levant, and some other parts. When I came back I
resolved to settle in London; to which Mr. Bates, my
master, encouraged me, and by him I was recommended
to several patients. I took part of a small house in the
Old Jewry; and being advised to alter my condition, I
married Mrs. Mary Burton, second daughter to Mr.
Edmund Burton, hosier, in Newgate Street, with whom
I received four hundred pounds for a portion.
But my good master Bates dying in two years after,
and I having few friends, my business began to fail;
for my conscience would not suffer me to imitate the
bad practice of too many among my brethren. Hav-
ing therefore consulted with my wife and some of my
acquaintance, I determined to go again to sea. I was
surgeon successively in two ships, and made several
voyages, for six years, to the East and West Indies, by
which I got some addition to my fortune. My hours of
leisure I spent in reading the best authors, ancient and
modern, being always provided with a good number of
books; and when I was ashore, in observing the manners
and dispositions of the people, as well as learning their
language, wherein I had a great facility, by the strength
of my memory.
The last of these voyages not proving very fortunate,
I grew weary of the sea, and intended to stay at home
with my wife and family. I removed from the Old
Jewry to Fetter Lane, and from thence to Wapping,
hoping to get business among the sailors, but it would
not turn to account. After three years' expectation that
things would mend, I accepted an advantageous offer
from Captain William Prichard, master of the Antelope,
142


SHIPWRECKED ON LILLIPUT
who was making a voyage to the South Sea. We set sail
from Bristol, May 4, 1699, and our voyage at first was
very prosperous.
It would not be proper, for some reasons, to trouble
the reader with the particulars of our adventures in those
seas; let it suffice to inform him that in our passage from
thence to the East Indies, we were driven by a violent
storm to the northwest of Van Diemen's Land. By an
observation, we found ourselves in the latitude of 30
degrees 2 minutes south. Twelve of our crew were dead
by immoderate labor and ill food; the rest were in a
very weak condition. On the 5th of November, which
was the beginning of summer in those parts, the weather
being very hazy, the seamen spied a rock within half a
cable's length of the ship; but the wind was so strong
that we were driven directly upon it, and immediately
split. Six of the crew, of whom I was one, having let
down the boat into the sea, made a shift to get clear of
the ship and the rock. We rowed, by my computation,
about three leagues, till we were able to work no longer,
being already spent with labor while we were in the ship.
We therefore trusted ourselves to the mercy of the waves,
and in about half an hour the boat was overset by a
sudden flurry from the north. What became of my
companions in the boat, as well as of those who escaped
on the rock, or were left in the vessel, I cannot tell; but
conclude they were all lost. For my own part, I swam
as fortune directed me, and was pushed forward by wind
and tide. I often let my legs drop, and could feel no
bottom; but when I was almost gone, and able to struggle
no longer, I found myself within my depth; and by this
143


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
time the storm was much abated. The declivity was so
small, that I walked near a mile before I got to the
shore, which I conjectured was about eight o'clock in
the evening. I then advanced forward near half a mile,
but could not discover any sign of houses or inhabitants;
at least I was in so weak a condition that I did not ob-
serve them. I was extremely tired, and with that, and
the heat of the weather, and about half a pint of brandy
that I drank as I left the ship, I found myself much in-
clined to sleep. I lay down on the grass, which was very
short and soft, where I slept sounder than ever I re-
membered to have done in my life, and, as I reckoned,
about nine hours; for when I awaked, it was just day-
light. I attempted to rise, but was not able to stir; for,
as I happened to lie on my back, I found my arms and
legs were strongly fastened on each side to the ground;
and my hair, which was long and thick, tied down in the
same manner. I likewise felt several slender ligatures
across my body, from my armpits to my thighs. I could
only look upwards; the sun began to grow hot, and the
light offended my eyes. I heard a confused noise about
me, but, in the posture I lay, could see nothing except
the sky. In a little time I felt something alive moving
on my left leg, which, advancing gently forward over my
breast, came almost up to my chin; when, bending my
eyes downward as much as I could, I perceived it to be a
human creature not six inches high, with a bow and
arrow in his hands, and a quiver at his back. In the
mean time, I felt at least forty more of the same kind (as
I conjectured) following the first. I was in the utmost
astonishment, and roared so loud that they all ran back
*
144


SHIPWRECKED ON LILLIPUT
in a fright; and some of them, as I was afterwards told,
were hurt with the falls they got by leaping from my
sides upon the ground. However, they soon returned,
and one of them, who ventured so far as to get a full
sight of my face, lifting up his hands and eyes by way
of admiration, cried out in a shrill but distinct voice, t
"Hekinah degul." The others repeated the same words
several times, but I then knew not what they meant.
I lay all this while, as the reader may believe, in great
uneasiness; at length, struggling to get loose, I had the
fortune to break the strings, and wrench out the pegs
that fastened my left arm to the ground; for, by lifting it
up to my face, I discovered the methods they had taken
to bind me, and at the same time with a violent pull,
which gave me excessive pain, I a little loosened the
strings that tied down my hair on the left side, so that I
was just able to turn my head about two inches. But the
creatures ran off a second time, before I could seize them;
whereupon there was a great shout in a very shrill accent,
and after it ceased I heard one of them cry aloud," Tolgo
phonac;" when in an instant I felt above an hundred
arrows discharged on my left hand, which pricked me
like so many needles; and besides, they shot another
flight into the air, as we do bombs in Europe, whereof
many, I suppose, fell on my body (though I felt them
not), and some on my face, which I immediately covered
with my left hand. When this shower of arrows was
over, I fell a-groaning with grief and pain, and then striv-
ing again to get loose, they discharged another volley
larger than the first, and some of them attempted with
spears to stick me in the sides; but by good luck I had on
145


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
me a buff jerkin, which they could not pierce. I thought
it the most prudent method to lie still, and my design was
to continue so till night, when, my left hand being already
loose, I could easily free myself: and as for the inhabit-
ants, I had reason to believe I might be a match for the
greatest army they could bring against me, if they were
all of the same size with him that I saw. But fortune dis-
posed otherwise of me. When the people observed I was
quiet, they discharged no more arrows; but, by the noise
I heard, I knew their numbers increased; and about four
yards from me, over against my right ear, I heard a
knocking for above an hour, like that of people at work;
when turning my head that way, as well as the pegs and
strings would permit me, I saw a stage erected about a
foot and half from the ground, capable of holding four of
the inhabitants, with two or three ladders to mount it:
from whence one of them, who seemed to be a person of
quality, made me a long speech, whereof I understood
not one syllable. But I should have mentioned, that be-
fore the principal person began his oration, he cried out
three times, "Langro dehul san" (these words and the
former were afterwards repeated and explained to me).
Whereupon, immediately about fifty of the inhabitants
came and cut the strings that fastened the left side of my
head, which gave me the liberty of turning it to the right,
and of observing the person and gesture of him that was
to speak. He appeared to be of a middle age, and taller
than any of the other three who attended him, whereof
one was a page that held up his train, and seemed to be
somewhat longer than my middle finger; the other two
stood one on each side to support him. He acted every
146


SHIPWRECKED ON LILLIPUT
part of an orator, and I could observe many periods of
threatenings, and others of promises, pity, and kindness.
I answered in a few words, but in the most submissive
manner, lifting up my left hand and both my eyes to
the sun, as calling him for a witness; and being almost
famished with hunger, having not eaten a morsel for
some hours before I left the ship, I found the demands
of nature so strong upon me that I could not forbear
showing my impatience (perhaps against the strict rules
of decency) by putting my finger frequently to my
mouth, to signify that I wanted food. The hurgo (for so
they call a great lord, as I afterwards learnt) understood
me very well. He descended from the-stage, and com-
manded that several ladders should be applied to my
sides, on which above an hundred of the inhabitants
mounted, and walked towards my mouth, laden with
baskets full of meat, which had been provided and sent
thither by the king's orders, upon the first intelligence he
received of me. I observed there was the flesh of several
animals, but could not distinguish them by the taste.
There were shoulders, legs, and loins shaped like those of
mutton, and very well dressed, but smaller than the wing
of a lark. I eat them by two or three at a mouthful, and
took three loaves at a time, about the bigness of mus-
ket bullets. They supplied me as they could, showing a
thousand marks of wonder and astonishment at my bulk
and appetite.
I then made another sign that I wanted drink. They
found by my eating that a small quantity would not suf-
fice me; and being a most ingenious people, they slung
up, with great dexterity, one of their largest hogsheads,
147


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
then rolled it towards my hand, and beat out the top; I
drank it off at a draught, which I might well do, for it did
not hold half a pint, and tasted like a small wine of Bur-
gundy, but much more delicious. They brought me a
second hogshead, which I drank in the same manner, and
made signs formore; but they had none to giveme. When
I had performed these wonders they shouted for joy, and
danced upon my breast, repeating several times as they
did at first,"Hekinah degul." They made me a sign that
I should throw down the two hogsheads, but first warning
the people below to stand out of the way, crying aloud,
"Borach mevola;" and when they saw the vessels in the
air there was an universal shout of "Hekinah degul."
I confess I was often tempted, while they were passing
backwards and forwards on my body, to seize forty or
fifty of the first that came in my reach, and dash them
against the ground. But the remembrance of what I had
felt, which probably might not be the worst they could
do, and the promise of honor I made them — for so
I interpreted my submissive behavior — soon drove out
these imaginations. Besides, I now considered myself
as bound by the laws of hospitality to a people who had
treated me with so much expense and magnificence.
However, in my thoughts I could not sufficiently wonder
at the intrepidity of these diminutive mortals, who durst
venture to mount and walk upon my body while one of
my hands was at liberty, without trembling at the very
sight of so prodigious a creature as I must appear to
them. After some time, when they observed that I made
no more demands for meat, there appeared before me a
person of high rank from his imperial majesty. His ex-
148





THE NEW YORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY
ASTOK, Lc M"X AND
TlLDtN FOUNDATIONS


SHIPWRECKED ON LILLIPUT
cellency, having mounted on the small of my right leg,
advanced forwards up to my face, with about a dozen
of his retinue, and producing his credentials under the
signet royal, which he applied close to my eyes, spoke
about ten minutes without any signs of anger, but with a
kind of determinate resolution; often pointing forwards,
which, as I afterwards found, was towards the capital
city, about half a mile distant, whither it was agreed by
his majesty in council that I must be conveyed. I an-
swered in few words, but to no purpose, and made a sign
with my hand that was loose, putting it to the other (but
over his excellency's head for fear of hurting him or his
train) and then to my own head and body, to signify
that I desired my liberty.
It appeared that he understood me well enough, for
he shook his head by way of disapprobation, and held
his hand in a posture to show that I must be carried as a
prisoner. However, he made other signs, to let me under-
stand that I should have meat and drink enough, and
very good treatment. Whereupon I once more thought
of attempting to break my bonds; but again, when I felt
the smart of their arrows upon my face and hands, which
were all in blisters, and many of the darts still sticking
in them, and observing likewise that the number of my
enemies increased, I gave tokens to let them know that
they might do with me what they pleased. Upon this the
hurgo and his train withdrew, with much civility and
cheerful countenances. Soon after I heard a general
shout, with frequent repetitions of the words, "Peplom
selan;" and I felt great numbers of people on my left side
relaxing the cords to such a degree that I was able to turn
149


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
upon my right. But, before this, they had daubed my
face and both my hands with a sort of ointment, very
pleasant to the smell, which in a few minutes removed all
the smart of their arrows. These circumstances, added
to the refreshment I had received by their victuals and
drink, which were very nourishing, disposed me to sleep.
I slept about eight hours, as I was afterwards assured;
and it was no wonder, for the physicians, by the emperor's
order, had mingled a sleepy potion in the hogsheads of
wine.
It seems that upon the first moment I was discovered
sleeping on the ground, after my landing, the emperors
had early notice of it by an express, and determined in
council that I should be tied in the manner I have related
(which was done in the night, while I slept), that plenty
of meat and drink should be sent to me, and a machine
prepared to carry me to the capital city. This resolution
perhaps may appear very bold and dangerous, and I am
confident would not be imitated by any prince in Europe
on the like occasion. However, in my opinion, it was
extremely prudent, as well as generous: for, supposing
these people had endeavored to kill me with their spears
and arrows, while I was asleep, I should certainly have
awaked with the first sense of smart, which might so far
have roused my rage and strength as to have enabled me
to break the strings wherewith I was tied; after which, as
they were not able to make resistance, so they could
expect no mercy.
These people are most excellent mathematicians, and
arrived to a great perfection in mechanics by the coun-
tenance and encouragement of the emperor, who is a
150


SHIPWRECKED ON LILLIPUT
renowned patron of learning. This prince hath several
machines fixed on wheels, for the carriage of trees and
other great weights. He often builds his largest men-of-
war, whereof some are nine feet long, in the woods where
the timber grows, and has them carried on these engines
three or four hundred yards to the sea. Five hundred
carpenters and engineers were immediately set at work
to prepare the greatest engine they had. It was a frame
of wood raised three inches from the ground, about seven
feet long and four wide, moving upon twenty-two wheels.
The shout I heard was upon the arrival of this engine,
which, it seems, set out in four hours after my landing.
It was brought parallel to me, as I lay. But the prin-
cipal difficulty was to raise and place me in this vehicle.
Eighty poles, each of one foot high, were erected for this
purpose, and very strong cords, of the bigness of pack-
thread, were fastened by hooks to many bandages, which
the workmen had girt round my neck, my hands, my
body, and my legs. Nine hundred of the strongest men
were employed to draw up these cords, by many pulleys
fastened on the poles; and thus, in less than three hours,
I was raised and slung into the engine, and there tied
fast. All this I was told; for, while the whole operation
was performing, I lay in a profound sleep, by the force
of that soporiferous medicine infused into my liquor.
Fifteen hundred of the emperor's largest horses, each
about four inches and a half high, were employed to
draw me towards the metropolis, which, as I said, was
half a mile distant.
About four hours after we began our journey, I
awaked by a very ridiculous accident; for the carriage
151


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
being stopped awhile, to adjust something that was out
of order, two or three of the young natives had the
curiosity to see how I looked when I was asleep; they
climbed up into the engine, and advancing very softly
to my face, one of them, an officer in the guards, put the
sharp end of his half-pike a good way up into my left
nostril, which tickled my nose like a straw, and made me
sneeze violently; whereupon they stole off unperceived,
and it was three weeks before I knew the cause of my
waking so suddenly. We made a long march the re-
maining part of that day, and rested at night with five
hundred guards on each side of me, half with torches,
and half with bows and arrows, ready to shoot me if I
should offer to stir. The next morning at sunrise we con-
tinued our march, and arrived within two hundred yards
of the city gates about noon. The emperor and all his
court, came out to meet us, but his great officers would
by no means suffer his majesty to endanger his person
by mounting on my body.
At the place where the carriage stopped there stood
an ancient temple, esteemed to be the largest in the whole
kingdom; which, having been polluted some years before
by an unnatural murder, was, according to the zeal of
those people, looked on as profane, and therefore had
been applied to common use, and all the ornaments and
furniture carried away. In this edifice it was determined
I should lodge. The great gate, fronting to the north,
was about four feet high and almost two feet wide,
through which I could easily creep. On each side of the
gate was a small window, not above six inches from the
ground; into that on the left side the king's smith con-
152


SHIPWRECKED ON LILLIPUT
veyed fourscore and eleven chains, like those that hang
to a lady's watch in Europe, and almost as large, which
were locked to my left leg with six-and-thirty padlocks.
Over against this temple, on the other side of the great
highway, at twenty feet distance, there was a turret at
least five feet high. Here the emperor ascended, with
many principal lords of his court, to have an opportunity
of viewing me, as I was told, for I could not see them.
It was reckoned that above an hundred thousand in-
habitants came out of the town upon the same errand;
and in spite of my guards, I believe there could not be
fewer than ten thousand, at several times, who mounted
my body by the help of ladders. But a proclamation was
soon issued, to forbid it upon pain of death. When the
workmen found it was impossible for me to break loose
they cut all the strings that bound me; whereupon I rose
up, with as melancholy a disposition as ever I had in my
life. But the noise and astonishment of the people, at
seeing me rise and walk, are not to be expressed. The
chains that held my left leg were about two yards long,
and gave me not only the liberty of walking backwards
and forwards in a semicircle, but, being fixed within
four inches of the gate, allowed me to creep in, and lie at
my full length in the temple.


GULLIVER SEIZES THE ENEMY'S
FLEET ]
By Jonathan Swift
ONE morning, about a fortnight after I had obtained
my liberty, Reldresal, principal secretary (as they
style him) of private affairs, came to my house attended
only by one servant. He ordered his coach to wait at a
distance, and desired I would give him an hour's audi-
ence; which I readily consented to, on account of his
quality and personal merits, as well as the many good of-
fices he had done me during my solicitations at court. I
offered to lie down, that he might the more conveniently
reach my ear; but he chose rather to let me hold him in
my hand during our conversation. He began with com-
pliments on my liberty; said he might pretend to some
merit in it; but, however, added, that if it had not been
for the present situation of things at court, perhaps I
might not have obtained it so soon. "For," said he, "as
flourishing a condition as we may appear to be in to
foreigners, we labor under two mighty evils: a violent
faction at home, and the danger of an invasion, by a
most potent enemy, from abroad. As to the first, you are
to understand that for above seventy moons past there
have been two struggling parties in this empire, under
the names of Tramecksan and Slamecksan, from the high
and low heels of their shoes, by which they distinguish
154


GULLIVER SEIZES THE ENEMY'S FLEET
themselves. It is alleged, indeed, that the high heels are
most agreeable to our ancient constitution; but, how-
ever this may be, his majesty hath determined to make
use of only low heels in the administration of the govern-
ment and all offices in the gift of the crown, as you can-
not but observe: and particularly that his majesty's im-
perial heels are lower at least by a drurr than any of his
court [drurr is a measure about the fourteenth part of an
inch]. The animosities between these two parties run so
high, that they will neither eat nor drink nor talk with
each other. We compute the Tramecksan, or high heels,
to exceed us in number; but the power is wholly on our
side. We apprehend his imperial highness, the heir to
the crown, to have some tendency towards the high heels;
at least, we can plainly discover that one of his heels is
higher than the other, which gives him a hobble in his
gait. Now, in the midst of these intestine disquiets, we
are threatened with an invasion from the island of Ble-
fuscu, which is the other great empire of the universe,
almost as large and powerful as this of his majesty. For
as to what we heard you affirm, that there are other
kingdoms and states in the world inhabited by human
creatures as large as yourself, our philosophers are in
much doubt, and would rather conjecture that you
dropped from the moon, or one of the stars; because it is
certain that an hundred mortals of your bulk would in a
short time destroy all the fruits and cattle of his majesty's
dominions; besides, our histories of six thousand moons
make no mention of any other regions than the two great
empires of Lilliput and Blefuscu. Which two mighty
powers have, as I was going to tell you, been engaged in
155


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
a most obstinate war for six-and-thirty moons past. It
began upon the following occasion: it is allowed on all
hands, that the primitive way of breaking eggs, before
we eat them, was upon the larger end; but his present
majesty's grandfather, while he was a boy, going to eat
an egg, and breaking it according to the ancient practice,
happened to cut one of his fingers; whereupon the em-
peror, his father, published an edict, commanding all his
subjects, upon great penalties, to break the smaller end of
their eggs. The people so highly resented this law, that
our histories tell us there have been six rebellions raised
on that account; wherein one emperor lost his life, and
another his crown. These civil commotions were con-
stantly fomented by the monarchs of Blefuscu; and
when they were quelled, the exiles always fled for refuge
to that empire. It is computed that eleven thousand
persons have at several times suffered death, rather than
submit to break their eggs at the smaller end. Many
hundred large volumes have been published upon this
controversy: but the books of the Big-Endians have been
long forbidden, and the whole party rendered incapable
by law of holding employments. During the course of
these troubles, the emperors of Blefuscu did frequently
expostulate by their ambassadors, accusing us of making
a schism in religion by offending against a fundamental
doctrine of our great prophet Lustrog, in the fifty-fourth
chapter of the Blundecral, which is their Alcoran. This,
however, is thought to be a mere strain upon the text;
for the words are these: that all true believers break their
eggs at the convenient end; and which is the convenient
end seems, in my humble opinion, to be left to every
156


GULLIVER SEIZES THE ENEMY'S FLEET
man's conscience, or at least in the power of the chief
magistrate to determine.
"Now, the Big-Endian exiles have found so much
credit in the emperor of Blefuscu's court, and so much
private assistance and encouragement from their party
here at home, that a bloody war hath been carried on
between the two empires for thirty-six moons, with
various success; during which time we have lost forty
capital ships, and a much greater number of smaller
vessels, together with thirty thousand of our best seamen
and soldiers; and the damage received by the enemy is
reckoned to be somewhat greater than ours. However,
they have now equipped a numerous fleet, and are just
preparing to make a descent upon us; and his imperial
majesty, placing great confidence in your valor and
strength, hath commanded me to lay this account of his
affairs before you."
I desired the secretary to present my humble duty to
the emperor; and to let him know that I thought it
would not become me, who was a foreigner, to interfere
with parties; but I was ready, with the hazard of my
life, to defend his person and state against all invaders.
The empire of Blefuscu is an island situated to the
northeast side of Lilliput, from whence it is parted only
by a channel of eight hundred yards wide. I had not yet
seen it, and upon this notice of an intended invasion I
avoided appearing on that side of the coast, for fear of
being discovered by some of the enemy's ships, who had
received no intelligence of me; all intercourse between
the two empires having been strictly forbidden during
the war, upon pain of death, and an embargo laid by our
157


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
emperor upon all vessels whatsoever. I communicated
to his majesty a project I had formed of seizing the ene-
my's whole fleet; which, as our scouts assured us, lay at
anchor in the harbor, ready to sail with the first fair wind.
I consulted the most experienced seamen upon the depth
of the channel, which they had often plumbed; who told
me that in the middle, at high water, it was seventy glum-
glufls deep, which is about six feet of European measure;
and the rest of it fifty glumgluffs at most. I walked to-
wards the northeast coast, over against Blefuscu; where,
lying down behind a hillock, I took out my small per-
spective glass, and viewed the enemy's fleet at anchor,
consisting of about fifty men-of-war and a great number
of transports. I then came back to my house, and gave
order (for which I had a warrant) for a great quantity
of the strongest cable and bars of iron. The cable was
about as thick as pack-thread, and the bars of the length
and size of a knitting-needle. I trebled the cable to make
it stronger, and for the same reason I twisted three of the
iron bars together, binding the extremities into a hook.
Having thus fixed fifty hooks to as many cables, I went
back to the northeast coast, and, putting off my coat,
shoes, and stockings, walked into the sea in my leathern
jerkin, about an hour before high water. I waded with
what haste I could, and swam in the middle about thirty
yards, till I felt ground. I arrived to the fleet in less than
half an hour. The enemy was so frightened when they
saw me, that they leaped out of their ships and swam to
shore, where there could not be fewer than thirty thou-
sand souls. I then took my tackling, and fastening a
hook to the hole at the prow of each, I tied all the cords
158


GULLIVER SEIZES THE ENEMY'S FLEET
together at the end. While I was thus employed, the
enemy discharged several thousand arrows, many of
which stuck in my hands and face; and, besides the ex-
cessive smart, gave me much disturbance in my work.
My greatest apprehension was for mine eyes, which I
should have infallibly lost, if I had not suddenly thought
of an expedient. I kept, among other little necessa-
ries, a pair of spectacles in a private pocket, which, as
I observed before, had escaped the emperor's searches.
These I took out and fastened as strongly as I could upon
my nose, and thus armed, went on boldly with my work,
in spite of the enemy's arrows, many of which struck
against the glasses of my spectacles, but without any
other effect, farther than a little to discompose them. I
had now fastened all the hooks, and taking the knot in
my hand, began to pull; but not a ship would stir, for
they were all too fast held by their anchors, so that the
boldest part of my enterprise remained. I therefore let
go the cord, and leaving the hooks fixed to the ships, I
resolutely cut with my knife the cables that fastened the
anchors, receiving above two hundred shots in my face
and hands; then I took up the knotted end of the cables,
to which my hooks were tied, and with great ease drew
fifty of the enemy's largest men-of-war after me.
The Blefuscudians, who had not the least imagination
of what I intended, were at first confounded with aston-
ishment. They had seen me cut the cables, and thought
my design was only to let the ships run adrift, or fall foul
on each other; but when they perceived the whole fleet
moving in order, and saw me pulling at the end, they set
up such a scream of grief and despair that it is almost
159


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
impossible to describe or conceive it. When I had got out
of danger, I stopped awhile to pick out the arrows that
stuck in my hands and face; and rubbed on some of the
same ointment that was given me at my first arrival, as
I have formerly mentioned. I then took off my spec-
tacles, and waiting about an hour, till the tide was a little
fallen, I waded through the middle with my cargo, and
arrived safe at the royal port of Lilliput.
The emperor and his whole court stood on the shore,
expecting the issue of this great adventure. They saw
the ships move forward in a large half-moon, but could
not discern me, who was up to my breast in water.
When I advanced to the middle of the channel, they were
yet in more pain, because I was under water to my neck.
The emperor concluded me to be drowned, and that the
enemy's fleet was approaching in a hostile manner; but
he was soon eased of his fears, for, the channel growing
shallower every step I made, I came in a short time
within hearing, and holding up the end of the cable, by
which the fleet was fastened, I cried in a loud voice,
"Long live the most puissant emperor of Lilliput!"
This great prince received me at my landing with all
possible encomiums, and created me a nardac upon the
spot, which is the highest title of honor among them.
His majesty desired I would take some opportunity of
bringing all the rest of his enemy's ships into his ports.
And so unmeasurable is the ambition of princes, that he
seemed to think of nothing less than reducing the whole
empire of Blefuscu into a province, and governing it by
a viceroy; of destroying the Big-Endian exiles, and
compelling that people to break the smaller end of their
160


GULLIVER SEIZES THE ENEMY'S FLEET
eggs, by which he would remain the sole monarch of the
whole world. But I endeavored to divert him from his
design, by many arguments drawn from the topics of
policy as well as justice; and I plainly protested that I
"would never be an instrument of bringing a free and
brave people into slavery;" and when the matter was
debated in council, the wisest part of the ministry were
of my opinion.


A LILLIPUTIAN ODE TO THE
MAN-MOUNTAIN
By Jonathan Swift
IN amaze,
Lost, I gaze!
Can our eyes
Reach thy size?
May my lays .
Swell with praise!
Worthy thee!
Worthy me!
Muse, inspire
All thy fire.
Bards of old
Of him told,
When they said
Atlas' head
Propt the skies:
See, and believe your eyes.
See him stride
Valleys wide:
Over woods,
Over floods,
When he treads,
Mountains' heads
162


A LILLIPUTIAN ODE
Groan and shake;
Annies quake,
Lest his spurn
Overturn
Man and steed:
Troops take heed!
Left and right,
Speed your flight!
Lest an host
Beneath his foot be lost.
Turn'd aside
From his hide,
Safe from wound
Darts rebound;
From his nose
Clouds he blows;
When he speaks,
Thunder breaks!
When he eats,
Famine threats;
When he drinks,
Neptune shrinks!
Nigh thy ear,
In mid air,
On thy hand
Let me stand;
So shall I,
Lofty poet, touch the sky.


AMONG THE BROBDINGNAGIAN
GIANTS
By Jonathan Swift
HAVING been condemned by nature and fortune
to an active and restless life, in two months after
my return I again left my native country, and took ship-
ping in the Downs, on the 20th day of June, 1702, in
the Adventure, Captain John Nicholas, a Comishman,
commander, bound for Surat. We had a very prosperous
gale till we arrived at the Cape of Good Hope, where we
landed for fresh water; but discovering a leak, we un-
shipped our goods, and wintered there; for the captain
falling sick of an ague, we could not leave the Cape till
theend of March. We then set sail, and had a good voyage
till we passed the Straits of Madagascar; but having got
northward of that island, and to about five degrees south
latitude, the winds, which in those seas were observed to
blow a constant equal gale between the north and west,
from the beginning of December to the beginning of May,
on the 9th of April began to blow with much greater
violence, and more westerly than usual, continuing so
for twenty days together: during which time we were
driven a little to the east of the Molucca Islands, and
about three degrees northward of the line, as our captain
found by an observation he took the 2d of May, at which
time the wind ceased, and it was a perfect calm; whereat
164


THE BROBDINGNAGIAN GIANTS
I was not a little rejoiced. But he, being a man experi-
enced in the navigation of those seas, bid us all prepare
against a storm, which accordingly happened the day
following; for a southern wind, called the southern mon-
soon, began to set in.
Finding it was like to overblow, we took in our sprit-
sail, and stood by to hand the foresail; but, making
foul weather, we looked the guns were all fast, and
handed the mizzen. The ship lay very broad off, so we
thought it better spooning before the sea than trying or
hulling. We reefed the foresail and set him, and hauled
aft the fore sheet; the helm was hard-a-weather. The
ship wore bravely. We belayed the fore downhaul; but
the sail was split, and we hauled down the yard, and got
the sail into the ship, and unbound all the things clear of
it. It was a very fierce storm; the sea broke strange and
dangerous. We hauled off upon the lanyard of the whip-
staff, and helped the man at the helm. We would not
get down our topmast, but let all stand, because she
scudded before the sea very well, and we knew that the
topmast being aloft, the ship was the wholesomer, and
made better way through the sea, seeing we had sea-
room. When the storm was over, we set foresail and
mainsail, and brought the ship to. Then we set the
mizzen, main topsail, and the fore-topsail. Our course
was east-northeast, the wind was at southwest. We got
the starboard tacks aboard, we cast off our weather
braces and lifts; we set in the lee braces, and hauled
forward by the weather bowlings, and hauled them right,
and belayed them, and hauled over the mizzen tack to
windward, and kept her full and by as near as she would
165


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
lie. During this storm, which was followed by a strong
wind west-southwest, we were carried, by my computa-
tion, about five hundred leagues to the east, so that the
oldest sailor aboard could not tell in what part of the
world we were. Our provisions held out well, our ship
was stanch, and our crew all in good health; but we lay
in the utmost distress for water. We thought it best to
hold on the same course, rather than turn more northerly,
which might have brought us to the northwest parts of
Great Tartary, and into the Frozen Sea.
On the 16th day of June, 1703, a boy on the topmast
discovered land. On the 17th, we came in full view of a
great island, or continent (for we knew not whether); on
the south side whereof was a small neck of land jutting
out into the sea, and a creek too shallow to hold a ship
of above one hundred tons. We cast anchor within a
league of this creek, and our captain sent a dozen of his
men well armed in the long boat, with vessels for water,
if any could be found. I desired his leave to go with
them, that I might see the country, and make what dis-
coveries I could. When we came to land, we saw no
river, or spring, nor any sign of inhabitants. Our men
therefore wandered on the shore to find out some fresh
water near the sea, and I walked alone about a mile on
the other side, where I observed the country all barren
and rocky. I now began to be weary, and seeing nothing
to entertain my curiosity, I returned gently down towards
the creek; and the sea being full in my view, I saw our
men already got into the boat and rowing for life to the
ship. I was going to holla after them, although it had
been to little purpose, when I observed a huge creature
166


THE BROBDINGNAGIAN GIANTS
walking after them in the sea, as fast as he could: he
waded not much deeper than his knees, and took pro-
digious strides: but our men had the start of him half
a league, and the sea thereabouts being full of sharp-
pointed rocks, the monster was not able to overtake the
boat. This I was afterwards told, for I durst not stay to
see the issue of the adventure, but ran as fast as I could
the way I first went, and then climbed up a steep hill,
which gave me some prospect of the country. I found it
fully cultivated; but that which first surprised me was
the length of the grass, which, in those grounds that
seemed to be kept for hay, was about twenty feet high.
I fell into a highroad, for so I took it to be, though it
served to the inhabitants only as a footpath through a
field of barley. Here I walked on for some time, but
could see little on either side, it being now at least har-
vest, and the corn rising near forty feet. I was an hour
walking to the end of this field, which was fenced in with
a hedge of at least one hundred and twenty feet high, and
the trees so lofty that I could make no computation of
their altitude. There was a stile to pass from this field
into the next. It had four steps, and a stone to cross over
when you came to the uppermost. It was impossible for
me to climb this stile, because every step was six feet
high, and the upper stone above twenty. I was endeav-
oring to find some gap in the hedge, when I discovered
one of the inhabitants in thenext field, advancing towards
the stile, of the same size with him I saw in the sea pur-
suing our boat. He appeared as tall as an ordinary spire
steeple, and took about ten yards at every stride, as near
as I could guess. I was struck with the utmost fear and
167


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
astonishment, and ran to hide myself in the corn, whence
I saw him at the top of the stile looking back into the
next field on the right hand, and heard him call in a
voice many degrees louder than a speaking-trumpet; but
the noise was so high in the air, that at first I certainly
thought it was thunder. Whereupon seven monsters,
like himself, came towards him, with reaping hooks in
their hands, each hook about the largeness of six scythes.
These people were not so well clad as the first, whose
servants or laborers they seemed to be; for, upon some
words he spoke, they went to reap the corn in the field
where I lay. I kept from them at as great a distance as I
could, but was forced to move with extreme difficulty, for
the stalks of the corn were sometimes not above a foot
distant, so that I could hardly squeeze my body betwixt
them. However, I made shift to go forward till I came
to a part of the field where the corn had been laid by the
rain and wind. Here it was impossible for me to advance
a step; for the stalks were so interwoven that I could not
creep through, and the beards of the fallen ears so strong
and pointed that they pierced though my clothes into
my flesh. At the same time I heard the reapers not above
an hundred yards behind me. Being quite dispirited
with toil, and wholly overcome by grief and despair, I
lay down between two ridges, and heartily wished I
might there end my days. I bemoaned my desolate
widow and fatherless children. I lamented my own folly
and willfulness, in attempting a second voyage against
the advice of all my friends and relations. In this terrible
agitation of mind, I could not forbear thinking of Lilli-
put, whose inhabitants looked upon me as the greatest
168


THE BROBDINGNAGIAN GIANTS
prodigy that ever appeared in the world; where I was
able to draw an imperial fleet in my hand, and perform
those other actions which will be recorded forever in the
chronicles of that empire, while posterity shall hardly
believe them, although attested by millions. I reflected
what a mortification it must prove to me to appear as
inconsiderable in this nation as one single Lilliputian
would be among us. But this, I conceived, was to be
the least of my misfortunes; for, as human creatures are
observed to be more savage and cruel in proportion to
their bulk, what could I expect but to be a morsel in the
mouth of the first among these enormous barbarians that
should happen to seize me? Undoubtedly philosophers
are in the right when they tell us that nothing is great
or little otherwise than by comparison. It might have
pleased fortune to let the Lilliputians find some nation
where the people were as diminutive with respect to
them as they were to me. And who knows but that even
this prodigious race of mortals might be equally over-
matched in some distant part of the world, whereof we
have yet no discovery?
Scared and confounded as I was, I could not for-
bear going on with these reflections, when one of the
reapers, approaching within ten yards of the ridge where
I lay, made me apprehend that with the next step I
should be squashed to death under his foot, or cut in
two with his reaping hook. And, therefore, when he was
again about to move, I screamed as loud as fear could
make me; whereupon the huge creature trod short, and
looking round about under him for some time, at last
espied me as I lay on the ground. He considered awhile,
169


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
with the caution of one who endeavors to lay hold on a
small dangerous animal in such a manner that it may not
be able either to scratch or to bite him, as I myself have
sometimes done with a weasel in England. At length
he ventured to take me up behind, by the middle, be-
tween his forefinger and thumb, and brought me within
three yards of his eyes, that he might behold my shape
more perfectly. I guessed his meaning, and my good
fortune gave me so much presence of mind that I re-
solved not to struggle in the least as he held me in the air
about sixty feet from the ground, although he grievously
pinched my sides, for fear I should slip through his
fingers. All I ventured was to raise mine eyes toward
the sun, and place my hands together in a supplicating
posture, and to speak some words in an humble, mel-
ancholy tone, suitable to the condition I then was in; for
I apprehended every moment that he would dash me
against the ground, as we usually do any little hateful
animal which we have in mind to destroy. But my good
star would have it that he appeared pleased with my
voice and gestures, and began to look upon me as a
curiosity, much wondering to hear me pronounce articu-
late words, although he could not understand them. In
the meantime I was not able to forbear groaning and
shedding tears, and turning my head towards my sides;
letting him know, as well as I could, how cruelly I was
hurt by the pressure of his thumb and finger. He seemed
to apprehend my meaning; for, lifting up the lappet of
his coat, he put me gently into it, and immediately ran
along with me to his master, who was a substantial
farmer, and the same person I had first seen in the field.
170





THE BROBDINGNAGIAN GIANTS
The farmer having (as I suppose by their talk) re-
ceived such an account of me as his servant could give
him, took a piece of a small straw, about the size of a
walking staff, and therewith lifted up the lappets of my
coat; which it seems he thought to be some kind of
covering that nature had given me. He blew my hairs
aside to take a better view of my face. He called his
hinds about him, and asked them (as I afterwards
learned) whether they had ever seen in the fields any
little creature that resembled me. He then placed me
softly on the ground upon all fours, but I got immediately
up, and walked slowly backwards and forwards, to let
those people see I had no intent to run away. They all
sat down in a circle about me, the better to observe my
motions. I pulled off my hat, and made a low bow
towards the farmer. I fell on my knees, and lifted up
my hands and eyes, and spoke several words as loud as
I could; I took a purse of gold out of my pocket, and
humbly presented it to him. He received it on the palm
of his hand, and then applied it close to his eye to see
what it was, and afterwards turned it several times with
the point of a pin (which he took out of his sleeve), but
could make nothing of it. Whereupon I made a sign
that he should place his hand on the ground. I then
took the purse, and opening it, poured all the gold into
his palm. There were six Spanish pieces of four pistoles
each, besides twenty or thirty smaller coins. I saw him
wet the tip of his little finger upon his tongue, and take
up one of my largest pieces, and then another; but he
seemed to be wholly ignorant what they were. He made
me a sign to put them again into my purse, and the purse
171


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
again into my pocket, which, after offering it to him
several times, I thought it best to do.
The farmer by this time was convinced I must be a
rational creature. He spoke often to me; but the sound
of his voice pierced my ears like that of a water mill, yet
his words were articulate enough. I answered as loud
as I could in several languages, and he often laid his
ear within two yards of me: but all in vain, for we were
wholly unintelligible to each other. He then sent his
servants to their work, and taking his handkerchief out
of his pocket, he doubled and spread it on his left hand,
which he placed flat on the ground with the palm up-
ward, making me a sign to step into it, as I could easily
do, for it was not above a foot in thickness. I thought it
my part to obey, and, for fear of falling, laid myself at
length upon the handkerchief, with the remainder of
which he lapped me up to the head for further security,
and in this manner carried me home to his house. There
he called his wife, and showed me to her; but she
screamed and ran back, as women in England do at the
sight of a toad or a spider. However, when she had
awhile seen my behavior, and how well I observed the
signs her husband made, she was soon reconciled, and
by degrees grew extremely tender of me.
It was about twelve at noon, and a servant brought in
dinner. It was only one substantial dish of meat (fit for
the plain condition of an husbandman), in a dish of about
four-and-twenty feet diameter. The company were the
farmer and his wife, three children, and an old grand-
mother. When they were set down, the farmer placed
me at some distance from him on the table, which was
172


THE BROBDINGNAGIAN GIANTS
thirty feet high from the floor. I was in a terrible fright,
and kept as far as I could from the edge, for fear of
falling. The wife minced a bit of meat, then crumbled
some bread on a trencher, and placed it before me. I
made her a low bow, took out my knife and fork, and fell
to eat, which gave them exceeding delight. The mistress
sent her maid for a small dram cup, which held about
two gallons, and filled it with drink; I took up the vessel
with much difficulty in both hands, and in a most respect-
ful manner drank to her ladyship's health, expressing
the words as loud as I could in English, which made the
company laugh so heartily that I was almost deafened
with the noise. This liquor tasted like a small cider, and
was not unpleasant. Then the master made me a sign
to come to his trencher-side; but as I walked on the
table, being in great surprise all the time, as the indul-
gent reader will easily conceive and excuse, I happened
to stumble against a crust, and fell flat on my face, but
received no hurt. I got up immediately, and observing
the good people to be in much concern, I took my hat
(which I held under my arm out of good manners), and
waving it over my head, made three huzzas, to show I
had got no mischief by my fall. But advancing forward
towards my master (as I shall henceforth call him), his
youngest son, who sat next him, an arch boy of about ten
years old, took me up by the legs, and held me so high in
the air that I trembled every limb; but his father snatched
me from him, and at the same time gave him such a
box on the left earas would have felled an European troop
of horse to the earth, ordering him to be taken from
the table. But being afraid the boy might owe me a
173


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
spite, and well remembering how mischievous all children
among us naturally are to sparrows, rabbits, young kit-
tens, and puppy dogs, I fell on my knees, and pointing to
the boy, made my master to understand as well as I could
that I desired his son might be pardoned. The father
complied, and the lad took his seat again, whereupon I
went to him, and kissed his hand, which my master took,
and made him stroke me gently with it.
In the midst of dinner, my mistress's favorite cat
leaped into her lap. I heard a noise behind me like that
of a dozen stocking-weavers at work; and turning my
head, I found it proceeded from the purring of that ani-
mal, who seemed to be three times larger than an ox, as I
computed by the view of her head and one of her paws,
while her mistress was feeding and stroking her. The
fierceness of this creature's countenance altogether dis-
composed me, though I stood at the farther end of the
table, above fifty feet off, and although my mistress held
her fast, for fear she might give a spring, and seize me in
her talons. But it happened there was no danger, for the
cat took not the least notice of me when my master
placed me within three yards of her. And as I have been
always told, and found true by experience in my travels,
that flying or discovering fear before a fierce animal is a
certain way to make it pursue or attack you, so I resolved
in this dangerous juncture to show no manner of con-
cern. I walked with intrepidity five or six times before
the very head of the cat, and came within half a yard of
her; whereupon she drew herself back, as if she were
more afraid of me. I had less apprehension concerning
the dogs, whereof three or four came into the room, as
174


THE BROBDINGNAGIAN GIANTS
is usual in farmers' houses; one of which was a mastiff,
equal in bulk to four elephants, and a greyhound some-
what taller than the mastiff, but not so large.
When dinner was almost done, the nurse came in with
a child of a year old in her arms, who immediately spied
me, and began a squall that you might have heard from
London Bridge to Chelsea, after the usual oratory of
infants, to get me for a plaything. The mother, out of
pure indulgence, took me up, and put me towards the
child, who presently seized me by the middle, and got my
head into his mouth, where I roared so loud that the
urchin was frighted, and let me drop, and I should in-
fallibly have broken my neck if the mother had not held
her apron under me. The nurse, to quiet her babe,
made use of a rattle, which was a kind of hollow vessel
filled with great stones, and fastened by a cable to the
child's waist.
I remember, when I was at Lilliput, the complexions
of those diminutive people appeared to me the fairest in
the world; and talking upon the subject with a person of
learning there, who was an intimate friend of mine, he
said that my face appeared much fairer and smoother
when he looked on me from the ground than it did upon
a nearer view, when I took him up in my hand and
brought him close, which he confessed was at first a very
shocking sight. He said he could discover great holes
in my skin; that the stumps of my beard were ten times
stronger than the bristles of a boar, and my complexion
made up of several colors, altogether disagreeable;
although I must beg leave to say for myself that I am
as fair as most of my sex and country, and very little sun-
175


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
burnt by travels. On the other side, discoursing of the
ladies in that emperor's court, he used to tell me, one
had freckles, another too wide a mouth, a third too large
a nose; nothing of which I was able to distinguish. I
confess this reflection was obvious enough; which, how-
ever, I could not forbear, lest the reader might think
those vast creatures were actually deformed: for I must
do them justice to say, they are a comely race of people;
and particularly the features of my master's countenance,
although he were but a farmer, when I beheld him from
the height of sixty feet, appeared very well proportioned.
When dinner was done, my master went out to his
laborers, and, as I could discover by his voice and ges-
ture, gave his wife a strict charge to take care of me. I
was very much tired and disposed to sleep, which my
mistress perceiving, she put me on her own bed, and
covered me with a clean white handkerchief, but larger
and coarser than the mainsail of a man-of-war.
I slept about two hours, and dreamed I was at home
with my wife and children, which aggravated my sor-
rows when I awaked, and found myself alone, in a vast
room, between two and three hundred feet wide, and
above two hundred high, lying in a bed twenty yards
wide. My mistress was gone about her household affairs,
and had locked me in. The bed was eight yards from
the floor. I durst not presume to call; and if I had, it
would have been in vain, with such a voice as mine, at so
great a distance as from the room where I lay to the
kitchen where the family kept. While I was under these
circumstances, two rats crept up the curtains, and ran
smelling backwards and forwards on the bed. One of
176


THE BROBDINGNAGIAN GIANTS
them came up almost to my face, whereupon I rose in a
fright, and drew out my hanger to defend myself. These
horrible animals had the boldness to attack me on both
sides, and one of them held his forefeet at my collar;
but I had the good fortune to rip up his belly before
he could do me any mischief. He fell down at my feet;
and the other, seeing the fate of his comrade, made his
escape, but not without one good wound on the back,
which I gave him as he fled, and made the blood run
trickling from him. After this exploit, I walked gently
to and fro on the bed, to recover my breath and loss
of spirits. These creatures were of the size of a large
mastiff, but infinitely more nimble and fierce; so that if
I had taken off my belt before I went to sleep, I must
have infallibly been torn to pieces and devoured. I
measured the tail of the dead rat, and found it to be two
yards long wanting an inch; but it went against my
stomach to draw the carcass off the bed, where it lay
still bleeding. I observed it had yet some life, but with
a strong slash across the neck, I thoroughly dispatched
it.
Soon after, my mistress came into the room, who,
seeing me all bloody, ran and took me up in her hand.
I pointed to the dead rat, smiling, and making other
signs to show I was not hurt; whereat she was extremely
rejoiced, calling the maid to take up the dead rat with a
pair of tongs, and throw it out of the window. Then she
set me on a table, where I showed her my hanger all
bloody, and wiping it on the lappet of my coat, returned
it to the scabbard.
I hope the gentle reader will excuse me for dwelling
177


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
on these and the like particulars, which, however insig-
nificant they may appear to groveling vulgar minds, yet
will certainly help a philosopher to enlarge his thoughts
and imagination, and to apply them to a benefit of public
as private life, which was my sole design in presenting this
and other accounts of my travels to the world; wherein
I have been chiefly studious of truth, without affecting
any ornaments of learning or of style. But the whole
scene of this voyage made so strong an impression on my
mind, and is so deeply fixed in my memory, that in com-
mitting it to paper I did not omit one material circum-
stance : however, upon a strict review, I blotted out several
passages of less moment, which were in my first copy, for
fear of being censured as tedious and trifling, whereof
travelers are often, perhaps not without justice, accused.


ADVENTURES IN BROBDINGNAG
By Jonathan Swift
ISHOULD have lived happy enough in that country
if my littleness had not exposed me to several
ridiculous and troublesome accidents; some of which I
shall venture to relate. Glumdalclitch often carried me
into the gardens of the court in my smaller box, and
would sometimes take me out of it, and hold me in her
hand, or set me down to walk. I remember, before the
dwarf left the queen, he followed us one day into those
gardens, and my nurse having set me down, he and I
being close together, near some dwarf apple-trees, I
must needs show my wit, by a silly allusion between him
and the trees, which happens to hold in their language as
it doth in ours. Whereupon the malicious rogue, watch-
ing his opportunity when I was walking under one of
them, shook it directly over my head, by which a dozen
apples, each of them near as large as a Bristol barrel,
came tumbling about my ears; one of them hit me on the
back as I chanced to stoop, and knocked me down flat
on my face; but I received no other hurt, and the dwarf
was pardoned at my desire, because I had given the
provocation.
Another day, Glumdalclitch left me on a smooth grass-
plot to divert myself, while she walked at some distance
with her governess. In the meantime there suddenly fell
179


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
such a violent shower of hail that I was immediately, by
the force of it, struck to the ground: and when I was
down, the hailstones gave me such cruel bangs all over
the body, as if I had been pelted with tennis balls: how-
ever, I made a shift to creep on all four, and shelter my-
self, by lying flat on my face, on the lee side of a border
of lemon-thyme; but so bruised from head to foot that
I could not go abroad in ten days. Neither is this at all
to be wondered at, because nature, in that country, ob-
serving the same proportion through all her operations,
a hailstone is near eighteen hundred times as large as one
in Europe; which I can assert upon experience, having
been so curious as to weigh and measure them.
But a more dangerous accident happened to me in the
same garden, when my little nurse, believing she had put
me in a secure place (which I often entreated her to do,
that I might enjoy my own thoughts), and having left my
box at home, to avoid the trouble of carrying it, went to
another part of the garden with her governess and some
ladies of her acquaintance. While she was absent, and
out of hearing, a small white spaniel belonging to one of
the chief gardeners, having got by accident into the gar-
den, happened to range near the place where I lay; the
dog, following the scent, came directly up, and taking
me in his mouth, ran straight to his master, wagging his
tail, and set me gently on the ground. By good fortune
he had been so well taught that I was carried between
his teeth without the least hurt, or even tearing my
clothes. But the poor gardener, who knew me well, and
had a great kindness for me, was in a terrible fright; he
gently took me up in both his hands, and asked me how I
180;


ADVENTURES IN BROBDINGNAG
did, but I was so amazed and out of breath that I could
not speak a word. In few minutes I came to myself, and
he carried me safe to my little nurse, who by this time
had returned to the place where she left me, and was in
cruel agonies when I did not appear, nor answer when
she called. She severely reprimanded the gardener on
account of his dog. But the thing was hushed up, and
never known at court, for the girl was afraid of the queen's
anger; and truly, as to myself, I thought it would not be
for my reputation that such a story should go about.
This accident absolutely determined Glumdalclitch
never to trust me abroad for the future out of her sight.
I had been long afraid of this resolution, and therefore
concealed from her some little unlucky adventures that
happened in those times when I was left by myself. Once
a kite, hovering over the garden, made a stoop at me, and
if I had not resolutely drawn my hanger, and run under
a thick espalier, he would have certainly carried me
away in his talons. Another time, walking to the top of
a fresh molehill, I fell to my neck in the hole through
which that animal had cast up the earth, and coined
some lie, not worth remembering, to excuse myself for
spoiling my clothes. I likewise broke my right shin against
the shell of a snail, which I happened to stumble over as
I was walking alone and thinking on poor England.
I cannot tell whether I were more pleased or morti-
fied to observe, in those solitary walks, that the smaller
birds did not appear to be at all afraid of me, but would
hop about within a yard's distance, looking for worms
and other food, with as much indifference and security
as if no creature at all were near them. I remember a
181


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
thrush had the confidence to snatch out of my hand, with
his bill, a piece of cake that Glumdalclitch had just
given me for my breakfast. When I attempted to catch
any of these birds, they would boldly turn against me,
endeavoring to pick my fingers, which I durst not ven-
ture within their reach; and then they would hop back
unconcerned, to hunt for. worms or snails, as they did
before. But one day I took a thick cudgel, and threw it
with all my strength so luckily at a linnet that I knocked
him down, and seizing him by the neck with both my
hands, ran with him in triumph to my nurse. However,
the bird, who had only been stunned, recovering him-
self, gave me so many boxes with his wings, on both sides
of my head and body, though I held him at arm's length,
and was out of the reach of his claws, that I was twenty
times thinking to let him go. But I was soon relieved
by one of our servants, who wrung off the bird's neck,
and I had him next day for dinner, by the queen's com-
mand. This linnet, as near as I can remember, seemed
to be somewhat larger than an England swan.
One day, a young gentleman, who was nephew to my
nurse's governess, came and pressed them both to see
an execution. It was of a man who had murdered one of
that gentleman's intimate acquaintance. Glumdalclitch
was prevailed on to be of the company, very much
against her inclination, for she was naturally tender-
hearted; and as for myself, although I abhorred such
kind of spectacles, yet my curiosity tempted me to see
something that I thought must be extraordinary. The
malefactor was fixed in a chair upon a scaffold erected
for that purpose, and his head cut off at one blow with
182


ADVENTURES IN BROBDINGNAG
a sword of about forty feet long. The veins and arteries
spouted up such a prodigious quantity of blood, and so
high in the air, that the great jet d'eau at Versailles was
not equal for the time it lasted; and the head, when
it fell on the scaffold floor, gave such a bounce as made
me start, although I were at least half an English mile
distant.
The queen, who often used to hear me talk of my
sea voyage, and took all occasions to divert me when I
was melancholy, asked me whether I understood how
to handle a sail or an oar, and whether a little exercise
of rowing might not be convenient for my health. I
answered that I understood both very well: for although
my proper employment had been to be surgeon or doc-
tor to the ship, yet often, upon a pinch, I was forced to
work like a common mariner. But I could not see how
this could be done in their country, where the smallest
wherry was equal to a first-rate man-of-war among us;
and such a boat as I could manage would never live in
any of their rivers. Her majesty said, if I would con-
trive a boat, her own joiner should make it, and she would
provide a place for me to sail in. The fellow was an
ingenious workman, and by my instructions, in ten days
finished a pleasure boat, with all its tackling, able con-
veniently to hold eight Europeans. When it was finished
the queen was so delighted that she ran with it in her lap
to the king, who ordered it to be put in a cistern full of
water, with me in it, by way of trial; where I could not
manage my two sculls, or little oars, for want of room.
But the queen had before contrived another project.
She ordered the joiner to make a wooden trough of three
183


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
hundred feet long, fifty broad, and eight deep; which
being well pitched to prevent leaking, was placed on the
floor along the wall, in an outer room of the palace. It
had a cock near the bottom to let out the water when it
began to grow stale; and two servants could easily fill
it in half an hour. Here I often used to row for my own
diversion, as well as that of the queen and her ladies, who
thought themselves well entertained with my skill and
agility. Sometimes I would put up my sail, and then my
business was only to steer, while the ladies gave me a
gale with their fans; and when they were weary, some
of the pages would blow my sail forward with their
breath, while I showed my art by steering starboard or
larboard as I pleased. When I had done, Glumdalclitch
always carried back my boat into her closet, and hung
it on a nail to dry.
In this exercise I once met an accident which had like
to have cost me my life; for, one of the pages having put
my boat into the trough, the governess who attended
Glumdalclitch very officiously lifted me up, to place me
in the boat; but I happened to slip through her fingers,
and should infallibly have fallen down forty feet, upon
the floor, if, by the luckiest chance in the world, I had
not been stopped by a corking-pin that stuck in the good
gentlewoman's stomacher; the head of the pin passed
between my shirt and the waistband of my breeches, and
thus I was held by the middle in the air, till Glumdal-
clitch ran to my relief.
Another time, one of the servants, whose office it was
to fill my trough every third day with fresh water, was
so careless as to let a huge frog (not perceiving it) slip out
184


ADVENTURES IN BROBDINGNAG
of his pail. The frog lay concealed till I was put into my
boat, but then, seeing a resting-place, climbed up and
made it lean so much on one side that I was forced to
balance it with all my weight on the other to prevent
overturning. When the frog was got in, it hopped at
once half the length of the boat, and then over my head,
backwards and forwards, daubing my face and clothes
with its odious slime. The largeness of its features made
it appear the most deformed animal that can be con-
ceived. However, I desired Glumdalclitch to let me deal
with it alone. I banged it a good while with one of my
sculls, and at last forced it to leap out of the boat.
But the greatest danger I ever underwent in that king-
dom was from a monkey, that belonged to one of the
clerks of the kitchen. Glumdalclitch had locked me up
in her closet, while she went somewhere upon business
or a visit. The weather being very warm, the closet
window was left open, as well as the windows and the
door of my bigger box, in which I usually lived, because
of its largeness and conveniency. As I sat quietly medi-
tating at my table, I heard something bounce in at the
closet window, and skip about from one side to the other;
whereat although I were much alarmed, yet I ventured
to look out, but not stirring from my seat; and then I saw
this frolicsome animal frisking and leaping up and down,
till at last he came to my box, which he seemed to view
with great pleasure and curiosity, peeping in at the door
and every window. I retreated to the farther corner of
my room, or box; but the monkey, looking in at every
side, put me into such a fright that I wanted presence of
mind to conceal myself under the bed, as I might have
185


ADVENTURES IN BROBDINGNAG
enough to everybody but myself. Some of the people
threw up stones, hoping to drive the monkey down; but
this was strictly forbidden, or else, very probably, my
brains had been dashed out.
The ladders were now applied, and mounted by
several men; which the monkey observing, and finding
himself almost encompassed, not being able to make
speed enough with his three legs, let me drop on a ridge
tile and made his escape. Here I sat for some time, five
hundred yards from the ground, expecting every moment
to be blown down by the wind, or to fall by my own giddi-
ness, and come tumbling over and over from the ridge to
the eaves; but an honest, lad, one of my nurse's footmen,
climbed up, and putting me into his breeches' pocket,
brought me down safe.
I was so weak and bruised in the sides with the
squeezes given me by this odious animal that I was
forced to keep my bed a fortnight. The king, queen, and
all the court sent every day to inquire after my health;
and her majesty made me several visits during my sick-
ness. The monkey was killed, and an order made that
no such animal should be kept about the palace.
When I attended the king after my recovery, to return
him thanks for his favors, he was pleased to rally me
a good deal upon this adventure. He asked me what
my thoughts and speculations were while I lay in the
monkey's paw; how I liked the victuals he gave me; his
manner of feeding; and whether the fresh air on the roof
had sharpened my stomach. He desired to know what
I would have done upon such an occasion in my own
country. I told his majesty that in Europe we had no
187


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
monkeys except such as were brought for curiosities
from other places, and so small that I could deal with a
dozen of them together, if they presumed to attack me.
And as for that monstrous animal with which I was so
lately engaged (it was indeed as large as an elephant), if
my fears had suffered me to think so far as to make use
of my hanger (looking fiercely, and clapping my hand
upon the hilt, as I spoke) when he poked his paw into my
chamber, perhaps I should have given him such a wound
as would have made him glad to withdraw it, with more
haste than he put it in. This I delivered in a firm tone,
like a person who was jealous lest his courage should
be called in question. However, my speech produced
nothing else besides a loud laughter, which all the respect
due to his majesty from those about him could not make
them contain. This made me reflect, how vain an at-
tempt it is for a man to endeavor doing himself honor
among those who are out of all degree of equality or
comparison with him. And yet I have seen the moral of
my own behavior very frequent in England since my
return; where a little contemptible varlet, without the
least title to birth, person, wit, or common sense, shall
presume to look with importance, and put himself upon
a foot with the greatest persons of the kingdom.
I was every day furnishing the court with some ridicu-
lous story; and Glumdalclitch, although she loved me to
excess, yet was arch enough to inform the queen when-
ever I committed any folly that she thought would be
diverting to her majesty.


GULLIVER'S ESCAPE
By Jonathan Swift
IHAD always a strong impulse that I should some-
time recover my liberty, though it was impossible to
conjecture by what means, or to form any project with
the least hope of succeeding. The ship in which I sailed
was the first ever known to be driven within sight of
that coast, and the king had given strict orders that if
at any time another appeared, it should be taken ashore,
and with all its crew and passengers brought in a tum-
bril to Lorbrulgrud. I was indeed treated with much
kindness; I was the favorite of a great king and queen,
and the delight of the whole court; but it was upon such
a foot as ill became the dignity of humankind. I could
never forget those domestic pledges I had left behind me.
I wanted to be among people with whom I could con-
verse upon even terms, and walk about the streets and
fields without being afraid of being trod to death like a
frog or a young puppy. But my deliverance came sooner
than I expected, and in a manner not very common; the
whole story and circumstances of which I shall faithfully
relate.
I had now been two years in this country, and about
the beginning of the third, Glumdalclitch and I attended
the king and queen in a progress to the south coast of
the kingdom. I was carried as usual in my traveling
189


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
box, which, as I have already described, was a very con-
venient closet of twelve feet wide. And I had ordered
a hammock to be fixed by silken ropes from the four
corners at the top, to break the jolts when a servant
carried me before him on horseback, as I sometimes
desired; and would often sleep in my hammock, while
we were upon the road. On the roof of my closet, not
directly over the middle of the hammock, I ordered the
joiner to cut out a hole of a foot square, to give me air in
hot weather as I slept; which hole I shut at pleasure,
with a board that drew backwards and forwards through
a groove.
When we came to our journey's end, the king thought
proper to pass a few days at a palace he hath near Flan-
flasnic, a city within eighteen English miles of the sea-
side. Glumdalclitch and I were much fatigued, — I
had gotten a small cold, but the poor girl was so ill as to
be confined to her chamber. I longed to see the ocean,
which must be the only scene of my escape, if ever it
should happen. I pretended to be worse than I really
was, and desired leave to take the fresh air of the sea,
with a page I was very fond of, and who had sometimes
been trusted with me. I shall never forget with what
unwillingness Glumdalclitch consented, nor the strict
charge she gave the page to be careful of me, bursting
at the same time into a flood of tears, as if she had some
foreboding of what was to happen. The boy took me
out in my box, about half an hour's walk from the palace
towards the rocks on the seashore. I ordered him to set
me down, and, lifting up one of my sashes, cast many a
wistful, melancholy look towards the sea. I found my-
190


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
all on a sudden felt myself falling perpendicularly down,
for above a minute, but with such incredible swiftness
that I almost lost my breath. My fall was stopped by
a terrible squash, that sounded louder to my ears than
the cataract of Niagara; after which I was quite in the
dark for another minute, and then my box began to rise
so high that I could see light from the tops of the
windows. I now perceived that I was fallen into the
sea. My box, by the weight of my body, the goods that
were in, and the broad plates of iron fixed for strength
at the four corners of the top and bottom, floated above
five feet deep in water. I did then and do now suppose,
that the eagle which flew away with my box was pur-
sued by two or three others, and forced to let me drop,
while he was defending himself against the rest, who
hoped to share in the prey. The plates of iron fastened
at the bottom of the box (for those were the strongest)
preserved the balance while it fell, and hindered it from
being broken on the surface of the water. Every joint
of it was well grooved; and the door did not move on
hinges, but up and down like a sash, which kept my
closet so tight that very little water came in. I got with
much difficulty out of my hammock, having first ven-
tured to draw back the slipboard on the roof already
mentioned, contrived on purpose to let in air, for want
of which I found myself almost stifled.
How often did I then wish myself with my dear
Glumdalclitch, from whom one single hour had so far
divided me! And I may say with truth that in the midst
of my own misfortunes I could not forbear lamenting my
poor nurse, the grief she would suffer for my loss, the
192


GULLIVER'S ESCAPE
displeasure of the queen, and the ruin of her fortune.
Perhaps not many travelers have been under greater
difficulties and distress than I was at this juncture, ex-
pecting every moment to see my box dashed in pieces, or
at least overset by the first violent blast, or a rising wave.
A breach in one single pane of glass would have been
immediate death: nor could anything have preserved the
windows but the strong lattice wires placed on the out-
side, against accidents in traveling. I saw the water ooze
in at several crannies, although the leaks were not con-
siderable, and I endeavored to stop them as well as I
could. I was not able to lift up the roof of my closet,
which otherwise I certainly should have done, and sat on
the top of it; where I might at least preserve myself some
hours longer than by being shut up (as I may call it) in
the hold. Or if I escaped these dangers for a day or two,
what could I expect but a miserable death of cold and
hunger? I was four hours under these circumstances,
expecting, and indeed wishing, every moment to be my
last.
I have already told the reader that there were two
strong staples fixed upon that side of my box which had
no window; and into which the servant who used to
carry me on horseback would put a leathern belt, and
buckle it about his waist. Being in this disconsolate
state, I heard, or at least thought I heard, some kind
of grating noise on that side of my box where the staples
were fixed; and soon after I began to fancy that the box
was pulled or towed along in the sea; for I now and then
felt a sort of tugging, which made the waves rise near
the tops of my windows, leaving me almost in the dark.
193


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
This gave me some faint hopes of relief, although I was
not able to imagine how it could be brought about. I
ventured to unscrew one of my chairs, which were always
fastened to the floor; and having made a hard shift to
screw it down again, directly under the slipping board
that I had lately opened, I mounted on the chair, and
putting my mouth as near as I could to the hole, I called
for help in a loud voice, and in all the languages I un-
derstood. I then fastened my handkerchief to a stick
I usually carried, and, thrusting it up the hole, waved
it several times in the air, that if any boat or ship were
near, the seamen might conjecture some unhappy mortal
to be shut up in the box.
I found no effect from all I could do, but plainly per-
ceived my closet to be moved along; and in the space of
an hour, or better, that side of the box where the staples
were, and had no windows, struck against something that
was hard. I apprehended it to be a rock, and found my-
self tossed more than ever. I plainly he,ard a noise upon
the cover of my closet, like that of a cable, and the grating
of it as it passed through the ring. I then found myself
hoisted up, by degrees, at least three feet higher than I
was before. Whereupon I again thrust up my stick and
handkerchief, calling for help till I was almost hoarse.
In return to which, I heard a great shout repeated three
times, giving me such transports of joy as are not to be
conceived but by those who feel them. I now heard a
trampling over my head, and somebody calling through
the hole with a loud voice, in the English tongue, If there
be anybody below, let them speak. I answered, I was an
Englishman, drawn by ill fortune into the greatest cal-
194


GULLIVER'S ESCAPE
amity that ever any creature underwent, and begged, by
all that was moving, to be delivered out of the dungeon I
was in. The voice replied, I was safe, for my box was
fastened to their ship; and the carpenter should imme-
diately come and saw a hole in the cover, large enough to
pull me out. I answered that was needless, and would
take up too much time; for there was no more to be done
but let one of the crew put his finger into the ring, and
take the box out of the sea into the ship, and so into the
captain's cabin. Some of them, upon hearing me talk
so wildly, thought I was mad; others laughed; for indeed
it never came into my head that I was now got among
people of my own stature and strength. The carpenter
came, and in a few minutes sawed a passage about four
feet square, then let down a small ladder, upon which I
mounted, and from thence was taken into the ship in a
very weak condition.
The sailors were all in amazement, and asked me a
thousand questions, which I had no inclination to an-
swer. I was equally confounded at the sight of so many
pygmies, for such I took them to be, after having so long
accustomed mine eyes to the monstrous objects I had
left. But the captain, Mr. Thomas Wilcocks, an honest,
worthy Shropshire man, observing I was ready to faint,
took me into his cabin, gave me a cordial to comfort me,
and made me turn in upon his own bed, advising me to
take a little rest, of which I had great need. Before I
went to sleep, I gave him to understand that I had valu-
able furniture in my box, too good to be lost: a fine ham-
mock, an handsome field bed, two chairs, a table, and a
cabinet; that my closet was hung on all sides, or rather
195


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
quilted, with silk and cotton; that if he would let one of
the crew bring my closet into his cabin, I would open it
there before him, and show him my goods. The captain,
hearing me utter these absurdities, concluded I was rav-
ing; however (I suppose to pacify me), he promised to
give order as I desired, and going upon deck sent some
of his men down into my closet, from whence (as I after-
wards found), they drew up all my goods, and stripped
off the quilting; but the chairs, cabinet, and bedstead,
being screwed to the floor, were much damaged by the
ignorance of the seamen, who tore them up by force.
Then they knocked off some of the boards for the use of
'the ship, and when they had got all they had a mind for,
let the hulk drop into the sea, which, by reason of many
breaches made in the bottom and sides, sunk to rights.
And indeed I was glad not to have been a spectator of the
havoc they made; because I am confident it would have
sensibly touched me, by bringing former passages into
my mind which I had rather forget.
I slept some hours, but perpetually disturbed with
dreams of the place I had left and the dangers I had
escaped. However, upon waking, I found myself much
recovered. It was now about eight o'clock at. night, and
the captain ordered supper immediately, thinking I had
already fasted too long. He entertained me with great
kindness, observing me not to look wildly, or talk incon-
sistently; and, when we were left alone, desired I would
give him a relation of my travels, and by what accident I
came to be set adrift in that monstrous wooden chest.
He said that about twelve o'clock at noon, as he was
looking through his glass, he espied it at a distance, and
196


GULLIVER'S ESCAPE
thought it was a sail, which he had a mind to make,
being not much out of his course, in hopes of buying
some biscuit, his own beginning to fall short. That upon
coming nearer, and finding his error, he sent out his
longboat, to discover what I was; that his men came
back in a fright, swearing they had seen a swimming
house. That he laughed at their folly, and went him-
self in the boat, ordering his men to take a strong cable
along with them. That the weather being calm, he rowed
round me several times, observed my windows and the
wire lattices that defended them. That he discovered
two staples upon one side, which was all of boards, with-
out any passage for light. He then commanded his men
to row up to that side, and, fastening a cable to one of the
staples, ordered them to tow my chest (as they called it)
toward the ship. When it was there, he gave directions
to fasten another cable to the ring fixed in the cover, and
to raise up my chest with pulleys, which all the sailors
were not able to do above two or three feet. He said they
saw my stick and handkerchief thrust out of the hole,
and concluded that some unhappy man must be shut up
in the cavity. I asked whether he or the crew had seen
any prodigious bird in the air, about the time he first
discovered me? To which he answered that, discoursing
this matter with the sailors while I was asleep, one of
them said he had observed three eagles flying towards the
north, but remarked nothing of their being larger than
the usual size; which I suppose must be imputed to the
great height they were at; and he could not guess the
reason of my question. I then asked the captain how far
he reckoned we might be from land. He said, by the
197


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
best computation he could make, we were at least an
hundred leagues. I assured him that he must be mis-
taken by almost half, for I had not left the country from
whence I came above two hours before I dropped into
the sea. Whereupon he began again to think that my
brain was disturbed, of which he gave me a hint, and
advised me to go to bed in a cabin he had provided. I
assured him I was well refreshed with his good enter-
tainment and company, and as much in my senses as
ever I was in my life. He then grew serious, and desired
to ask me freely, whether I were not troubled in my mind
by the consciousness of some enormous crime, for which
I was punished, at the command of some prince, by ex-
posing me in that chest; as great criminals, in other coun-
tries, have been forced to sea in a leaky vessel, without
provisions; for although he should be sorry to have taken
so ill a man into his ship, yet he would engage his word
to set me safe ashore, in the first port where we arrived.
He added that his suspicions were much increased by
some very absurd speeches I had delivered at first to the
sailors, and afterwards to himself, in relation to my closet
or chest, as well as by my odd looks and behavior while I
was at supper.
I begged his patience to hear me tell my story, which I
faithfully did, from the last time I left England to the
moment he first discovered me. And as truth always
forceth its way into rational minds, so this honest, worthy
gentleman, who had some tincture of learning, and very
good sense, was immediately convinced of my candor
and veracity. But, further to confirm all I had said, I
entreated him to give order that my cabinet should be
198


GULLIVER'S ESCAPE
brought, of which I had the key in my pocket (for he had
already informed me how the seamen disposed of my
closet). I opened it in his own presence, and showed
him the small collection of rarities I made in the country
from whence I had been so strangely delivered. There
was the comb I had contrived out of the stumps of the
king's beard, and another of the same materials, but
fixed into a paring of her majesty's thumb-nail, which
served for the back. There was a collection of needles
and pins, from a foot to half a yard long; four wasp
stings, like joiners' tacks; some combings of the queen's
hair; a gold ring which one day she made me a present of,
in a most obliging manner, taking it from her little fin-
ger and throwing it over my head like a collar. I desired
the captain would please to accept this ring in return of
his civilities; which he absolutely refused. I showed him
a corn that I had cut off, with my own hand, from a
maid of honor's toe; it was about the bigness of a Kent-
ish pippin, and grown so hard that when I returned to
England I got it hollowed into a cup, and set in sil-
ver. Lastly, I desired him to see the breeches I had then
on, which were made of a mouse's skin.
I could force nothing on him but a footman's tooth,
which I observed him to examine with great curiosity,
and found he had a fancy for it. He received it with
abundance of thanks, more than such a trifle could
deserve. It was drawn by an unskillful surgeon, in a
mistake, from one of Glumdalclitch's men, who was
afflicted with the toothache, but it was as sound as any
in his head. I got it cleaned, and put it into my cabinet.
It was about a foot long, and four inches in diameter.
199


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
The captain was very well satisfied with this plain
relation I had given him, and said he hoped, when we
returned to England, I would oblige the world by putting
it in paper, and making it public. My answer was that
I thought we were already overstocked with books of
travels; that nothing could now pass which was not
extraordinary; wherein I doubted some authors less con-
sulted truth than their own vanity, or interest, or the
diversion of ignorant readers; that my story could con-
tain little besides common events, without those orna-
mental descriptions of strange plants, trees, birds, and
other animals, or of the barbarous customs and idolatry
of savage people, with which most writers abound. How-
ever, I thanked him for his good opinion, and promised
to take the matter into my thoughts.
He said he wondered at one thing very much, which
was to hear me speak so loud; asking me whether the
king or queen of that country were thick of hearing.
I told him it was what I had been used to for above two
years past, and that I admired as much at the voices of
him and his men, who seemed to me only to whisper, and
yet I could hear them well enough. But, when I spoke
in that country, it* was like a man talking in the street to
another looking out from the top of a steeple, unless
when I was placed on a table, or held in any person's
hand. I told him I had likewise observed another thing,
that when I first got into the ship, and the sailors stood
all about me, I thought they were the most little, con-
temptible creatures I had ever beheld. For, indeed,
while I was in that prince's country, I could never endure
to look in a glass after mine eyes had been accustomed
200


GULLIVER'S ESCAPE
to such prodigious objects, because the comparison gave
me so despicable a conceit of myself. The captain said
that while we were at supper he observed me to look at
everything with a sort of wonder, and that I often seemed
hardly able to contain my laughter, which he knew not
well how to take, but imputed it to some disorder in my
brain. I answered it was very true; and I wondered how
I could forbear, when I saw his dishes of the size of a
silver three-pence, a leg of pork hardly a mouthful, a cup
not so big as a nutshell; and so I went on, describing the
rest of his household stuff and provisions after the same
manner. For, although the queen had ordered a little
equipage of all things necessary while I was in herservice,
yet my ideas were wholly taken up with what I saw on
every side of me, and I winked at my own littleness as
people do at their own faults. The captain understood
my raillery very well, and merrily replied with the old
English proverb, that he doubted mine eyes were bigger
than my belly, for he did not observe my stomach so
good, although I had fasted all day; and, continuing
in his mirth, protested he would have gladly given an
hundred pounds to have seen my closet in the eagle's
bill, and afterwards in its fall from so great a height into
the sea; which would certainly have been a most aston-
ishing object, worthy to have the description of it trans-
mitted to future ages; and the comparison of Phae'thon
was so obvious, that he could not forbear applying it,
although I did not much admire the conceit.
The captain, having been at Tonquin, was, in his
return to England, driven northeastward to the latitude
of 44 degrees, and of longitude 143. But meeting a
201


GULLIVER'S TRAVELS
trade wind two days after I came on board him, we
sailed southward a long time, and coasting New Holland
kept our course west-southwest, and then south-south-
west, till we doubled the Cape of Good Hope. Our
voyage was very prosperous, but I shall not trouble the
reader with a journal of it. The captain called in at one
or two ports, and sent in his longboat for provisions and
fresh water; but I never went out of the ship till we came
into the Downs, which was on the third day of June,
1706, about nine months after my escape. I offered to
leave my goods in security for payment of my freight, but
the captain protested he would not receive one farthing.
We took a kind leave of each other, and I made him
promise he would come to see me at my house in Red-
riff. I hired a horse and guide for five shillings, which I
borrowed of the captain.
As I was on the road, observing the littleness of the
houses, the trees, the cattle, and the people, I began to
think myself in Lilliput. I was afraid of trampling on
every traveler I met, and often called aloud to have
them stand out of the way, so that I had like to have
gotten one or two broken heads for my impertinence.
When I came to my own house, for which I was
forced to inquire, one of the servants opening the door,
I bent down to go in (like a goose under a gate), for
fear of striking my head. My wife ran out to embrace
me, but I stooped lower than her knees, thinking she
could otherwise never be able to reach my mouth. My
daughter kneeled to ask my blessing, but I could not see
her till she arose, having been so long used to stand with
my head and eyes erect to above sixty feet; and then I
202


GULLIVER'S ESCAPE
went to take her up with one hand by the waist. I
looked down upon the servants, and one or two friends
who were in the house, as if they had been pygmies, and
I a giant. I told my wife she had been too thrifty, for I
found she had starved herself and her daughter to
nothing. In short, I behaved myself so unaccountably
that they were all of the captain's opinion when he first
saw me, and concluded I had lost my wits. This I
mention as an instance of the great power of habit and
prejudice.
In a little time, I and my family and friends came to
a right understanding; but my wife protested I should
never go to sea any more; although my evil destiny so
ordered that she had not power to hinder me, as the
reader may know hereafter. In the meantime, I here
conclude the Second Part of my unfortunate Voyages.





DON QUIXOTE





DON QUIXOTE DETERMINES TO
BECOME A KNIGHT
By Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra
AT a certain village in La Mancha, of which I cannot
remember the name, there lived not long ago one
of those old-fashioned gentlemen who are never without
a lance upon a rack, an old target, a lean horse, and a
greyhound. His diet consisted more of beef than mutton;
and with minced meat on most nights, lentils on Fridays,
griefs and groans on Saturdays, and a pigeon extra-
ordinary on Sundays, he consumed three quarters of his
revenue; the rest was laid out in a plush coat, velvet
breeches, with slippers of the same, for holidays; and a
suit of the very best homespun cloth, which he bestowed
on himself for working days. His whole family was a
housekeeper something turned of forty, a niece not
twenty, and a man that served him in the house and
in the field, and could saddle a horse, and handle the
pruning hook. The master himself was nigh fifty years
of age, of a hale and strong complexion, lean-bodied
and thin-faced, an early riser, and a lover of hunting.
Some say his surname was Quixada, or Quesada (for
authors differ in this particular); however, we may
reasonably conjecture he was called Quixana; though
this concerns us but little, provided we keep strictly to
the truth in every point of this history.
207


DON QUIXOTE
You must know, then, that when our gentleman had
nothing to do (which was almost all the year round), he
passed his time in reading books of knight-errantry,
which he did with that application and delight, that at
last he in a manner wholly left off his country sports, and
even the care of his estate; nay, he grew.so strangely
besotted with these amusements that he sold many acres
of arable land to purchase books of that kind, by which
means he collected as many of them as were to be had;
but, among them all, none pleased him like the works of
the famous Feliciano de Sylva; for the clearness of his
prose and those intricate expressions with which it is
interlaced, seemed to him so many pearls of eloquence,
especially when he came to read the challenges, and the
amorous addresses, many of them in this extraordinary
style: "The reason of your unreasonable usage of my
reason does so enfeeble my reason that I have reason to
expostulate with your beauty." And this: "The sublime
heavens, which with your divinity divinely fortify you
with the stars, and fix you the deserver of the desert
that is deserved by your grandeur." These, and such
like expressions, strangely puzzled the poor gentleman's
understanding, while he was breaking his brain to un-
ravel their meaning, which Aristotle himself could never
have found, though he should have been raised from the
dead for that very purpose.
He did not so well like those dreadful wounds which
Don Belianis gave and received; for he considered that
all the art of surgery could never secure his face and
body from being strangely disfigured with scars. How-
ever, he highly commended the author for concluding
208


DETERMINES TO BECOME A KNIGHT
his book with a promise to finish that unfinishable
adventure; and many times he had a desire to put pen
to paper, and faithfully and literally finish it himself;
which he had certainly done, and doubtless with good
success, had not his thoughts been wholly engrossed in
much more important designs.
He would often dispute with the curate of the parish,
a man of learning, that had taken his degrees at Gigu-
enza, who was the better knight, Palmerin of England
or Amadis de Gaul; but Master Nicholas, the barber of
the same town, would say, that none of them could com-
pare with the Knight of the Sun; and that if any one
came near him, it was certainly Don Galaor, the brother
of Amadis de Gaul; for he was a man of a most com-
modious temper, neither was he so finical nor such a
puling, whining lover as his brother; and as for courage,
he was not a jot behind him.
In fine, he gave himself up so wholly to the reading of
romances, that at nights he would pore on until it was
day, and by day he would read on until it was night; and
thus by sleeping little and reading much, the moisture
of his brain was exhausted to that degree that at last
he lost the use of his reason. A world of disorderly
notions, picked out of his books, crowded into his imagi-
nation; and now his head was full of nothing but enchant-
ments, quarrels, battles, challenges, wounds, complaints,
amours, torments, and abundance of stuff and impos-
sibilities; insomuch that all the fables and fantastical
tales which he read, seemed to him now as true as the
most authentic histories. He would say, that the Cid
Ruy Diaz was a very brave knight, but not worthy to
209


DON QUIXOTE
stand in competition with the Knight of the Burning-
sword, who, with a single backstroke, had cut in sunder
two fierce and mighty giants. He liked yet better Ber-
nardo del Carpio, who, at Roncesvalles, deprived of life
the enchanted Orlando, having lifted him from the
ground, and choked him in the air, as Hercules did
Antaeus, the son of the Earth.
As for the giant Morgante, he always spoke very civil
things of him; for though he was one of that monstrous
brood who ever were intolerably proud and brutish, he
still behaved himself like a civil and well-bred person.
But of all men in the world he admired Rinaldo of
Montalban, and particularly his sallying out of his castle
to rob all he met; and then again when abroad he carried
away the idol of Mahomet, which was all massy gold, as
the history says; but he so hated that traitor Galalon,
that for the pleasure of kicking him handsomely, he
would have given up his housekeeper; nay, and his niece
into the bargain.
Having thus lost his understanding, he unluckily
stumbled upon the oddest fancy that ever entered into a
madman's brain; for now he thought it convenient and
necessary, as well for the increase of his own honor as
the service of the public, to turn knight-errant, and roam
through the whole world, armed cap-a-pie, and mounted
on his steed, in quest of adventures; that thus imitating
those knights-errant of whom he had read, and following
their course of life, redressing all manner of grievances,
and exposing himself to danger on all occasions, at last,
after a happy conclusion of his enterprises, he might
purchase everlasting honor and renown. Transported
210


DETERMINES TO BECOME A KNIGHT
with these agreeable delusions, the poor gentleman al-
ready grasped in imagination the imperial sceptre of
Trebizond, and, hurried away by his mighty expecta-
tions, he prepares with all expedition to take the field.
The first thing he did was to scour a suit of armor that
had belonged to his great-grandfather, and had lain time
out of mind carelessly rusting in a corner; but when he
had cleaned and repaired it as well as he could, he per-
ceived there was a material piece wanting; for, instead of
a complete helmet, there was only a single headpiece.
However, his industry supplied that defect; for with some
pasteboard he made a kind of half-beaver, or vizor,
which, being fitted to the headpiece, made it look like
an entire helmet. Then, to know whether it were cutlass-
proof, he drew his sword, and tried its edge upon the
pasteboard vizor; but with the very first stroke he un-
luckily undid in a moment what he had been a whole
week a-doing. He did not like its being broken with so
much ease, and therefore, to secure it from the like acci-
dent, he made it anew, and fenced it with thin plates of
iron, which he fixed on the inside of it so artificially that
at last he had reason to be satisfied with the solidity of
the work; and so, without any further experiment, he
resolved it should pass to all intents and purposes for a
full and sufficient helmet.
It was time to look to his horse, who had more false
quarter than real, being a worse jade than Gonela's, qui
tantum pellis et ossa juit; however, his master thought
that neither Alexander's Bucephalus nor the Cid's
Babieca could be compared with him. He was four
days considering what name to give him; for, as he
211


DON QUIXOTE
argued with himself, there was no reason that a horse
bestrid by so famous a knight, and withal so excellent
in himself, should not be distinguished by a particular
name; and therefore he studied to give him such a one
as should demonstrate as well what kind of horse he had
been before his master was a knight-errant, as what he
was now; thinking it but just, since the owner changed
his profession, that the horse should also change his
title, and be dignified with another; a good big word,
such a one as should fill the mouth, and seem consonant
with the quality and profession of his master. And thus,
after many names which he devised, rejected, changed,
liked, disliked, and pitched upon again, he concluded to
call him Rozinante; a name, in his opinion, lofty, sound-
ing, and significant of what he had been before, and also
of what he was now; in a word, a horse before, or above,
all the vulgar breed of horses in the world.
When he had thus given his horse a name so much to
his satisfaction, he thought of choosing one for himself;
and having seriously pondered on the matter eight whole
days more, at last he determined to call himself Don
Quixote. Whence the author of this most authentic
history draws this inference, that his right name was
Quixada, and not Quesada, as others would maintain.
And observing that the valiant Amadis, not satisfied
with the bare appellation of Amadis, added to it the
name of his country, that it might grow more famous by
his exploits, and so styled himself Amadis de Gaul; so
he, like a true lover of his native soil, resolved to call
himself Don Quixote de la Mancha; which addition, to
his thinking, denoted very plainly his parentage and
212


DETERMINES TO BECOME A KNIGHT
country, and consequently would fix a lasting honor on
that part of the world.
And now, his armor being scoured, his headpiece
improved to a helmet, his horse and himself new named,
he perceived he wanted nothing but a lady, on whom he
might bestow the empire of his heart; for he was sensible
that a knight-errant without a mistress was a tree with-
out either fruit or leaves, and a body without a soul.
Should I, said he to himself, by good or ill fortune,
chance to encounter some giant, as is common in knight-
errantry, and happen to lay him prostrate on the ground,
transfixed with my lance, or cleft in two, or, in short,
overcome him and have him at my mercy, would it not
be proper to have some lady to whom I may send him
as a trophy of my valor? Then when he comes into her
presence, throwing himself at her feet, he may thus
make his humble submission: "Lady, I am the giant
Caraculiambro, lord of the island of Malindrania, van-
quished in single combat by that never-deservedly-
enough-extolled knight-errant Don Quixote de la Man-
cha, who has commanded me to cast myself most humbly
at your feet, that it may please your honor to dispose of
me according to your will." Oh! how elevated was the
knight with the conceit of this imaginary submission of
the giant; especially having withal bethought himself of a
person on whom he might confer the title of his mistress!
which, it is believed happened thus: Near the place
where he lived dwelt a good likely country lass, for whom
he had formerly had a sort of an inclination, though, it
is believed, she never heard of it, nor regarded it in the
least. Her name was Aldonza Lorenzo, and this was
213


DON QUIXOTE
she whom he thought he might entitle to the sovereingty
of his heart; upon which he studied to find her out a new
name, that might have some affinity with her old one,
and yet at the same time sound somewhat like that of a
princess or lady of quality; so at last he resolved to call
her Dulcinea, with the addition of del Toboso, from the
place where she was born; a name, in his opinion, sweet,
harmonious, extraordinary, and no less significative than
the others which he had devised.


THE FIGHT WITH THE WIND-
MILLS
By Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra
DON Quixote earnestly solicited one of his neighbors,
a country laborer, and a good honest fellow, if we
may call a poor man honest, for he was poor indeed,
poor in purse and poor in brains; and, in short, the
knight talked so long to him, plied him with so many
arguments, and made him so many fair promises, that at
last the poor clown consented to go along with him and
become his squire. Among other inducements to entice
him to do it willingly, Don Quixote forgot not to tell him
that it was likely such an adventure would present itself
as might secure him the conquest of some island in the
time that he might be picking up a straw or two, and then
the squire might promise himself to be made governor of
the place. Allured with these large promises and many
others, Sancho Panza (for that was the name of the
fellow) forsook his wife and children to be his neighbor's
squire.
This done, Don Quixote made it his business to fur-
nish himself with money; to which purpose, selling one
house, mortgaging another, and losing by all, he at last
got a pretty good sum together. He also borrowed a
target of a friend, and having patched up his headpiece
and beaver as well as he could, he gave his squire notice
215


DON QUIXOTE
of the day and hour when he intended to set out, that he
might also furnish himself with what he thought neces-
sary; but above all he charged him to provide himself
with a wallet; which Sancho promised to do, telling him
he would also take his ass along with him, which being a
very good one, might be a great ease to him, for he was
not used to travel much afoot. The mentioning of the
ass made the noble knight pause awhile; he mused and
pondered whether he had ever read of any knight-errant
whose squire used to ride upon an ass; but he could not
remember any precedent for it: however, he gave him
leave at last to bring his ass, hoping to mount him more
honorably with the first opportunity, by unhorsing the
next discourteous knight he should meet. He also fur-
nished himself with shirts and as many other necessaries
as he could conveniently carry, according to the inn-
keeper's injunctions. Which being done, Sancho Panza,
without bidding either his wife or children good-by, and
Don Quixote, without taking any more notice of his
housekeeper or of his niece, stole out of the village one
night, not so much as suspected by anybody, and made
such haste that by break of day they thought themselves
out of reach, should they happen to be pursued. As for
Sancho Panza, he rode like a patriarch, with his canvas
knapsack, or wallet, and his leathern bottle, having a
huge desire to see himself governor of the island, which
his master had promised him.
Don Quixote happened to strike into the same road
which he took the time before, that is, the plains of
Montiel, over which he traveled with less inconveniency
than when he went alone, by reason it was yet early in
216'


THE FIGHT WITH THE WINDMILLS
the morning; at which time the rays of the sun, striking
obliquely upon them, did not prove so offensive.
As they jogged on, "I beseech your worship, Sir
Knight-errant," quoth Sancho to his master, "be sure
you don't forget what you promised me about the island;
for I dare say I shall make shift to govern it, let it be
never so big." —"Yo\i must know, friend Sancho,"
replied Don Quixote, "that it has been the constant
practice of knights-errant in former ages to make their
squires governors of the islands or kingdoms they con-
quered. Now I am not only resolved to keep up that
laudable custom, but even to improve it, and outdo my
predecessors in generosity; for whereas sometimes, or
rather most commonly, other knights delayed rewarding
their squires till they were grown old, and worn out with
services, bad days, worse nights, and all manner of hard
duty, and then put them off with some title, either of
count, or at least marquis of some valley or province, of
great or small extent; now, if thou and I do but live, it
may happen that before we have passed six days together
I may conquer some kingdom, having many other king-
doms annexed to its imperial crown; and this would fall
out most luckily for thee; for then would I presently
crown thee king of one of them. Nor do thou imagine
this to be a mighty matter; for so strange accidents and
revolutions, so sudden and so unforeseen, attend the pro-
fession of chivalry, that I might easily give thee a great
deal more than I have promised." — " Why, should this
come to pass," quoth Sancho Panza, "and I be made a
king by some such miracle, as your worship says, then
Joan Gutierez (my mis'ess) would be at least a queen,
217


DON QUIXOTE
and my children infantas." — "Who doubts of that?"
cried Don Quixote. "I doubt of it," replied Sancho
Panza; "for I cannot help believing, that though it
should rain kingdoms down upon the face of the earth,
not one of them would sit well upon Mary Gutierez's
head; for I must needs tell you, she's not worth two brass
jacks to make a queen of: no, countess would be better
for her, an't please you; and that too, God help her,
will be as much as she can handsomely manage." —
"Recommend the matter to Providence," returned Don
Quixote, "'t will be sure to give what is most expedient
for thee; but yet disdain to entertain inferior thoughts,
and be not tempted to accept less than the dignity of a
viceroy." — "No more I won't, sir," quoth Sancho,
"especially since I have so rare a master as your wor-
ship, who will take care to give me whatever may be fit
forme, and what I may be able to deal with."
As they were thus discoursing, they discovered some
thirty or forty windmills that are in that plain; and as
soon as the knight had spied them, "Fortune," cried he,
"directs our affairs better than we ourselves could have
wished: look yonder, friend Sancho, there are at least
thirty outrageous giants, whom I intend to encounter;
and having deprived them of life, we will begin to enrich
ourselves with their spoils; for they are lawful prize; and
the extirpation of that cursed brood will be an acceptable
service to Heaven." — "What giants?" quoth Sancho
Panza. "Those whom thou seest yonder," answered
Don Quixote, "with their long extended arms; some of
that detested race have arms of so immense a size, that
sometimes they reach two leagues in length." — "Pray
218


THE FIGHT WITH THE WINDMILLS
look better, sir," quoth Sancho;" those things yonder are
no giants, but windmills, and the arms you fancy, are
their sails, which being whirled about by the wind, make
the mill go." "'Tis a sign," cried Don Quixote, "thou
art but little acquainted with adventures! I tell thee,
they are giants; and therefore if thou art afraid, go aside
and say thy prayers, for I am resolved to engage in a
dreadful unequal combat against them all." This said,
he clapt spurs to his horse Rozinante, without giving ear
to his squire Sancho, who bawled out to him, and assured
him that they were windmills, and no giants. But he
was so fully possessed with a strong conceit of the con-
trary, that he did not so much as hear his squire's outcry,
nor was he sensible of what they were, although he was
already very near them; far from that:" Stand, cowards,"
cried he as loud as he could;" stand your ground, ignoble
creatures, and fly not basely from a single knight, who
dares encounter you all!" At the same time, the wind
rising, the mill-sails began to move, which when Don
Quixote spied, "Base miscreants," cried he, "though
you move more arms than the giant Briareus, you shall
pay for your arrogance." He most devoutly recom-
mended himself to his Lady Dulcinea, imploring her
assistance in this perilous adventure; and so covering
himself with his shield, and couching his lance, he rushed
with Rozinante's utmost speed upon the first windmill he
could come at, and running his lance into the sail, the
wind whirled it about with such swiftness, that the rap-
idity of the motion presently broke the lance into shivers,
and hurled away both knight and horse along with it, till
down he fell, rolling a good way off in the field. Sancho
219


DON QUIXOTE
Panza ran as fast as his ass could drive to help his master,
whom he found lying, and not able to stir, such a blow
had he and Rozinante received. "Mercy o' me!" cried
Sancho, "did not I give your worship fair warning ? Did
not I tell you they were windmills, and that nobody
could think otherwise, unless he had also windmills in
his head ?" — " Peace, friend Sancho," replied Don
Quixote: "there is nothing so subject to the inconstancy
of fortune as war. I am verily persuaded that cursed
necromancer Freston, who carried away my study and
my books, has transformed these giants into windmills
to deprive me of the honor of the victory; such is his
inveterate malice against me; but in the end, all his
pernicious wiles and stratagems shall prove ineffectual
against the prevailing edge of my sword." — "Amen,
say I," replied Sancho. And so heaving him up again
upon his legs, once more the knight mounted poor
Rozinante, that was half shoulder-slipped with his fall.
This adventure was the subject of their discourse, as
they made the best of their way towards the pass of
Lapice, for Don Quixote took that road, believing he
could not miss of adventure in one so mightily frequented.
However, the loss of his lance was no small affliction to
him; and as he was making his complaint about it to his
squire, "I have read," said he, "friend Sancho, that a
certain Spanish knight, whose name was Diego Perez de
Vargas, having broke his sword in the heat of an engage-
ment, pulled up by the roots a huge oak tree, or at least
tore down a massy branch, and did such wonderful exe-
cution, crushing and grinding so many Moors with it
that day, that he won himself and his posterity the sur-
220



ft
COVERING HIMSELF WITH HIS SHIELD, AND COUCHING HIS LANCE,
HE RUSHED WITH ROZINANTE'S UTMOST SPEED UPON THE FIRST
WINDMILL HE COULD COMB AT, AND RUNNING HIS LANCE INTO THE
SAIL, THE WIND WHIRLED IT ABOUT WITH SUCH SWIFTNESS, THAT
THE RAPIDITY OF THE MOTION PRESENTLY BROKE THE LANCE
INTO SHIVERS, AND HURLED AWAY BOTH KNIGHT AND HORSE
ALONG WITH IT, TILL DOWN HE FELL, ROLLING A GOOD WAY OFF
IN THE FIELD. SANCHO PANZA RAN AS FAST AS HIS ASS COULD
DRIVE TO HELP HIS MASTER, WHOM HE FOUND LYING AND NOT
ABLE TO STIR, SUCH A BLOW HAD HE AND ROZINANTE RECEIVED


THE NEW YORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY
AST' .'.>. [/>.V' \< AND
T11_L.',N H/./'N'bAMONS
R L


THE FIGHT WITH THE WINDMILLS
name of The Pounder, or Bruiser. I tell thee this, be-
cause I intend to tear up the next oak or holm tree we
meet; with the trunk whereof I hope to perform such
wondrous deeds that thou wilt esteem thyself particu-
larly happy in having had the honor to behold them, and
been the ocular witness of achievements which posterity
will scarce be able to believe." — "Heaven grant you
may," cried Sancho; "I believe it all, because your wor-
ship says it. But, an't please you, sit a little more up-
right in your saddle; you ride sideling methinks; but that,
I suppose, proceeds from your being bruised by the fall."
— "It does so," replied Don Quixote; "and if I do not
complain of the pain, it is because a knight-errant must
never complain of his wounds, though his bowels were
dropping out through them." — " Then I have no more
to say," quoth Sancho; "and yet Heaven knows my
heart, I should be glad to hear your worship hone a little
now and then when something ails you: for my part, I
shall not fail to bemoan myself when I suffer the smallest
pain, unless indeed it can be proved, that the rule of not
complaining extends to the squires as well as knights."
Don Quixote could not forbear smiling at the sim-
plicity of his squire; and told him he gave him leave to
complain not only when he pleased, but as much as he
pleased, whether he had any cause or no; for he had
never yet read anything to the contrary in any books of
chivalry.


THE INNKEEPER'S BILL
master of the house, and with a grave delivery, "My lord
governor," cried he, "the favors I have received in your
castle are so great and extraordinary that they bind my
grateful soul to an eternal acknowledgment; therefore
that I may be so happy as to discharge part of the obliga-
tion, think if there be ever a proud mortal breathing on
whom you desire to be revenged for some affront or other
injury, and acquaint me with it now; and by my order of
knighthood, which binds me to protect the weak, relieve
the oppressed, and punish the bad, I promise you I 'll
take effectual care, that you shall have ample satisfac-
tion to the utmost of your wishes." — " Sir Knight," an-
swered the innkeeper, with an austere gravity, "I shall
not need your assistance to revenge any wrong that may
be offered to my person; for I would have you to under-
stand that I am able to do myself justice whenever any
man presumes to do me wrong; therefore all the satis-
faction I desire is, that you will pay your reckoning for
horse-meat and man's meat, and all your expenses in my
inn." — "How!" cried Don Quixote, "is this an inn?"
— "Yes," answered the host, "and one of the most
noted, and of the best repute upon the road." — "How
strangely have I been mistaken, then!" cried Don
Quixote; "upon my honor I took it for a castle, and a
considerable one too; but if it be an inn, and not a
castle, all I have to say is, that you must excuse me from
paying anything; for I would by no means break the
laws which we knights-errant are bound to observe; nor
was it ever known, that they ever paid in any inn what-
soever; for this is the least recompense that can be
allowed them for the intolerable labors they endure day
223


DON QUIXOTE
and night, winter and summer, on foot and on horseback,
pinched with hunger, choked with thirst, and exposed to
all the injuries of the air and all the inconveniences in
the world." — "I have nothing to do with all this," cried
the innkeeper; "pay your reckoning, and don't trouble
me with your foolish stories of a cock and a bull; I can't
afford to keep house at that rate." — "Thou art both a
fool and a knave of an innkeeper," replied Don Quixote,
and with that clapping spurs to Rozinante, and brandish-
ing his javelin at his host, he rode out of the inn without
any opposition, and got a good way from it, without so
much as once looking behind him to see whether his
squire came after him.
The knight being marched off, there remained only the
squire, who was stopped for the reckoning. However, he
swore he would not pay a cross; for the selfsame law
that acquitted the knight acquitted the squire. This
put the innkeeper into a great passion, and made him
threaten Sancho very hard, telling him if he would not
pay him by fair means, he would have him laid by
the heels that moment. Sancho swore by his master's
knighthood he would sooner part with his life than his
money on such an account; nor should the squires in
after ages ever have occasion to upbraid him with giving
so ill a precedent, or breaking their rights.
As ill luck would have it, there happened to be in the
inn four Segovia clothiers, three Cordova pointmakers,
and two Seville hucksters, all brisk, gamesome, roguish
fellows; who agreeing all in the same design, encom-
passed Sancho, and pulled him off his ass, while one of
them went and got a blanket. Then they put the un-
224


THE INNKEEPER'S BILL'
fortunate squire into it, and observing the roof of the
place they were in to be somewhat too low for their pur-
pose, they carried him into the back yard, which had no
limits but the sky, and there they tossed him for several
times together in the blanket, as they do dogs on Shrove
Tuesday. Poor Sancho made so grievous an outcry all
the while that his master heard him, and imagined those
lamentations were of some person in distress, and conse-
quently the occasion of some adventure; but having at
last distinguished the voice, he made to the inn with a
broken gallop; and finding the gates shut, he rode about
to see whether he might not find some other way to get
in. But he no sooner came to the back-yard wall, which
was none of the highest, when he was an eyewitness of
the scurvy trick that was put upon his squire. There he
saw him ascend and descend, and frolic and caper in the
air with so much nimbleness and agility, that it is thought
the knight himself could not have forborne laughing, had
he been anything less angry. He did his best to get over
the wall, but alas, he was so bruised, that he could not so
much as alight from his horse. This made him fume and
chafe, and vent his passion in a thousand threats and
curses, so strange and various that it is impossible to
repeat them. But the more he stormed, the more they
tossed and laughed; Sancho on his side begging, and
howling, and threatening, and cursing, to as little pur-
pose as his master, for it was weariness alone could make
the tossers give over. Then they charitably put an end
to his high dancing, and set him upon his ass again,
carefully wrapped in his mantle.
But Maritornes, pitying a creature in such tribulation
225


DON QUIXOTE
and thinking he had danced and tumbled enough to be
dry, was so generous as to help him to a draught of water,
which she purposely drew from the well that moment,
that it might be the cooler. Sancho clapped the pot to
his mouth, but his master made him desist. "Hold,
hold," cried he, "son Sancho, drink no water, child, it
will kill thee; behold I have here the most holy balsam,
two drops of which will cure thee effectually." — " Ha,"
replied Sancho, shaking his head, and looking sourly on
the knight with a side face, "have you again forgot that
I am no knight? Keep your brewings for yourself, in
the devil's name, and let me alone." With that he lifted
up the jug to his nose, but finding it to be mere element,
he spirted out again the little he had tasted, and desired
the wench to help him to some better liquor; so she went
and fetched him wine to make him amends, and paid for it
too out of her own pocket. As soon as Sancho had tipped
off his wine, he visited his ass's ribs twice or thrice with
his heels, and, free egress being granted him, he trooped
off, well content with the thoughts of having had his
ends, and got off scot free, though at the expense of his
shoulders, his usual sureties. It is true, the innkeeper
kept his wallet for the reckoning; but the poor squire was
so dismayed, and in such haste to be gone, that he never
missed it. The host was for shutting the inn doors after
him, for fear of the worst; but the tossers would not let
him, being a sort of fellows that would not have cared for
Don Quixote a straw, though he had really been one of
the Knights of the Round Table.


THE BATTLE OF THE SHEEP
By Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra
THEY went on discoursing, when Don Quixote, per-
ceiving a thick cloud of dust arise right before them
in the road, "The day is come," said he, turning to his
squire, "the day is come, Sancho, that shall usher in the
happiness which fortune has reserved for me; this day
shall the strength of my arm be signalized by such ex-
ploits as shall be transmitted even to the latest posterity.
Seest thou that cloud of dust, Sancho? It is raised by
a prodigious army marching this way, and composed of
an infinite number of nations." — "Why then, at this
rate," quoth Sancho, "there should be two armies; for
yonder is as great a dust on the other side." With that
Don Quixote looked, and was transported with joy at
the sight, firmly believing that two vast armies were
ready to engage each other in that plain; for his imagina-
tion was so crowded with those battles, enchantments,
surprising adventures, amorous thoughts, and other
whimsies which he had read of in romances, that his
strong fancy changed everything he saw into what he
desired to see; and thus he could not conceive that the
dust was only raised by two large flocks of sheep that
were going the same road from different parts, and could
not be discerned till they were very near; he was so
positive that they were two armies, that Sancho firmly
227


DON QUIXOTE
believed him at last. "Well, sir," quoth the squire,
"what are we to do, I beseech you ?" — " What shall we
do," replied Don Quixote, "but assist the weaker and
injured side? for know, Sancho, that the army which
now moves towards us is commanded by the great Ali-
fanfaron, emperor of the vast island of Taprobana; the
other that advances behind us is his enemy, the king of
the Garamantians, Pentapolin with the naked arm, so
called because he always enters into the battle with his
right arm bare." — " Pray, sir," quoth Sancho,"why are
these two great men going together by the ears ?" —" The
occasion of their quarrel is this," answered Don Quixote:
"Alifanfaron, a strong Pagan, is in love with Penta-
polin's daughter, a very beautiful lady and a Christian;
now her father refuses to give her in marriage to the
heathen prince, unless he abjure his false belief and em-
brace the Christian religion." — " Burn my beard," said
Sancho, "if Pentapolin be not in the right on it; I will
stand by him, and help him all I may." — "I commend
thy resolution," replied Don Quixote," it is not only law-
ful, but requisite; for there is no need of being a knight
to fight in such battles." — "I guessed as much," quoth
Sancho; "but where shall we leave my ass in the mean-
time, that I may be sure to find him again after the battle;
for I fancy you never heard of any man that ever charged
upon such a beast." —" It is true," answered Don
Quixote, "and therefore I would have thee turn him
loose, though thou wert sure never to find him again; for
we shall have so many horses after we have got the day
that even Rozinante himself will be in danger of being
changed for another."
228


DON QUIXOTE
number of others in both armies, to every one of whom
his fertile imagination assigned arms, colors, impresses,
and mottoes, as readily as if they had really been that
moment in being before his eyes. And then proceeding
without the least hesitation, "That vast body," said
he, "that is just opposite to us is composed of several
nations. There you see those who drink the pleasant
stream of the famous Xanthus; there the mountaineers
that till the Massilian fields; those that sift the pure gold
of Arabia Felix: those that inhabit the renowned and
delightful banks of Thermodon. Yonder, those who so
many ways sluice and drain the golden Pactolus for its
precious sand; the Numidians, unsteady and careless
of their promises; the Persians, excellent archers; the
Medes and Parthians, who fight flying; the Arabs, who
have no fixed habitations; the Scythians, cruel and
savage, though fair-complexioned; the sooty Ethiopi-
ans, that bore their lips; and a thousand other nations
whose countenances I know, though I have forgotten
their names. On the other side come those whose coun-
try is watered with the crystal streams of Betis, shaded
with olive trees; those who bathe their limbs in the rich
flood of the golden Tagus; those whose mansions are
laved by the profitable stream of the divine Genii;
those who range the verdant Tartesian meadows;
those who indulge their luxurious temper in the deli-
cious pastures of Xerez; the wealthy inhabitants of La
Mancha, crowned with golden ears of corn; the ancient
offspring of the Goths, cased in iron; those who wanton
in the lazy current of Pisuerga; those who feed their
numerous flocks in the ample plains where the Gua-
230


THE BATTLE OF THE SHEEP
diana, so celebrated for its hidden course, pursues its
wandering race; those who shiver with extremity of
cold on the woody Pyrenean hills or on the hoary tops
of the snowy Apennines, — in a word, all that Europe
includes within its spacious bounds, half a world in an
army." It is scarce to be imagined how many countries
he had run over, how many nations he enumerated, dis-
tinguishing every one by what is peculiar to them, with
an incredible vivacity of mind, and that still in the puffy
style of his fabulous books.
Sancho listened to all this romantic muster-roll as
mute as a fish, with amazement; all that he could do was
now and then to turn his head on this side and the other
side, to see if he could discern the knights and giants
whom his master named. But at length, not being able
to discover any, " Why," cried he, "you had as good tell
me it snows; the devil of any knight, giant, or man can I
see, of all those you talk of now; who knows but all
this may be witchcraft and spirits, like yesternight?"
— "How," replied Don Quixote; "dost thou not hear
their horses neigh, their trumpets sound, and their
drums beat?" — "Not I," quoth Sancho, "I prick up
my ears like a sow in the beans, and yet I can hear
nothing but the bleating of sheep." Sancho might justly
say so indeed, for by this time the two flocks were got
very near them. "Thy fears disturb thy senses," said
Don Quixote, " and hinder thee from hearing and seeing
right; but it is no matter; withdraw to some place of
safety,-since thou art so terrified; for I alone am sufficient
to give the victory to that side which I shall favor with
my assistance." With that he couched his lance, clapped
231


DON QUIXOTE
spurs to Rozinante, and rushed like a thunderbolt from
the hillock into the plain. Sancho bawled after him
as loud as he could. "Hold, sir!" cried Sancho; "for
heaven's sake come back! What do you mean ? as sure
as I am a sinner those you are going to maul are no-
thing but poor harmless sheep. Come back, I say. Woe
to him that begot me! Are you mad, sir? there are
no giants, no knights, no cats, no asparagus gardens,
no golden quarters nor what-d'-ye-call-thems. Does the
devil possess you? you are leaping over the hedge before
you come at the stile. You are taking the wrong sow by
the ear. Oh, that I was ever born to see this day!"
But Don Quixote still riding on, deaf and lost to good
advice, out-roared his expostulating squire. "Courage,
brave knights!" cried he; "march up, fall on, all you
who fight under the standard of the valiant Pentapolin
with the naked arm; follow me, and you shall see how
easily I will revenge him on that infidel Alifanfaron of
Taprobana."
So saying, he charged into the midst of the squadron
of sheep and commenced to spear them with his lance
with as much gallantry and resolution as if he were
verily engaging with his mortal enemies.
The shepherds and drovers, seeing their sheep go to
wreck, called out to him; till finding fair means ineffec-
tual, they unloosed their slings, and began to ply him with
stones as big as their fists. But the champion, disdain-
ing such a distant war, spite of their showers of stones
rushed among the routed sheep, trampling both the liv-
ing and the slain in a most terrible manner, impatient to
meet the general of the enemy, and end the war at once.
232


THE BATTLE OF THE SHEEP
"Where, where art thou?" cried he, "proud Alifan-
faron? Appear! See here a single knight who seeks
thee everywhere, to try now, hand to hand, the boasted
force of thy strenuous arm, and deprive thee of life, as
a due punishment for the unjust war which thou hast
audaciously waged with the valiant Pentapolin." Just
as he had said this, while the stones flew about his ears,
one unluckily hit upon his small ribs, and had like to
have buried two of the shortest deep in the middle of his
body.
The knight thought himself slain, or at least des-
perately wounded; and therefore calling to mind his
precious balsam, and pulling out his earthen jug, he
clapped it to his mouth; but before he had swallowed a
sufficient dose, souse comes another of those bitter alm-
onds, that spoiled his draught, and hit him so pat upon
the jug, hand, and teeth, that it broke the first, maimed
the second, and struck out three or four of the last.
These two blows were so violent that the boisterous
knight, falling from his horse, lay upon the ground as
quiet as the slain; so that the shepherds, fearing he was
killed, got their flock together with all speed, and car-
rying away their dead, which were no less than seven
sheep, they made what haste they could out of harm's
way, without looking any further into the matter.
All this while Sancho stood upon the hill, where he was
mortified upon the sight of this mad adventure. There
he stamped and swore, and banned his master to the
bottomless pit; he tore his beard for madness, and
cursed the moment he first knew him; but seeing him
at last knocked down and settled, the shepherds being
233


DON QUIXOTE
scampered, he thought he might venture to come down,
and found him in a very ill plight, though not altogether
senseless. "Ah! master," quoth he, "this comes of not
taking my counsel. Did I not tell you it was a flock of
sheep, and no army?" —"Friend Sancho," replied Don
Quixote, "know, it is an easy matter for necromancers
to change the shapes of things as they please: thus that
malicious enchanter, who is my inveterate enemy, to
deprive me of the glory which he saw me ready to ac-
quire, while I was reaping a full harvest of laurels, trans-
formed in a moment the routed squadrons into sheep.
If thou wilt not believe me, Sancho, yet do one thing for
my sake; do but take thy ass, and follow those supposed
sheep at a distance, and I dare engage thou shalt soon
see them resume their former shapes, and appear such
as I described them."


THE CONQUEST OF MAMBRINO'S
HELMET
By Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra
T the same time it began to rain, and Sancho would
fain have taken shelter in the fulling mills; but Don
Quixote had conceived such an antipathy against them
for the shame they had put upon him that he would by
no means be prevailed with to go in; and turning to the
right hand he struck into a highway, where they had not
gone far before he discovered a horseman, who wore
upon his head something that glittered like gold. The
knight had no sooner spied him, but, turning to his
squire, "Sancho," cried he, "I believe there is no pro-
verb but what is true; they are all so many sentences and
maxims drawn from experience, the universal mother
of sciences; for instance, that saying that where one
door shuts, another opens: thus fortune, that last night
deceived us with the false prospect of an adventure, this
morning offers us a real one to make us amends; and
such an adventure, Sancho, that if I do not gloriously
succeed in it, I shall have now no pretense to an excuse,
no darkness, no unknown sounds, to impute my dis-
appointment to: in short, in all probability yonder comes
the man who wears on his head Mambrino's helmet, and
thou knowest the vow I have made." —" Good sir,"
quoth Sancho, "mind what you say, and take heed what

235


DON QUIXOTE
you do; for I would willingly keep my carcass and the
case of my understanding from being pounded, mashed,
and crushed with fulling hammers." — "The block-
head!" cried Don Quixote; "is there no difference be-
tween a helmet and a fulling mill ?" — "I don't know,"
saith Sancho, "but I am sure, were I suffered to speak
my mind now as I was wont, mayhap, I would give you
such main reasons, that yourself should see you are wide
of the matter." — " How can I be mistaken, thou eternal
misbeliever!" cried Don Quixote; "dost thou not see
that knight that comes riding up directly towards us
upon a dapple-gray steed, with a helmet of gold on his
head." — "I see what I see," replied Sancho, "and the
devil of anything I can spy but a fellow on such another
gray ass as mine is, with something that glitters o' top of
his head." — "I tell thee, that is Mambrino's helmet,"
replied Don Quixote; "do thou stand at a distance, and
leave me to deal with him; thou shalt see, that without
trifling away so much as a moment in needless talk, I
will finish this adventure, and possess myself of the
desired helmet." — "I shall stand at a distance, you may
be sure," quoth Sancho; "but God grant that it be not
the fulling mills again." — "I have warned you already,
fellow," said Don Quixote, "not so much as to name the
fulling mills; dare but once more to do it, nay, but to
think on it, and I vow to — I say no more, but I 'll full
your very soul." These threats were more than suffi-
cient to padlock Sancho's lips, for he had no mind to
have his master's vow fulfilled at the expense of his
bones.
Now the truth of the story was this: there were in that
236


MAMBRINO'S HELMET
part of the country two villages, one of which was so
little that it had not so much as a shop in it, nor any
barber; so that the barber of the greater village served
also the smaller. And thus a person happening to have
occasion to be let blood, and another to be shaved, the
barber was going thither with his brass basin, which he
had clapped upon his head to keep his hat, that chanced
to be a new one, from being spoiled by the rain; and as
the basin was new scoured, it made a glittering show a
great way off. As Sancho had well observed, he rode
upon a gray ass, which Don Quixote as easily took for
a dapple-gray steed, as he took the barber for a knight,
and his brass basin for a golden helmet; his distracted
brain easily applying every object to his romantic ideas.
Therefore, when he saw the poor imaginary knight draw
near, he fixed his lance, or javelin, to his thigh, and
without staying to hold a parley with his adversary, flew
at him as fiercely as Rozinante would gallop, resolved to
pierce him through and through; crying out in the midst
of his career, "Caitiff, wretch, defend thyself, or imme-
diately surrender that which is so justly my due."
The barber, who, as he peaceably went along, saw
that terrible apparition come thundering upon him at
unawares, had no other way to avoid being run through
with his lance, but to throw himself off from his ass to the
ground; and then as hastily getting up, he took to his
heels, and ran over the fields swifter than the wind,
leaving his ass and his basin behind him. Don Quixote
finding himself thus master of the field and of the basin,
"The miscreant," cried he, "who has left this helmet,
has shown himself as prudent as the beaver, who, finding
237


DON QUIXOTE
himself hotly pursued by the hunters, to save his life,
tears and cuts off with his teeth that for which his natural
instinct tells him he is followed." — Then he ordered
Sancho to take up the helmet. — " On my word," quoth
Sancho, having taken it up, "it is a special basin, and
as well worth a piece of eight as a thief is worth a hal-
ter."
With that he gave it to his master, who presently
clapped it on his head, turning it every way to find out
the beaver or vizor; and at last seeing it had none,
"Doubtless," said he, "the pagan for whom this famous
helmet was first made, had a head of a prodigious size;
but the worst is, that there is at least one-half of it
wanting." Sancho could not forbear smiling to hear his
master call the barber's basin a helmet, and, had not his
fear dashed his mirth, he had certainly laughed out-
right. "What does the fool grin at now?" cried Don
Quixote. — "I laugh," said he, "to think what a hugeous
jolt-head he must needs have had who was the owner
of this same helmet, that looks for all the world like a
barber's basin." — "I fancy," said Don Quixote, "this
enchanted helmet has fallen by some strange accident
into the hands of some person who, not knowing the
value of it, for the lucre of a little money, finding it to
be of pure gold, melted one half, and of the other made
this headpiece, which, as thou sayest, has some resem-
blance to a barber's basin: but to me, who know the
worth of it, the metamorphosis signifies little; for as soon
as ever I come to some town where there is an armorer, I
will have it altered so much for the better, that then even
the helmet which the god of smiths made for the god of
238


DON QUIXOTE
for, after all, it was nothing but a jest, a harmless piece of
pastime; had I looked upon it otherwise, I had returned
to that place before this time, and had made more noble
mischief in revenge of the abuse than ever the incensed
Grecians did at Troy, for the detention of their Helen,
that famed beauty of the ancient world; who, however,
had she lived in our age, or had my Dulcinea adorned
hers, would have found her charms outrivaled by my
mistress's perfections;" and saying this, he heaved up a
deep sigh. "Well, then," quoth Sancho, "I will not rip
up old sores; let it go for a jest, since there is no reveng-
ing it in earnest."


DON QUIXOTE'S BATTLE WITH
THE GIANTS
By Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra
SANCHO Panza came running out of Don Quixote's *
chamber in a terrible fright, crying out, "Help,
help, good people, help my master! He is just now at it,
tooth and nail, with that same giant, the Princess Mico-
micona's foe; I never saw a more dreadful battle in my
born days. He has lent him such a sliver, that whip off
went the giant's head, as round as a turnip." — "You
are mad, Sancho," said the curate, interrupted in his
reading; "is thy master such a devil of a hero, as to
fight a giant at two thousand leagues' distance?" Upon
this, they presently heard a noise and bustle in the
chamber, and Don Quixote bawling out, "Stay, villain,
robber, stay; since I have thee here, thy scimitar shall
but little avail thee;" and with this, they heard him
strike with his sword, with all his force, against the
walls. — " Good folks," said Sancho, "my master does
not want your hearkening; why do not you run in and
help him ? though I believe there's no need now, for sure
the giant is by this time dead, and giving an account of
his ill life: for I saw his blood run all about the house,
and his head sailing in the middle on it; but such a head!
it is bigger than any wine skin in Spain."—" Death and
hell!" cries the innkeeper, "I will be cut like a cucum-
241


DON QUIXOTE
ber, if this Don Quixote, or Don Devil, has not been
hacking my wine skins that stood filled at his bed's
head, and this coxcomb has taken the spilt liquor for
blood." Then running with the whole company into the
room, they found the poor knight in the most comical
posture imaginable.
He was standing in his shirt, and he wore on his head
a little red greasy cast nightcap of the innkeeper's; he
had wrapped one of the bed blankets about his left arm
for a shield; and wielded his drawn sword in the right,
laying about him pellmell; with now and then a start
of some military expression, as if he had been really en-
gaged with some giant. But the best jest of all, he was
all this time fast asleep; for the thoughts of the adventure
he had undertaken had so wrought on his imagination
that his depraved fancy had in his sleep represented to
him the kingdom Micomicon, and the giant; and dream-
ing that he was then fighting him, he assaulted the wine
skins so desperately that he set the whole chamber afloat
with good wine. The innkeeper, enraged to see the
havoc, flew at Don Quixote with his fists; and had not
Cardenio and the curate taken him off, he had proved a
giant indeed against the knight. All this could not wake
the poor knight, till the barber, throwing a bucket of
cold water on him, wakened him from his sleep, though
not from his dream.
Sancho ran up and down the room searching for the
giant's head, till, finding his labor fruitless, " Well, well,"
said he, "now I see plainly that this house is haunted,
for when I was here before, in this very room was I
beaten like any stockfish, but knew no more than the
242


THE BATTLE WITH THE GIANTS
man in the moon who struck me; and now the giant's
head that I saw cut off with these eyes, is vanished; and
I am sure I saw the body spout blood like a pump." —
"What a prating and a nonsense about blood and a
pump, and I know not what," said the innkeeper; "I
tell you, rascal, it is my wine skins that are slashed, and
my wine that runs about the floor here, and I hope to see
the soul of him that spilt it swimming in hell for his
pains." — "Well, well," said Sancho, "do not trouble
me; I only tell you, that I cannot find the giant's head,
and my earldom is gone after it, and so I am undone,
like salt in water." And truly Sancho's waking dream
was worse than his master's when asleep. The inn-
keeper was almost mad to see the foolish squire harp so
on the same string with his frantic* master, and swore
they should not come off now as before; that their
chivalry should be no satisfaction for his wine, but that
they should pay him sauce for the damage, and for the
very leathern patches which the wounded wine skins
would want.
Don Quixote, in the meanwhile, believing he had
finished his adventure, and mistaking the curate, that
held him by the arms, for the Princess Micomicona, fell
on his knees before him, and with a respect due to a
royal presence, "Now may your highness," said he,
"great and illustrious princess, live secure, free from
any further apprehensions from your conquered enemy;
and now I am acquitted of my engagement, since, by the
assistance of Heaven and the influence of her favor by
whom I live and conquer, your adventure is so happily
achieved." — "Did not I tell you so, gentlefolks?"
243


DON QUIXOTE
said Sancho; "who is drunk or mad now? See if my
master has not already put the giant in pickle? Here
are the bulls, and I am an earl." The whole company,
except the innkeeper, were like to split at the extrava-
gances of master and man. At last, the barber, Car-
denio, and the curate having with much ado got Don
Quixote to bed, he presently fell asleep, being heartily
tired; and then they left him to comfort Sancho Panza
for the loss of the giant's head; but it was no easy mat-
ter to appease the innkeeper, who was at his wit's end
for the unexpected and sudden fate of his wine skins.


DON QUIXOTE MEETS THE LIONS
By Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra
THE history relates, that Sancho was chaffering with
the shepherds for some curds, when Don Quixote
called to him to bring his helmet; and finding that his
master was in haste, he did not know what to do with
them, nor what to bring them in; yet loth to lose his
purchase (for he had already paid for them), he be-
thought himself at last of clapping them into the helmet,
where having them safe, he went to know his master's
pleasure. As soon as he came up to him, " Give me that
helmet, friend," said the knight, "for if I understand
anything of adventures, I descry one yonder that obliges
me to arm."
The gentleman in green, hearing this, looked about to
see what was the matter, but could perceive nothing but a
wagon, which made towards them; and by the little flags
about it, he judged it to be one of his majesty's treasure
vans, and so he told Don Quixote. But his head was
too much possessed with notions of adventures to give
any credit to what the gentleman said. "Sir," answered
he, "forewarned, forearmed; a man loses nothing by
standing on his guard. I know by experience that I
have enemies visible and invisible, and I cannot tell
when nor where nor in what shape they may attack me."
At the same time he snatched the helmet out of Sancho's
245


DON QUIXOTE
hands, before he could discharge it of the curds, and
clapped it on his head, without examining the contents.
The curds being thus squeezed, the whey began to run
all about his face and beard; which so frighted him
that, calling to Sancho, "What's this," cried he, "San-
cho? What's the matter with me? Sure my skull is
growing soft, or my brains are melting, or else I sweat
from head to foot! But if I do, I am sure it is not for
fear. This certainly must be a dreadful adventure that
is approaching. Give me something to wipe me, if
thou canst, for I am almost blinded with the torrent of
sweat."
Sancho did not say a word, but giving him a cloth,
thanked Heaven that his master had not found him out.
Don Quixote dried himself, and taking off the helmet to
see what it should be that felt so cold on his head, per-
ceiving some white morsels, and putting it to his nose,
soon found what it was. "Now, by the life of my lady
Dulcinea del Toboso," cried. he, "thou hast put curds
in my helmet, vile traitor and unmannerly squire!" —
"Nay," replied Sancho cunningly, and keeping his
countenance, "if they be curds, good your worship, give
them me hither, and I will eat them. But hold, now I
think on it, the devil eat them for me; for he himself
must have put them there. What! I dare offer to defile
your helmet! you must know who dared to do it! As
sure as I am alive, sir, I have got my enchanters too,
that owe me a grudge, and plague me as a limb of your
worship; and I warrant have put that nasty stuff there
on purpose to set you against me, and make you fall
foul on my bones. But I hope they have missed their
246


DON QUIXOTE MEETS THE LIONS
aim this time, i' troth! My master is a wise man, and
must needs know that I had neither curds nor milk, nor
anything of that kind; and if I had met with curds, I
should sooner have put them in my belly than in the
helmet." — " Well," said Don Quixote, "there may be
something in that."
The gentleman had observed these passages, and stood
amazed, but especially when Don Quixote, having put on
the helmet again, fixed himself well in the stirrups, tried
whether his sword were loose enough in his scabbard,
and rested his lance. "Now," cried he, "come what will
come; here am I, who dare encounter the devil himself in
person." By this time the wagon with the flags was come
up with them, attended only by the carter, mounted on
one of the mules, and another man that sat on the fore-
part. Don Quixote making up to them, "Whither go ye,
friends ?" said he. "What wagon is this? What do you
convey in it? And what is the meaning of these flags?"
— "The wagon is mine," answered the wagoner; "I
have there fast two brave lions, which the general of
Oran is sending to his majesty, and these colors of our
lord the king are to let the people understand that what
goes here belongs to him." — " And are the lions large?"
inquired Don Quixote. — " Very large," answered the
man at the door of the wagon; "there never came bigger
from Afric into Spain. I am their keeper," added he,
"and have had charge of several others, but I never saw
the like of these before. In the foremost cage is a he-lion
and in the other, behind, a lioness. By this time they are
hungry, for they have not eaten to-day; therefore, pray,
good sir, ride out of the way, for we must make haste
247


DON QUIXOTE
to get to the place where we intend to feed them." —
"What!" said Don Quixote, with a smile, "lion whelps
against me! Against me those puny beasts! And at
this time of day? Well, I will make those gentlemen
that sent their lions this way know whether I am a man
to be scared with lions. Get off, honest fellow; and since
you are the keeper, open their cages, and let them both
out; for, maugre and in despite of those enchanters that
have sent them to try me, I will make the creatures know,
in the midst of this very field, who Don Quixote de la
Mancha is." — " So," thought the gentleman to him-
self, "now has our poor knight discovered who he is;
the curds, I find, have softened his skull, and mellowed
his brains."
On this, Sancho came up to him. "O good dear sir!"
cried he, "for pity's sake, hinder my master from falling
upon those lions by all means, or we shall all be torn
a-pieces." — "Why," said the gentleman, "is your mas-
ter so arrant a madman, then, that you should fear he
would set upon such furious beasts ?" — " Ah, sir!" said
Sancho, "he is not mad, but venturesome."—"Well,"
replied the gentleman, "I will take care of that;" and
with that advancing up to Don Quixote, who was urging
the lion-keeper to open the cage," Sir," said he," knights-
errant ought to engage in adventures from which there
may be some hopes of coming off with safety, but not in
such as are altogether desperate; for that courage which
borders on temerity is more like madness than fortitude.
Besides, these lions come not against you, nor dream of
it, but are sent as a present to the king, and therefore, it
is well not to detain them, or stop the wagon." — " Pray,
248


DON QUIXOTE MEETS THE LIONS
sweet sir," replied Don Quixote, "go and amuse your-
self with your tame partridge and your bold ferret, and
leave every one to his own business. This is mine, and
I know best whether these lion gentry are sent against
me or no." Then turning about to the keeper, "Sirrah!
you rascal you," said he, "either open your cages on the
spot, or I vow to God, I will pin thee to the wagon with
this lance." — "Good sir," cried the wagoner, seeing
this strange apparition in armor so resolute, "for mercy's
sake, do but let me take out our mules first, and get out
of harm's way with them as fast as I can, before the lions
get out; for if they should kill them, I should be undone
forever, for that cart and they are all I have in the world
to get a living with." — " Thou man of little faith," said
Don Quixote, "take them out quickly, then, and go with
them where thou wilt; though thou shalt presently see
that thy precaution was needless, and thou mightest
have spared thy pains."
The wagoner on this made haste to take out his mules,
while the keeper cried out loud, " Bear witness, all ye that
are here present, that it is against my will I am forced to
open the cages and let loose the lions; and that I protest
to this gentleman here, that he shall be answerable for all
the mischief and damage they may do; together with the
loss of my salary and fees. And now, sirs, shift for your-
selves, for, as for myself, I know the lions will do me no
harm." Once more the gentleman tried to dissuade Don
Quixote from doing so mad a thing, telling him that he
tempted Heaven in exposing himself to so great a danger.
To this Don Quixote made no other answer, but that he
knew what he had to do. "Consider, however, what you
249


DON QUIXOTE
do," replied the gentleman, "for it is most certain that
you are very much mistaken." — "Well, sir," said Don
Quixote, "if you care not to be spectator of an action
which you think is like to be tragical, e'en put spurs to
your mare, and provide for your safety." Sancho, hear-
ing this, came up to his master with tears in his eyes and
begged him not to go about this undertaking, to which
the adventure of the windmills, and the fulling mills, and
all the brunts he had ever borne in his life, were but cakes
and gingerbread. "Good your worship," cried he, " here
is no enchantment in the case, nor anything like it. I
peeped even now through the grates of the cage, and I
am sure I saw the claw of a true lion, and such a claw as
makes me think the lion that owns it must be bigger than
a mountain." — " At any rate," said Don Quixote, "thy
fear will make him bigger than half the world. Retire,
Sancho, and leave me, and if I chance to fall here thou
knowest our old agreement; repair to Dulcinea — I say
no more." To this he added some expressions which
cut off all hopes of his giving over his mad design.
The gentleman in green would have opposed him;
but, considering the other much better armed, and that
it was not prudence to encounter a madman, as Don
Quixote seemed to be, he even took the opportunity,
while he was hastening the keeper and repeating his
threats, to march off with his mare, as Sancho did with
Dapple, and the carter with his mules, every one making
the best of their way to get as far as they could from the
wagon before the lions were let loose. Sancho at the
same time made lamentations for his master's death; for
he gave him up for lost, not questioning but the lions had
250


DON QUIXOTE MEETS THE LIONS
already got him into their clutches. He cursed his ill
fortune, and the hour he came again to his service; but
for all his wailing and lamenting, he punched on poor
Dapple, to get as far as he could from the lions. The
keeper, perceiving the persons who fled to be at a good
distance, fell to arguing and entreating Don Quixote as
he had done before. But he told him again that all his
reasons and entreaties were but in vain, and bid him
say no more, but immediately dispatch.
Now while the keeper took time to open the foremost
cage, Don Quixote stood debating with himself, whether
he had best make his attack on foot or on horseback;
and upon mature deliberation, he resolved to do it on
foot, lest Rozinante, at sight of the lions, should be put
into disorder. Accordingly he quitted his horse, threw
aside his lance, grasped his shield, and drew his sword;
then advancing step by step, with wondrous courage and
an undaunted heart, he posted himself just before the
door of the cage, commending himself to Heaven, and
afterwards to his lady Dulcinea.
At this point it must be known, the author of this
faithful history makes the following exclamation. "O
thou most brave and unutterably bold Don Quixote
de la Mancha! Thou mirror and grand exemplar of
valor! Thou second and new Don Emanuel de Leon,
the late glory and honor of all Spanish cavaliers! What
words shall I use to express this astonishing deed of
thine! What language shall I employ to convince pos-
terity of its truth! What praises can be coined, and
eulogies invented, that will not be outvied by thy superior
merit, though hyperboles were piled on hyperboles!
251


DON QUIXOTE
Thou alone, on foot, intrepid and magnanimous, with
nothing but a sword, and that none of the sharpest, with
thy single shield, and that none of the brightest, stoodst
ready to receive and encounter the two fiercest lions
that ever roared within the Libyan deserts. Then let
thine own deeds speak thy praise, brave champion of La
Mancha, while I am obliged to leave off, for want of
words to maintain the flight." Here ended the author's
exclamation, and the history goes on.
The keeper, observing the posture Don Quixote had
put himself in, and that it was not possible for him to
prevent letting out the lions, without incurring the re-
sentment of the desperate knight, set the door of the
foremost cage wide open; where, as I have said, was the
male lion, who appeared of a monstrous bigness and of
a hideous, frightful aspect. The first thing he did was
to turn himself round in his cage, stretch out one of
his paws, and rouse himself. After that he gaped and
yawned for a good while, and then thrust out almost two
spans of tongue, and with it licked the dust out of his
eyes and face. Having done this, he thrust his head out
of the cage, and stared about with his eyes that looked
like two live coals; a sight and motion enough to have
struck terror into temerity itself. But' Don Quixote
only regarded it with attention, wishing he would leap
out of the wagon, and come within his reach, that he
might cut the monster piecemeal. To this height had
his incredible folly transported him; but the generous
lion, more gentle than arrogant, taking no notice of his
vaporing and bravados, after he had looked about him
awhile, turned his tail, and having showed Don Quixote
252


DON QUIXOTE MEETS THE LIONS
his hinder parts, very contentedly lay down again in his
apartment.
Don Quixote, seeing this, commanded the keeper to
rouse him with blows, and force him out. "Not I, in-
deed, sir," answered the keeper; " I dare not do it formy
life; for if I provoke him, I am sure to be the first he will
tear to pieces. Let me advise you, sir, to be satisfied
with your day's work. 'T is as much as the bravest can
pretend to do. Then pray go no further, I beseech you:
the door stands open, the lion is at his choice, whether
he will come out or no, and since he did not come out at
the first, I dare engage he will not stir out this day. You
have shown enough the greatness of your courage. No
brave combatant is obliged to do more than challenge
his enemy, and wait for him in the field. If he comes
not, that is his fault, and the scandal is his, and the
crown of victory is the challenger's."
"'T is true," replied Don Quixote. "Come, shut the
door, honest friend, and give me a certificate under thy
hand, in the amplest form thou canst, of what thou hast
seen me perform; how thou didst open the cage for the
lion; how I expected his coming, and he did not come
out; how I stayed his own time, and instead of meeting
me, he turned tail and lay down. I am obliged to do no
more. So, enchantments avaunt! and Heaven prosper
truth, justice, and true knight-errantry! Shut the door,
as I bid thee, while I make signs to those that ran away
from us, and get them to come back, that they may have
an account of this exploit from my own mouth." The
keeper obeyed, and Don Quixote, clapping on the point of
his lance the handkerchief with which he had wiped off
253


DON QUIXOTE
the deluge of curds from his face, began to call to the
fugitives, who fled nevertheless, looking behind them all
the way, and trooped on in a body with the gentleman
at the head of them.
At last, Sancho observed the signal of the white flag,
and calling out to the rest, "Hold," cried he, "my master
calls to us; I will he hanged if he has not got the better
of the lions." At this they all faced about, and perceived
Don Quixote flourishing his ensign; whereupon recov-
ering a little from their fright, they little by little came
back, till they could plainly distinguish Don Quixote's
voice; and then they came up to the wagon. As soon as
they were got near it, "Come on, friend," said he to the
carter; " put to thy mules again, and pursue thy journey;
and, Sancho, do you give him two gold crowns for the
lion-keeper and himself, to make them amends for the
time I have detained them." — " Ay, that I will with all
my heart," quoth Sancho; "but what is become of the
lions? Are they dead or alive?" Then the keeper very
formally related the whole action, not failing to exag-
gerate, to the best of his skill, Don Quixote's courage;
how at his sight alone the lion was so terrified, that he
neither would nor durst quit his stronghold, though for
that end his cage door was kept open for a considerable
time; and how upon his remonstrating to the knight, who
would have had the lion forced out, that it was presuming
too much upon Heaven, he had permitted, though with
great reluctancy, that the lion should be shut up again.
"Well, Sancho," said Don Quixote to his squire, "what
dost thou think of this? Can enchantment prevail over
true fortitude? No, these magicians may perhaps rob
254


DON QUIXOTE MEETS THE LIONS
me of success, but of fortitude and courage it would be
impossible."
Sancho gave the wagoner and the keeper the two
pieces. The first harnessed his mules, and the last
thanked Don Quixote for his bounty, and promised to
acquaint the king himself with his heroic action when he
came to court. "Well," said Don Quixote, "if his ma-
jesty should chance to inquire who did this thing, tell
him it was the Knight of the Lions; a name I intend
henceforth to take up, in lieu of that which I hitherto
assumed, of the Knight of the Doleful Countenance; in
which proceeding I do but conform to the ancient cus-
tom of knights-errant, who changed their names as often
as they pleased, or as it suited with their advantage."


THE RIDE ON THE WOODEN
HORSE
By Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra
[An enchanter has revenged himself upon some ladies
by putting heavy beards upon their faces. Don Quixote
has been persuaded that the beards will vanish if he will
take a journey of three thousand leagues on a wooden
horse.]
BLIND thy eyes, Sancho," said Don Quixote, "and
get up. Sure he that sends so far for us can have
no design to deceive us! since it would never be .to his
credit to delude those that rely on his word; and, though
the success should be contrary to our desires, still, it is
not in the power of malice to eclipse the glory of so brave
an attempt." — "To horse, then, sir," cried Sancho.
"The beards and tears of these poor gentlewomen are
sticking in my heart. And I shall not eat a bit to do me
good till I see them as smooth as before. Mount, then, I
say, and blindfold yourself first; for, if I must ride behind,
it is a plain case you must get up before me." — " That
is right," said Don Quixote; and, with that, pulling a
handkerchief out of his pocket, he gave it to the Discon-
solate Lady to hoodwink him. She did so; but presently
after, uncovering himself, "If I remember right," said
he, "we read in Virgil of the Trojan Palladium, that
256


DON QUIXOTE
in such a condition! — "What! you rascal," said Don
Quixote, "do you think yourself at the gallows, and at
the point of death, that you hold forth in such a piteous
strain? Dastardly wretch without a soul, dost thou not
know that the fair Magalona once sat in thy place, and
alighted from thence, not into the grave, but into the
throne of France, if there is truth in history? And do not
I sit by thee, that I may vie with the valorous Peter, and
press the seat that was once pressed by him? Come,
blindfold thyself, poor spiritless animal, and let me not
hear thee betray the least symptom of fear, at least not in
my presence." — " Well," quoth Sancho, "let them bind
me; but, if you will not let one say his prayers nor be
prayed for, it is no marvel one should fear that we may
have a legion of imps about us to deal with us, as at
Peralvillo."
Now, both being hoodwinked, and Don Quixote per-
ceiving everything ready, be began to turn the pin; and
no sooner had he set his hand to it than the waiting-
women and all the company set up their throats, calling
out, "Speed you well, valorous knight; Heaven be your
guide, undaunted squire! Now, now, you fly aloft, cutting
the air more swiftly than an arrow, while the gazing world
wonders at your course! Sit fast, courageous Sancho!
you do not sit steady; have a care of falling; for your fall
would be greater than the aspiring youth's that sought
to guide the chariot of the sun-god, his father." All this
Sancho heard, and, girting his arms fast about bis
master, "Sir," quoth he, "why do they say we are so
high, since we can hear their voices? Truly I hear them
so plainly that one would think they were talking close
258


DON QUIXOTE
hours' time setting him down in the tower of Nona, in one
of the streets of that city. There he saw the dreadful
tumult, assault, and death of Bourdon; and, the next
morning, he found himself back in Madrid, where he
related the story. Who said, as he went through the air,
the devil bade him open his eyes, which he did, and then
found himself as it seemed so near the moon that he
could touch him with his finger; but durst not look
towards the earth, lest his brains should turn. So,
Sancho, we need not unveil our eyes, but trust to him
that has charge of us, and fear nothing, for perhaps we
only mount high, to come straight down upon the king-
dom of Candaya, as a hawk or falcon falls upon a heron,
to seize it more strongly from a height; for, though it
appears to us not half an hour since we left the garden,
we have, nevertheless, traveled over a vast tract." — "I
know nothing of the matter," replied Sancho; "but of
this I am very certain, that, if the Lady Magallanes, or
Magalona, could sit this wooden crupper, she cannot
have had very tender flesh."
This dialogue of the valiant pair was very pleasant all
this while to the duke and duchess, and the rest of the
company; and now, at last, resolving to put an end to
this extraordinary and well-contrived adventure, they
set fire with some tow to Clavileno's tail; and, the horse
being stuffed full of fireworks, burst presently into
pieces, with a mighty noise, throwing Don Quixote and
Sancho to the ground half scorched. By this time the
Disconsolate Lady and bearded regiment vanished out
of the garden, and all the rest, as if in a trance, lay
flat upon the ground. Don Quixote and Sancho, sorely
260


THE RIDE ON THE WOODEN HORSE
bruised, got up, amazed to find themselves in the same
garden whence they took horse, and to see such a number
of people lie on the ground. But their wonder was in-
creased by the appearance of a large lance stuck in the
ground, and a scroll of white parchment fastened to it by
two green silken strings, with the following inscription
upon it, in golden characters: —
"The renowned knight Don Quixote de la Mancha
achieved the adventure of the Countess Trifaldi, other-
wise called the Disconsolate Lady, and her companions, by
solely attempting it. Malambruno is fully contented and
satisfied. The waiting gentlewomen have lost their beards.
King Clavijo and Queen Antonomasia have resumed their
pristine shapes; and, when the squire's scourging shall be
finished, the white dove shall escape the pernicious hawks
that pursue her, and be lulled in the arms of her beloved.
This is ordained by the Sage Merlin, proto-enchanter of
enchanters."
Don Quixote, having read this document, clearly un-
derstood it to refer to Dulcinea's disenchantment, and
rendered thanks to Heaven that he had achieved so great
a feat with so little danger, and brought back to their
former bloom the faces of the venerable waiting-women,
who had now disappeared; and approaching the duke
and duchess, who had not yet come to themselves, he
took the duke by the hand: "Courage, courage, noble
sir," cried he, "there is no danger; the adventure is
finished without damage, as you may read it registered
in that record."
The duke, as if he had been waked out of a sound
sleep, recovered himself by degrees, as did the duchess
261


DON QUIXOTE
and the rest of the company, who were lying prostrate in
the garden, all of them acting the surprise and fear so
naturally that the jest might have been believed earnest.
The duke with half-closed eyes read the scroll; then,
embracing Don Quixote, extolled him as the bravest
knight the earth had ever possessed. As for Sancho, he
was looking up and down for the Disconsolate Lady, to
see what sort of a face she had got, without her beard.
But he was informed that as Clavileiio came down
flaming in the air, the whole squadron of women with
Trifaldi vanished immediately, but all of them shaved
and without a hair upon their faces.
The duchess asked Sancho how he had fared in his long
voyage? "Why, truly, madam," answered he, "when,
as my master told me, we were flying through the region
of fire, I wished to uncover my eyes a little, but my
master would not suffer me to do so; yet, as I have a
spice of curiosity still hankering after what is forbidden
me, I shoved my handkerchief a little above my nose
and looked down, and, as it seemed, spied the earth no
bigger than a mustard seed; and the men walking to and
fro upon it not much larger than hazelnuts; by which
you may see how high we had got!" — "Have a care
what you say, my friend," said the duchess; "for if the
men were bigger than hazelnuts, and the earth no bigger
than a mustard seed, one man must cover the whole
earth." —"Like enough," answered Sancho; "but for
all that, do you see, I saw it with a kind of a side look
upon one part of it." — "Look you, Sancho," replied
the duchess," nothing can bewhollyseen by a partial view
of it." — " Well, well, madam,"quoth Sancho, "I do not
262


THE RIDE ON THE WOODEN HORSE
understand your views; I only know that as we flew by
enchantment, so, by enchantment, I might see the whole
earth, and all the men, which way soever I looked. If
you do not believe this, you will not believe me either
when I tell you that when I looked between my brows, I
saw myself so near heaven, that between me and it there
was not a span and a half. And, forsooth, it is a huge
place! and we happened to travel that road where the
seven she-goats are; and, faith and troth, I had such a
mind to play with them (having been once a goatherd
myself) that I should have burst, had I not done it.
What do I do then but slip down very soberly from
Clavilefio without telling a soul, and played and leaped
about for three-quarters of an hour, with the pretty
nanny-goats, who are like so many marigolds or gilly-
flowers; and Clavilefio stirred not one step all the while."
— " And while Sancho employed himself with the goats,"
asked the duke, "how was Don Quixote employed ?"—
"Truly," answered the knight, "I am sensible all things
were altered from their natural course; therefore, what
Sancho says seems no marvel to me. But, for my own
part, I saw nothing either above or below, neither heaven
nor earth, sea nor shore. I perceived, indeed, we passed
through the region of the air, and even touched that of
fire, but that we went beyond it is incredible; for, the fiery
region lying between the sphere of the moon and the
upper region of the air, it was impossible for us to reach
that heaven where are the seven goats, as Sancho says,
without being consumed; and, therefore, since we were
not singed, Sancho either lies or dreams." — "I neither
lie nor dream," replied Sancho; "do but ask me the
263


DON QUIXOTE
marks of these goats, and by them you will see whether
I speak truth or no." — " Prithee tell them, Sancho,"
said the duchess. "There were two of them green,"
answered Sancho, "two carnation, two blue, and one
party-colored." — "That is a new kind of goats," said
the duke. "We have none of those colors in our region
of the earth." — "Sure, sir," replied Sancho, "you will
make some sort of difference between heavenly she-goats
and the goats of this world ?" — " But, Sancho," said
the duke, "among these she-goats did you ever see a he-
goat." "Not one, sir," answered Sancho; "and I have
been told that none has ever passed beyond the horns of
the moon."
They did not think fit to ask Sancho more about his
voyage; for they judged he would ramble all over the
heavens, and tell them news of whatever was doing there,
though he had not stirred out of the garden.
Thus ended, in short, the adventure of the Disconso-
late Lady, which afforded sport to the duke and duchess,
not only for the present, but for the rest of their lives;
and to Sancho matter of talk for ages, should he live so
long.
"Sancho," said Don Quixote, whispering him in the
ear, "if thou wouldst have us believe what thou hast seen
in heaven, I desire thee to believe what I saw in Monte-
sinos's cave. I say no more."


THE THREE THOUSAND THREE
HUNDRED AND ODD LASHES
By Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra
[Don Quixote believes that his Dulcinea may be
freed from enchantment by Sancho Panza's inflicting
upon himself of his own will "three thousand three
hundred and odd lashes." Sancho has stopped at the
fifth, and now the knight bribes him to continue.]
FOR my part," said Don Quixote, " hadst thou de-
manded a fee for disenchanting Dulcinea, I can
tell thee that I would have given it thee already. But I
know not if a gratuity would accord with the cure; and I
would not have the reward hinder the medicine. For all
that, it seems to me that nothing will be lost by putting
it to a trial. Look you, Sancho, to what you want, and
scourge yourself at once, then pay yourself ready money
with your own hand, since you keep my money." San-
cho, opening his eyes and ears a span wide at this offer,
gave consent in his heart to scourge himself with a good
will. "Ay, sir, now you say well," quoth he to his master.
"I am willing to dispose of myself to do you a pleasure in
what may consist with my advantage, for my love for my
children and wife makes me seem selfish. Tell me how
much you will give me for each lash I give myself ?" —
"Were your payment, Sancho," said Don Quixote, "to
265


DON QUIXOTE
be answerable to the greatness and quality of this cure,
the wealth of Venice and the mines of Potosi would be
small payment for thee. But see what you have of mine,
and set the price on each stripe." — "The lashes,"
quoth Sancho, "are three thousand three hundred and
odd, of which I have given myself five; the rest are to
come. Let these five go for the odd ones, and let us come
to the three thousand three hundred, which at a quartillo
apiece — and I will not take less if all the world bid me
— they make three thousand three hundred quartillos, of
which three thousand make fifteen hundred half-reals,
which amounts to seven hundred and fifty reals; and the
three hundred remaining make an hundred and fifty half-
reals, and three-score and fifteen reals; put that with the
seven hundred and fifty, and it comes altogether to eight
hundred and twenty-five reals. This I will deduct from
what I hold of yours, and will return home rich and well
pleased, though well whipped. But one must not think
to catch trout — I say no more." — " O blessed Sancho!
O amiable Sancho!" cried Don Quixote. "How shall
Dulcinea and I be bound to serve thee all the days that
Heaven shall give us of life! If she recover from her lost
state (and it is not possible that she fail to do so), her
misfortune will turn to her felicity, and my defeat to the
happiest triumph. And hark ye, Sancho! when wilt thou
enter upon thy discipline? For if thou hastenest it, I
will add further a hundred reals more." — "When?"
answered Sancho; "this very night without fail. Do you
but order it that we lie in the fields under the open sky,
and I will open my flesh."
Night arrived, awaited by Don Quixote with the great-
266


THE LASHES
est anxiety; and he fancied Phoebus had broken his
chariot wheels, which made the day of so unusual a
length, — as is always the case with lovers, who never
make allowance for the reckoning of their desires. At
last they entered amongst some pleasant trees that stood
a little out of the road, where, leaving empty the saddle
and pannel of Rozinante and Dapple, they stretched
themselves upon the green grass, and supped from San-
cho's wallet.
He, having made himself a heavy and flexible whip of
Dapple's headstall and reins, retired about twenty paces
from his master, amidst some beeches. Don Quixote,
observing him go with readiness and resolution, said,
"Have a care, friend; do not hack thyself to pieces. Give
one stripe time to await another. Thou shouldst not so
hurry in the race that thy breath fails in the midst; go
more gently to work, soft and fair goes furthest; I mean,
do not give it thyself so sharply that strength fails thee
before the desired number is reached. And that you lose
not for a card more or less, I will stand at a distance and
keep count on my beads of the strokes thou givest thyself.
Heaven favor thee as thy good intention deserves." —
"Pledges do not hurt a good payer," said Sancho, "I
mean to give it to myself in such a way that it hurts with-
out killing me, for in this must lie the essence of this
miracle." With that he stripped himself from the waist
upwards, and seizing the lash began to lay on; while Don
Quixote began to tell the strokes. But by the time San-
cho had applied seven or eight lashes, he felt that the jest
was a heavy one, and its price very cheap. Whereupon,
after a short pause, he told his master that he had been
267


DON QUIXOTE
deceived; for such lashes as these were each worth being
paid for with a half-real, not a quartillo. "Go on, friend
Sancho," said Don Quixote, " take courage, I will double
the pay." — " God save us, let it rain stripes in that case,"
quoth Sancho. But the cunning knave left off laying on
his back, and fell upon the trees, with groans every now
and then, that one would have thought at each one of
them he had been giving up the ghost. Don Quixote,
who was tender-hearted, fearing he might make an end
of his life, and that, by Sancho's imprudence, his wishes
should not be attained, said, "On thy life, my friend, let
this business rest at this point. This seems to be a very
sharp sort of physic, and it will be well to take it at inter-
vals. Rome was not built in a day. If I have not told
wrong, thou hast given thyself above a thousand stripes;
that is enough for the present; for, to use a homely phrase,
'the ass will carry his load, but not more than his load.'"
— "No, no," quoth Sancho, "it shall never be said of
me,' When money's paid the arms are stayed.' Stand off
a little, and let me lay on another thousand lashes or so,
and then with another bout like this we shall have done
with this job, and have something over." — " Since thou
art so well in the humor," said Don Quixote, "I will
withdraw, and Heaven strengthen and reward thee."
Sancho fell to work so freshly that he soon fetched the
bark off a number of trees; such was the severity with
which he thrashed them! At length, raising his voice,
and giving an outrageous blow to one of the beeches:
"There!" cried he, " die thou shalt, Samson, and all that
are about thee!" At the sound of this dismal cry, and
the blow of the dreadful stroke, Don Quixote presently


THE LASHES
ran up, and laying hold on the twisted halter which
served Sancho for a thong, "Fate forbid," cried he,
"friend Sancho, that thou shouldst for my pleasure lose
thy life, which has to serve for the maintenance of thy
wife and children! Let Dulcinea stay for a better op-
portunity. I will contain myself within the limits of the
hope that is nigh, and will wait till thou recoverest new
strength, that the business may be accomplished to every-
body's satisfaction." — "Well, sir," replied Sancho, "if
it be your pleasure it should be so, so let it be, and wel-
come; and do so much as throw your cloak over my
shoulders; for I am all in a sweat, and I have no mind
to catch cold, for that is the danger that new disciplin-
ants run." This Don Quixote did, and leaving himself
unclad, covered up Sancho, who fell fast asleep till the
sun waked him. Then they continued on their journey,
which they brought to an end for that day at a village
three leagues off. They alighted at an inn, for it was
allowed by Don Quixote to be such, and not a castle,
with deep ditch, towers, portcullises, and drawbridge;
for since his defeat he spoke with more sense on all mat-
ters. He was lodged in a ground room, in which some
old painted serge hangings, such as are often seen in
villages, served for stamped leathers. On one of these
was painted in a most vile style the rape of Helen, when
the audacious guest stole her away from her husband,
Menelaus; and on another was the story of Dido and
iEneas, —the lady upon a lofty turret, as if making signs
with half a sheet to her fugitive guest, who was flying
from her across the sea in a frigate or brigantine. It was
indicated in the two stories that Helen went with no very


DON QUIXOTE
ill will, for she was smiling artfully and roguishly, but the
fair Dido seemed to be shedding tears as large as walnuts
from her eyes. Seeing which Don Quixote said, "These
two ladies were unfortunate in not having been born in
this age; and, above all, unfortunate am I for not having
been born in theirs! For had I met those gentlemen,
Troy would not have been burned, nor Carthage de-
stroyed; for, by the death of Paris alone, all these mis-
eries had been prevented." — "I will lay you a wager,"
quoth Sancho, "that before long there will not be a tav-
ern, a victualing house, an inn, or a barber's shop but
will have the story of our deeds painted along it. But I
could wish that it may be done by the hands of a better
painter than he that drew these." — "Thou art in the
right, Sancho," said Don Quixote; "for this artist is like
Orbaneja, a painter who was in Ubeda, who, being asked
what he Was painting, made answer, 'Whatever it shall
turn out;' and if he chanced to draw a cock, he under-
wrote, 'This is a cock,' lest any should take it for a fox.
Of the same sort, it seems to me, Sancho, must be the
painter or the writer (for it is all one) who produced
the story of this new Don Quixote that has lately come
out, for he painted or wrote 'whatever should turn out.'
Or he must be like a poet called Mauleon, who went
about Madrid some years ago, and would give answers
extempore to any questions, and when somebody asked
what was the meaning of 'Deum de Deo,' answered,
'Done as one can do.'
"But setting this aside, tell me, Sancho, if you think of
taking another turn to-night ? and would you rather do it
under a roof or in the open air?" — "Why, truly, sir,"
270


THE LASHES
quoth Sancho, "as to what I think of giving myself, it
may be done as well at home as in the fields, but withal
I could like it to be among trees; for methinks they keep
me company, and help me marvelously to bear my suf-
ferings."


THE RETURN AND DEATH OF
DON QUIXOTE
By Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra
FINALLY, surrounded by boys, and attended by the
curate and the bachelor, they entered the village,
and got to Don Quixote's house, where they found at
the door his. housekeeper and his niece, that had already
got the news of their arrival. Neither more nor less had
been told to Teresa Panza, Sancho's wife, who, with her
hair about her ears, and half dressed, dragging by the
hand her daughter Sanchica, came running to see her
husband. But when she found that he was not so well
dressed as she thought a governor ought to be, she said
to him, "What is the meaning of this, husband? You
look as though you had come on foot, and tired off your
legs! Why, you come more like a groveler than a gov-
ernor!"— "Peace, Teresa," answered Sancho; "many
a time when there are hooks, there are no flitches. Let
us go home, and then I will tell thee wonders. I have
taken care of the main chance. Money I have, which
is the chief thing, earned by my own industry without
wronging anybody." — " Hast thou got money, my good
husband?" said Teresa. "Be it gained here or there,
or however you like to gain it, you will have made no
new sort of profit in the world." Sanchica, hugging her
father, asked him if he had brought her anything, for
272


RETURN AND DEATH OF DON QUIXOTE
she had been longing for him as for rain in May. Thus
holding him by the girdle on one side, and his wife
taking him by the hand, and his daughter leading Dapple,
away they went to his house, leaving Don Quixote in his,
under the care of his niece and housekeeper, in company
with the curate and bachelor.
That very moment Don Quixote, regardless of times
and seasons, took the bachelor and the curate aside, and
in few words gave them an account of his defeat and the
obligation he lay under of not leaving his village for a
year, which, like a knight-errant bound by the strictness
and discipline of knight-errantry, he was resolved to
observe to the letter without infringing it one jot. And
that he intended to make himself a shepherd for that
year, and entertain himself in the solitude of the fields,
where he might give play to his amorous thoughts with
a loose rein, and employ himself in that pastoral and
virtuous exercise; and he begged them, if they had not
much to do, and if business of greater importance were
not an obstruction, that they would please to be his
companions; for he would provide sheep and cattle
enough to give them the name of shepherds; and that he
would have them know that the chief part of the under-
taking was done, for he had provided them all with names
that would fit them exactly. The curate asked him to
tell them. Don Quixote told him he would himself be
called the shepherd Quixotiz, and the bachelor the shep-
herd Carrascon, and the curate the shepherd Curiam -
bro, and Sancho Panza the shepherd Pancino.
They were all struck with amazement at this new
folly; but, in order that they might not have him leaving
273


DON QUIXOTE
the village again on his chivalry, and hoping that within
the year he might be cured, they came into his new de-
sign, and approved of his folly as if it were wise, offer-
ing their company in his employment. "And the more,"
said Samson Carrasco, "as everybody knows I am a
most celebrated poet, and at every step I will compose
verses pastoral, or courtly, or any that shall come more
seasonably, so as to divert us in those groves where we
shall range. But one thing, gentlemen, is most necessary,
that each of us choose a name for the shepherdess he
means to celebrate in his lays; and that we leave no tree,
be it ever so hard, on which her name is not inscribed
and cut, as is the use and custom of enamored shep-
herds." — "You are quite right," replied Don Quixote;
"provided that I am free from seeking an imaginary
shepherdess, since there is the peerless Dulcinea 'del
Toboso, the glory of these banks, the ornament of these
meads, the support of beauty, the cream of elegance,
and, in short, the subject on which all praise may light,
however hyperbolical it may be." — "That is true,"
said the curate; "but we shall seek out some shep-
herdesses of ordinary kind who, if they do not suit us
squarely, will do so cornerwise." To which added Sam-
son Carrasco, "And if they be wanting, we will give
those very names we find in books, of which the world
is full, such as Phyllises, Amaryllises, Dianas, Floridas,
Galateas, Belisardas, which are to be disposed of in the
markets, and can be purchased and kept as our own. If
my mistress, or my shepherdess I should rather say,
chance to be called Anne, I will celebrate her under the
name of Anarda; if Francisca, I will call her Francenia;
274


RETURN AND DEATH OF DON QUIXOTE
and if Lucy, Lucinda, and so forth. And Sancho Panza,
if he has to enter into this fraternity, may celebrate his
wife Teresa Panza by the name of Teresayna." Don
Quixote laughed at the turn given to the name. And
the curate greatly applauded his virtuous and honorable
resolution, and repeated his offer of bearing him com-
pany all the time that his compulsory employments
would allow him. With this they took their leave of him,
and begged and counseled him to take thought about
his health by enjoying whatever was good for him.
Fate willed that the niece and the housekeeper, accord-
ing to custom, had been listening to the discourse of the
three, and so, as they went away, both came in to Don
Quixote; and the niece said, "What is here to do, uncle!
Now when we thought you were come to stay at home,
and live like a sober, honest gentleman in your house,
. are you hankering after new crotchets, and turning into a
'Gentle shepherd, coming hither,
Gentle shepherd, going hence?'
For by my troth, sir, the corn is now too old to make
pipes of." To which the housekeeper added, "And will
your worship be able to endure the summer noondays,
and the winter's night frosts, and the howlings of the
wolves? No, for certain, for this is the business and duty
of strong men, cut out and bred for such work almost
from their swaddling bands and long clothes. Ill for ill,
it is even better to be a knight-errant than a shepherd.
Look ye, sir, take my advice, which is not given on a full
meal of bread and wine, but fasting, and with fifty years
over my head. Stay at home, look after your property,
275


DON QUIXOTE
go often to confession, do good to the poor; and on my
soul be it if ill comes of it." — "Peace, daughters,"
answered Don Quixote to them; "I know well what it
behooves me to do. Help me to bed, for it seems to me I
am not very well; and be assured that whether I now be
a knight-errant or an errant-shepherd, I shall never fail
to provide whatever you shall need, as you shall see in-
deed." And the good women took him to bed, brought
him something to eat, and tended him with all possible
care.
As human things are not eternal, always tending down-
wards from their beginnings till they reach their final
end, especially the lives of men, and as Don Quixote held
no privilege from heaven to stay the course of his, so his
end and finish arrived when he least expected it. For
whether it was from the melancholy that his defeat
caused, or whether it was by the disposition of heaven
that so ordered it, a fever took possession of him that
confined him to his bed for six days.
All that time his friends the curate, the bachelor, and
the barber, came often to see him, and his good squire
Sancho Panza never stirred from his bedside.
They, conjecturing that the regret of his defeat, and
his being disappointed of his desire for Dulcinea's liberty
and disenchantment, kept him in this case, essayed to
divert him in all possible ways. The bachelor begged
him to pluck up a good heart, and rise, that he might
begin his pastoral life, for which he had already written
an eclogue, which would confound all those that Sanna-
zaro had ever written, and that he had already bought,
with his own money, two famous dogs to watch their
276


RETURN AND DEATH OF DON QUIXOTE
flock, the one called Barcino, and the other Butron, that
a herdsman of Quintanar had sold him. But this had no
effect on Don Quixote's sadness. His friends called in
the doctor, who, upon feeling his pulse, did not very well
like it; and said that in any case he should provide for the
safety of his soul, for that of his body was in danger.
Don Quixote heard this with a calm mind, but not so his
housekeeper, his niece, and his squire, who fell a-weeping
bitterly, as if they already saw him dead before them.
The physician was of opinion that melancholy and
vexation were bringing him to his end. Don Quixote
desired them to leave him alone, for he would sleep a
little; they did so, and he slept for more than six hours
straight off, as they say, so that the housekeeper and the
niece thought that he would never wake.
At the end of that time he awaked, and, with a loud
voice said, "Blessed be Almighty God, who hath done
me so much good. His mercies are without end, nor are
they shortened or hindered by the sins of men." The
niece, hearkening very attentively to these words of her
uncle, and finding more sense in them than there was
wont to be in his talk, at least since he had fallen ill,
asked him, "What is that you say, sir; has anything
fresh happened? What mercies are these or what sins of
men ?" — " The mercies, niece," answered Don Quixote,
"are those that heaven has this moment vouchsafed
to me, which, as I said, my sins do not prevent. My
judgment is now free and clear, and the murky clouds
of ignorance removed, which my painful and continual
reading of those detestable books of knight-errantry
cast over me. Now I perceive their nonsense and deceit,
277


DON QUIXOTE
and am only sorry the discovery happens so late, when I
want time to make some amends by reading others that
would enlighten my soul. I find, niece, that I am at the
point of death; and I would meet it in such a manner as
to show that my life has not been so evil as to leave me
the character of a madman. Send, my dear, for my good
friends the curate, the bachelor Samson Carrasco, and
Master Nicholas the barber, for I wish to confess and
make my will." But this trouble the niece was saved by
the entrance of the three. Don Quixote had scarcely
seen them when he said, "Largess, good gentlemen, for
I am no longer Don Quixote de la Mancha, but Alonso
Quixano, the same whom my behavior gave the surname
of Good. I am now an enemy to Amadis de Gaul and all
the endless crowd of his descendants; all the profane
stories of knight-errantry are now hateful to me. I have
a sense of my folly and the danger I have run by having
read them; and now, through heaven's mercy and my
own experience, I abhor them." When the three heard
this, they concluded without doubt some new frenzy had
possessed him, and Samson said to him, "Now, Signor
Don Quixote, when we have just had news that the Lady
Dulcinea is disenchanted, do you come out with this?
and now we are upon the point of turning shepherds, to
spend our lives singing like princes, do you wish to make
yourself a hermit? Peace, on your life; come to yourself
and leave idle tales."
"Those which hitherto have been true, to my preju-
dice," replied Don Quixote, "my death, with the assist-
ance of heaven, shall turn to my advantage. I perceive,
sirs, that I am dying with all speed. Put aside jests, and
278


RETURN AND DEATH OF DON QUIXOTE
fetch me a confessor to confess me, and a scrivener to
draw up my will, for in such straits as this a man must
not play with his soul; and I beg that whilst Master
Curate confesses me a scrivener may be fetched."
They stared at one another, wondering at Don Quix-
ote's words, and though in doubt they were inclined to
believe him. And one of the signs by which they con-
jectured that he would die was his having changed so
quickly from a madman to a sane person; for to the
words already said he added many others so well spoken,
so Christian, and so connected that they came, withal,
to lose their doubts and to believe that he was sane. The
curate made all the people leave the room, and stayed
alone with him and confessed him. The bachelor went
for the scrivener, and presently returned with him and
with Sancho Panza, who, being informed by the bachelor
in what state his master was, and finding the housekeeper
and the niece in tears, began to make wry faces and fall
a-crying. The confession was ended and the curate
came out saying, "Certainly about to die and certainly
in his senses is Alonso Quixano the Good; we had best go
in, that he may make his will." These tidings were a
terrible blow to the swollen eyes of the housekeeper, the
niece, and Sancho Panza, his good squire, so that it made
the tears burst out of their eyes, and a thousand profound
sighs from their hearts; for indeed, as on some occasion
has been observed, whilst Don Quixote was plain Alonso
Quixano the Good, and whilst he was Don Quixote de la
Mancha, he was ever of pleasant humor and agreeable
behavior, and therefore he was beloved not only by his
family, but by every one that knew him.
279


DON QUIXOTE
The scrivener, with the rest, went in, and after he had
made the preamble of the will, and Don Quixote had
disposed of his soul with all those Christian circum-
stances that are requisite, he came to the legacies, and
said: —
"Item, it is my will that of certain moneys that Sancho
Panza (whom in my madness I made my squire) holds,
inasmuch as there have been between him and me cer-
tain accounts, both payments and receipts, there shall
be no charge made, nor account demanded of him; but
that if any shall remain over after he has paid himself
what I owe him, the residue shall be his; it can be but
small, and may it do him much good. And if, when I
was mad, I was a party to making him governor of the
island, I would now, in my right senses, give him the
government of a kingdom, were it in my power, for
the simplicity of his disposition and the fidelity of his
character deserve it." And turning to Sancho he said,
"Pardon me, my friend, that I have given thee occasion
to appear mad like myself, making thee fall into the error
in which I fell that there have been and are knights-
errant in the world." — " Woe's me!" replied Sancho,
all in tears, "do not die, dear master, but take-my coun-
sel, and live on a many years; the maddest thing a man
can do in this life is to let himself die without any more
ado, without being killed by anybody or finished by any
other hands but those of melancholy. See you do not
be slothful, but get up from this bed, and let us be off to
the fields in our shepherd's clothing, as we had agreed.
Who knows but behind some bush we may find the
Lady Donna Dulcinea disenchanted, as fine a sight as
280


RETURN AND DEATH OF DON QUIXOTE
there is to be seen? If it is that you will die of vexation
at being conquered, lay the blame upon me, and say
that through my not girting Rozinante well, they over-
threw him. Especially as you will have seen in your
books of chivalry that it is a common thing for one knight
to overthrow another, and for him who is conquered
to-day to be conqueror to-morrow." — " It is so," said
Samson, "and honest Sancho is very much to the point
in these matters," — " Soft and fair, gentlemen," said
Don Quixote; "never look for birds of this year in the
nests of the last: I was mad, and now I am in my senses;
I was Don Quixote de la Mancha, and I am now (as I
said before) Alonso Quixano the Good; may my re-
pentance and my truth restore me to the same esteem
you had for me before; and so let master scrivener go
on.
"Item, I bequeath all my estate without reserve to
Antonia Quixana, my niece here present, having first
deducted from such of it as is best in condition what shall
be necessary to discharge the bequests that I have made;
and the first payment that she makes I desire to be that
of the salary due to my housekeeper, for the time that
she has served me, with twenty ducats more for a dress.
I appoint Master Curate and Master Bachelor Samson
Carrasco, here present, to be my executors.
"Item, it is my will that if my niece Antonia Quixana
be inclined to marry, she marry a man of whom she shall
first have evidence that he does not know what books of
chivalry are; and in case it shall appear that he does
know, and nevertheless my niece shall wish to many
him and does so marry, she is to forfeit all that I have
281


DON QUIXOTE
bequeathed to her, which my executors are empowered
to dispose of in pious works, as they shall think proper.
"Item, I entreat the said gentlemen, my executors,
that if by good fortune they come to know the author
who is said to have composed a story which goes by the
title of "The Second Part of the Achievements of Don
Quixote de la Mancha," they most heartily beg his par-
don from me, for being undesignedly the occasion of his
writing so many and such great follies as he has written
in it; for I quit this life with regret for having given him
a motive for writing them."
Herewith finished the will, and, falling into a swoon,
he lay at full length in the bed. They were all alarmed,
and ran to his assistance; and for the space of three days
that he lived after he had made his will he fainted con-
tinually.
The whole family was in confusion; and yet, for all
that, the niece ate, the housekeeper drank, and Sancho
Panza cheered himself; for this matter of inheriting
somewhat effaces or alleviates in the inheritor the thought
of sorrow that it is natural for a dead man to leave
behind.
In short, Don Quixote's last day came, after he had
received all the sacraments, and, by many and weighty
arguments, showed his abhorrence of the books of
knight-errantry. The scrivener, who was by, said he
had never read in any book of chivalry of any knight-
errant who had ever died in his bed so quietly and like
a good Christian as Don Quixote, who, amidst the
compassion and tears of those who were by, gave up
the ghost, or, to speak plainly, died; which, when the
282


RETURN AND DEATH OF DON QUIXOTE
curate perceived, he desired the scrivener to give him a
certificate, how Alonso Quixano the Good, commonly
called Don Quixote de la Mancha, had departed out of
this present life, and died a natural death. This testi-
mony he desired, to remove opportunity from any other
author but Cid Hamet Benengeli to falsely resuscitate
him, and write endless histories of his adventures.
This was the end of the Ingenious Gentleman of La
Mancha, whose native place Cid Hamet has not thought
fit precisely to mention, with design that all the towns
and villages in La Mancha should contend amongst
themselves for the honor of adopting and keeping him
as their own, as the seven cities of Greece did for Ho-
mer. We omit here the lamentations of Sancho, of Don
Quixote's niece and the housekeeper, and the new epi-
taphs upon his tomb; but Samson Carrasco set this
upon it: —
"A valiant gentleman lies here,
So brave that, to his latest breath,
Immortal glory was his care,
And made him triumph over death.
Of small account he held the world,
Whose fears its ridicule belied;
And if he like a madman lived,
At least he like a wise one died."





THE ARABIAN NIGHTS





THE STORY OF ALADDIN; OR,
THE WONDERFUL LAMP
i
IN one of the large and rich cities of China there once
lived a tailor named Mustapha. He was so poor
that by the hardest daily labor he could barely sup-
port himself and his family, which consisted only of his
wife and a son.
This son, Aladdin, was a very careless, idle, and
disobedient fellow. He would leave home early in the
morning and play all day in the streets and public
places. When he was old enough, his father tried to
teach him the tailor's trade, but Mustapha no sooner
turned his back than the boy was gone for the day. He
was frequently punished, but in vain; and at last the
father gave him up as a hopeless idler, and in a few
months died of the grief Aladdin caused him.
The boy, now free from restraint, became worse than
ever. Until he was fifteen, he spent all his time with
idle companions, never thinking how useless a man
this would make of him. Playing thus with his evil
mates one day, a stranger passing by stood to observe
him.
The stranger was a person known as the African
magician. Only two days before, he had arrived from
Africa, his native country; and, seeing in Aladdin's
287


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
am I, not to have come soon enough to give you one last
embrace!"
Then he told Aladdin's mother how he had left their
native land of China forty years ago, had traveled in
many lands, and finally settled in Africa. The desire
had seized him to see his brother and his home once
more, and therefore he had come, alas! too late.
When the widow wept at the thought of her husband,
the African magician turned to Aladdin and asked,
"What business do you follow? Are you of any trade?"
The boy hung his head, and his mother added to his
shame by saying, "Aladdin is an idle fellow. He would
not learn his father's trade, and now will not heed me,
but spends his time where you found him, in the streets.
Unless you can persuade him to mend his ways, some
day I must turn him out to shift for himself."
Again the widow wept, and the magician said, —
"This is not well, nephew. But there are many trades
beside your father's. What say you to having a shop,
which I will furnish for you with fine stuffs and linens?
Tell me freely."
This seemed an easy life, and Aladdin, who hated
work, jumped at the plan. "Well, then," said the ma-
gician, "come with me to-morrow, and, after clothing
you handsomely, we will open the shop."
Soon after supper the stranger took his leave. On the
next day he bought the boy his promised clothes, and
entertained him with a company of merchants at his inn.
When he brought Aladdin home to his mother at night,
she called down many blessings on his head for all his
kindness.
289


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
Early the next morning the magician came for
Aladdin, saying they would spend that day in the
country, and on the next would buy the shop. So away
they walked through the gardens and palaces outside
one of the gates of the city. Each palace seemed more
beautiful than the last, and they had gone far before
Aladdin thought the morning half gone. By the brink of
a fountain they rested, and ate the cakes and fruit which
the magician took from his girdle. At the same time he
gave the boy good advice about the company he should
keep. On they went again after their repast, still farther
into the country, till they nearly reached the place, be-
tween two mountains, where the magician intended to do
the work that had brought him from Africa to China.
"We will go no farther now," said he to Aladdin. "I
will show you here some strange things. While I strike
a light, gather me all the loose, dry sticks you can see, to
kindle a fire with."
There was soon a great heap of them, and when they
were in a blaze the magician threw in some incense, and
spoke magical words which Aladdin did not understand.
This was scarcely done when the earth opened just
before the magician, and they both saw a stone with a
brass ring fixed in it. Aladdin was so frightened that
he would have run away, but the magician seized him
and gave him a box on the ear that knocked him down.
"What have I done, to be treated so ?" cried Aladdin,
trembling.
"I am your uncle," was the answer; "I stand in your
father's place; make no replies. But, child," he added,
softening, "do not be afraid. I shall ask nothing but
290


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
that you obey me promptly, if you would have the
good things I intend for you. Know, then, that under
this stone there is a treasure that will make you richer
than the greatest monarch on earth. No one but your-
self may lift this stone or enter the cave; so you must do
instantly whatever I command, for this is a matter of
great importance to both of us."
"Well, uncle, what is to be done?" said Aladdin,
losing his fear.
"Take hold of the ring and lift up that stone."
"Indeed, uncle, I am not strong enough; you must
help me."
"No," said the magician; "if I help you we can
do nothing. Lift it yourself, and it will come easily."
Aladdin obeyed, raised the stone with ease, and laid
it on one side.
When the stone was pulled up, there appeared a
staircase about three or four feet deep, leading to a door.
"Descend, my son," said the magician, "and open that
door. It will lead you into a palace divided into three
great halls. Before you enter the first, tuck up your
robe with care. Pass through the three halls, but never
touch the walls, even with your clothes. If you do you
will die instantly. At the end of the third hall you will
find a door opening into a garden planted with trees
loaded with fine fruit. Walk directly across the garden
to a terrace, where you will see a niche before you, and
in the niche a lighted lamp. Take it down and put it
out. Throw away the wick and pour out the liquor,
which is not oil and will not hurt your clothes; then put
the lamp into your waistband and bring it to me."
291


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
The magician then took a ring from his finger and put
it on Aladdin's, saying, "This is a talisman against all
evil, so long as you obey me. Go, therefore, boldly, and
we shall both be rich all our lives."
Aladdin descended, found all to be as the magician had
said, and carefully obeyed his orders. When he had put
the lamp into his waistband, he wondered at the beauty
of the fruit in the garden, white, red, green, blue, purple,
yellow, and of all other colors, and gathered some of
every sort. The fruits were really precious jewels; but
Aladdin, ignorant of their immense value, would have
preferred figs, grapes, or pomegranates. Nevertheless,
he filled two purses his uncle had given him, besides the
skirts of his vest, and crammed his bosom as full as it
would hold.
Then he returned with extreme care, and found the
magician anxiously waiting.
"Pray, uncle," he said, "lend me your hand to help
me out."
"Give me the lamp first," replied the magician. "It
will be troublesome to you."
"Indeed, uncle, I cannot now, but I will as soon as I
am up."
The magician was bent on taking it at once from his
hand, but the boy was so laden with his fruit that he
flatly refused to give it over before getting out of the cave.
This drove the magician into such a passion that he
threw more incense into the fire, spoke two magical
words, and instantly the stone moved back into its place,
with the earth above it, as it had been when they first
reached the spot.
292





THE NEW YORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY
ASTOR, LENOX AND
TILDZ.N FOUNDATIONS


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
afterwards told his mother of his strange adventure.
They were both very bitter against the cruel magician,
but this did not prevent Aladdin from sleeping soundly
until late the next morning. As there was nothing for
breakfast, he bethought him of selling the lamp in order
to buy food. "Here it is," said his mother, "but it is
very dirty. If I rub it clean I believe it will bring more."
No sooner had she begun to rub it than a hideous
genie of gigantic size appeared before her, and said
in a voice of thunder, "What wouldst thou have? I am
ready to obey thee as thy slave, and the slave of all those
who have the lamp in their hands, — I and the other
slaves of the lamp."
In terror at the sight, Aladdin's mother fainted; but
the boy, who had already seen a genie, said boldly, "I
am hungry; bring me something to eat."
The genie disappeared, and returned in an instant
with a large silver tray, holding twelve covered silver
dishes filled with tempting viands, six large white bread
cakes on two plates, two flagons of wine, and two silver
cups. All these he placed upon a carpet, and disap-
peared before Aladdin's mother had come out of her
swoon.
When she was herself again, they satisfied their hun-
ger, and still there was enough food for the rest of that
day and two meals on the next. Thife they put aside, and
Aladdin's mother made him tell of all that had passed
between him and the genie during her swoon. The
simple woman thought it all a dangerous and wicked
business, and begged Aladdin to sell both the lamp and
the ring; but he persuaded her to let him keep them both,
294


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
on the condition that she should have nothing to do with
genies again.
When they had eaten all the food left from the feast
the genie brought, Aladdin sojd the silver plates one by
one to a Jew, who cheated him by paying but a small
part of their value, and yet made the boy think himself
rich. The tray he sold last, and when the money it
brought was spent he rubbed the lamp again, and again
the genie appeared, and provided the mother and son
with another feast and other silver dishes. These kept
them in funds for some time longer, especially as Aladdin
had the good fortune to meet with an honest goldsmith,
who paid him the full value of the metal. Aladdin, all
the while, by visiting the shops of merchants, was gain-
ing knowledge of the world and a desire to improve
himself. From the jewelers he came to know that the
fruits he had gathered when he got the lamp were not
merely colored glass, but stones of untold value, the
rarest in the city. This, however, he had the prudence
not to tell to any one, even his mother.
in
One day, as Aladdin was walking about the town, he
heard an order proclaimed that the people should close
their shops and houses and keep within doors while
the Princess Buddir al Buddoor, the Sultan's daughter,
should go to the bath and return. Aladdin was filled
with an eager desire to see the face of the princess, and
contrived to place himself behind the door of the bath.
When she was a few paces away from it she removed her
veil, and Aladdin saw for a moment one of the most
295


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
beautiful faces in the world. When she passed by him
he quitted his hiding-place, and went home thoughtful
and grave.
"Are you ill ?" asked his mother.
"No," he answered, "but I love the princess more
than I can express, and am resolved that I will ask her
in marriage of the Sultan."
His mother thought him mad, but Aladdin said, "I
have the slaves of the lamp and the ring to help me,"
and then told her for the first time what riches he pos-
sessed in the jewels brought from the underground pal-
ace. "These," he said, "will secure the favor of the
Sultan. You have a large porcelain dish fit to hold them;
fetch it, and let us see how they will look when we have
arranged them according to their different colors."
Their eyes were dazzled by the splendor of the jewels
when they were arranged in the dish, and Aladdin's
mother consented at once to take them to the Sultan,
and ask his daughter's hand for her son.
Early the next morning she wrapped the dish in two
fine napkins and set out for the palace. Though the
crowd was great, she made her way into the divan, or
audience hall, and placed herself just before the Sultan,
the Grand Vizier, and other lords who sat beside him.
But there were many cases for him to hear and judge,
and her turn did not come that day. She told Aladdin
that she was sure the Sultan saw her, and that she would
try again.
For six days more she carried the jewels to the divan,
and stood in the same place. On the sixth the Sultan, as
he was leaving the hall, said to the Grand Vizier, "For
296


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
some time I have observed a certain woman standing
near me every day with something wrapped in a napkin.
If she comes again, do not fail to call her, that I may
hear what she has to say."
On the next day, therefore, she was called forward.
She bowed her head till it touched the carpet on the plat-
form of the throne. Then the Sultan bade her rise and
said, —
"Good woman, I have observed you many days.
What business brings you here?"
"Monarch of monarchs," she replied, "I beg you to
pardon the boldness of my petition."
"Well," said the Sultan, "I will forgive you, be it
what it may, and no hurt shall come to you. Speak
boldly."
This gave her heart to tell the errand on which her
son had sent her. The Sultan listened without anger
till she was done, and then asked what she had brought
tied up in the napkin. She took the china dish, which
she had set down at the foot of the throne, untied it, and
presented it to the Sultan.
His wonder knew no bounds when he looked upon
the jewels. Not until he received the gift from the wo-
man's hands could he find words to say, "How rich!
how beautiful!"
Then he turned to the Grand Vizier and said, " Behold,
admire, wonder! and confess that your eyes never be-
held jewels so rich and beautiful before. What sayest
thou to such a present? Is it not worthy of the princess,
my daughter? Ought I not to bestow her on one who
values her at so great a price?"
297


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
"I cannot but own," replied the Grand Vizier, "that
the present is worthy of the princess. But wait for three
months. Before that time I hope my son, whom you
regard with favor, will be able to make a nobler pre-
sent than this Aladdin, of whom your majesty knows
nothing."
The Sultan granted this request, and said to Aladdin's
mother, —
"Good woman, go home, and tell your son that I
agree to what you have proposed, but I cannot marry
the princess, my daughter, for three months. At the end
of that time come again."
The news which Aladdin's mother brought home filled
him and her with joy. From that time forth he counted
every week, day, and hour as they passed. When two of
the three months were gone, Aladdin's mother went out
one evening to buy some oil, and found the streets full of
joyful people, and officers busy with preparations for
some festival.
"What does it mean ?" she asked the oil merchant.
"Whence came you, good woman," said he, "that
you do not know that the Grand Vizier's son is to marry
the Princess Buddir al Buddoor, the Sultan's daughter,
to-night?"
Home she ran to Aladdin and cried, "Child, you are
undone! the Sultan's fine promises will come to nought.
This night the Grand Vizier's son is to marry the Prin-
cess Buddir al Buddoor."
Aladdin was thunderstruck, but wasted no time in
idle words against the Sultan. He went at once to his
chamber, took the lamp, rubbed it in the same place as
298


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
before, when instantly the genie appeared, and said to
him, —
"What wouldst thou have? I am ready to obey thee
as thy slave, — I and the other slaves of the lamp."
"Hear me," said Aladdin; "thou hast hitherto obeyed
me, but now I am about to impose on thee a harder task.
The Sultan's daughter, who was promised me as my
bride, will this night be wed to the son of the Grand
Vizier. Bring them both hither to me when they are
married."
"Master," replied the genie, "I obey you."
Aladdin did not have to wait long after supping with
his mother and going to his chamber to be shown again
that the genie was indeed his faithful slave. On this
night and the next the princess and the Grand Vizier's
son were borne away from the Sultan's palace in a man-
ner which none could understand, not even they them-
selves. The strange event was told to few, but the Sultan
was one of them. He consulted with the Grand Vizier,
and, as both of these parents feared to expose the young
couple to further dangers from unseen foes, the mar-
riage was canceled, and all the merrymaking in honor of
it was stopped. None but Aladdin knew the cause of all
the trouble, and he kept his secret to himself. Least of
all did the Sultan and Grand Vizier, who had quite for-
gotten Aladdin, suspect that he had a hand in the matter.
IV
Of course Aladdin had not forgotten the Sultan's
promise, and on the very day which ended the three
months, his mother came again to the divan, and stood
299


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
in her old place. When the Sultan saw her she was called
forward, and, having bowed to the floor, she said, —
"Sire, I come at the end of three months to ask you
to fulfill the promise you made to my son."
The Sultan could hardly believe the request had been
made in earnest, and, after a few words with the Grand
Vizier, decided to propose terms which one of Aladdin's
humble position could not possibly fulfill.
"Good woman," he said, "it is true that sultans ought
to abide by their word, and I am ready to keep mine.
But as I cannot marry my daughter without further
proof that your son will be able to support her in royal
state, you may tell him that I will fulfill my promise so
soon as he shall send me forty trays of massy gold, full of
the same sort of jewels you have already given me, and
carried by forty black slaves, who shall be led by as
many young and handsome white slaves, all dressed
magnificently. When this is done, I will bestow my
daughter, the princess, upon him. Go, good woman,
and tell him so, and I will wait till you bring me his
answer."
As Aladdin's mother hurried home she laughed to
think how far the Sultan's demand would be beyond
her son's power. "He awaits your answer," she said
to Aladdin when she had told him all, and added, laugh-
ing, "I believe he may wait long."
"Not so long as you think," replied Aladdin. "This
demand is a mere trifle. I will prepare to answer it at
once."
In his own chamber he summoned the genie of the
lamp, who appeared without delay, and promised to
300


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
carry out Aladdin's commands. Within a very short
time, a train of forty black slaves, led by as many white
slaves, appeared opposite the house in which Aladdin
lived. Each black slave carried on his head a basin of
massy gold, full of pearls, diamonds, rubies, and emer-
alds. Aladdin then said to his mother, —
"Madam, pray lose no time. Go to the Sultan before
he leaves the divan, and make this gift to him, that he
may see how ardently I desire his daughter's hand."
With Aladdin's mother at its head, the procession
began to move through the streets, which were soon filled
with people praising the beauty and bearing of the slaves,
splendidly dressed, and walking at an equal distance
from one another. At the palace nothing so brilliant
had ever been seen before. The richest robes of the
court looked poor beside the dresses of these slaves.
When they had all entered they formed a half-circle
around the Sultan's throne; the black slaves laid the
golden trays on the carpet, touched it with their fore-
heads, and at the same time the white slaves did likewise.
When they rose the black slaves uncovered the trays,
and then all stood with their arms crossed over their
breasts.
This done, Aladdin's mother advanced to the throne,
bowed to the floor, and said. —
"Sire, my son knows that this present is much below
the notice of the Princess Buddir al Buddoor, but hopes
that your majesty will accept of it, and make it pleasing
to the princess. His hope is the greater because he has
tried to carry out your own wish."
With delight the Sultan replied, —
301


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
"Go and tell your son that I wait with open arms to
embrace him; and the more haste he makes to come and
receive the princess, my daughter, from my hands, the
greater pleasure he will give me."
While he showed the slaves and the jewels to the
princess, Aladdin's mother carried the good news to her
son. "My son," she said, "you may rejoice, for the
Sultan has declared that you shall marry the Princess
Buddir al Buddoor. He waits for you with impatience."
Aladdin was overjoyed, but, saying little, retired to
his chamber. Here he rubbed the lamp, and when its
slave appeared said, —
"Genie, convey me at once to a bath, and give me
the richest robe ever worn by a monarch."
This was soon done, and he found himself again in his
own chamber, where the genie asked if he had any other
commands.
"Yes," answered Aladdin; "bring me a charger
better than the best in the Sultan's stables. Fit him
with trappings worthy of his value. Furnish twenty
slaves, clothed as richly as those who carried the presents
to the Sultan, to walk by my side and follow me, and
twenty more to go before me in two ranks. Besides
these, bring my mother six women slaves, as richly
dressed as any of the Princess Buddir al Buddoor's, each
carrying a complete dress fit for a Sultan's wife. I want
also ten thousand pieces of gold in ten purses: go, and
make haste."
The commands were instantly fulfilled, and Aladdin
gave the six women slaves to his mother, with the six
dresses they had brought, wrapped in silver tissue. Of
302


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
the ten purses he gave four to his mother, and the other
six he left in the hands of the slaves who brought them,
saying that they must march before him and throw the
money by handfuls into the crowd as the procession
moved to the Sultan's palace. Mounted on his horse,
Aladdin, though he had never ridden before, appeared
with a grace which the most practiced horseman might
have envied. It was no wonder that the people made the
air echo with their shouts, especially when the slaves
threw out the handfuls of gold.
The Sultan met him at the palace with joy and sur-
prise that the son of so humble a mother as the woman
he had seen should have such diginty and good looks,
and should be dressed more richly than he himself had
ever been. He embraced Aladdin, held him by the hand,
and made him sit near the throne. Then there was a
great feast, and after it the contract of marriage between
the princess and Aladdin was drawn up. When the
Sultan asked him if he would stay in the palace and
complete the marriage that day, Aladdin answered,—
"Sire, though my impatience is great to enter on the
honor your majesty has granted, yet I beg first to be
allowed to build a palace worthy of the princess, your
daughter. I pray you to give me ground enough near your
own, and I will have it finished with the utmost speed."
The request was granted, and Aladdin took his leave
with as much politeness as if he had always lived at
court. Again, as he passed through the streets, the peo-
ple shouted and wished him joy. In his own chamber
once more, he took the lamp, rubbed it, and there was
the genie.
303


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
"Genie," said Aladdin, "build me a palace fit to re-
ceive the Princess Buddir al Buddoor. Let its materials
be of the rarest. Let its walls be of massive gold and
silver bricks. Let each front contain six windows, and
let the lattices of these (except one, which must he
left unfinished) be enriched with diamonds, rubies, and
emeralds, beyond anything of the kind ever seen in
the world. Let there be courts and a spacious gar-
den, kitchens, storehouses, stables, — well equipped, —
offices, servants, and slaves. Above all, provide a safe
treasure-house, and fill it with gold and silver. Go, and
fulfill my wishes."
Early the next morning the genie returned, and bore
Aladdin to the place where the palace had been built.
Everything was done as Aladdin had commanded.
The officers, slaves, and grooms were at their work in
hall and stable. The hall, with the twenty-four windows,
was beyond his fondest hopes.
"Genie," he said, "there is but one thing wanting,
— a fine carpet for the princess to walk upon from the
Sultan's palace to mine. Lay one down at once."
In an instant the desire was fulfilled. Then the genie
carried Aladdin to his own home.
When the Sultan looked out of his windows in the
morning, he was amazed to see a shining building where
there had been but an empty garden. "It must be
Aladdin's palace," he said, "which I gave him leave
to build for my daughter. He has wished to surprise
us, and let us see what wonders can be done in a single
night."
He was only a little less surprised when Aladdin's
304


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
mother, dressed more richly than ever his own daughter
had been, appeared at the palace. So good a son, he
thought, must make a good husband. And soon the
son himself appeared; and when in royal pomp he left
his humble house for the last time, he did not fail to
take with him the wonderful lamp which had brought
him all his good fortune, or to wear the ring he had
received as a talisman.
V
His marriage to the princess was performed with the
utmost splendor. There was feasting and music and
dancing, and when the princess was brought to her new
palace she was so dazzled by its richness that she said
to Aladdin, "I thought, prince, there was nothing so
beautiful in the world as my father's palace, but now I
know that I was deceived."
The next day Aladdin with a troop of slaves went
himself to the Sultan and asked him to come with the
Grand Vizier and lords of the court to a repast in the
palace of the princess. The Sultan gladly consented,
and the nearer he came to the building the more he
marveled at its grandeur. When he entered the hall of
the twenty-four windows he exclaimed, —
"This palace is one of the wonders of the world.
Where else shall we find walls built of gold and silver,
and windows of diamonds, rubies, and emeralds? But
tell me this. Why, in a hall of such beauty, was one
window left incomplete?"
"Sire," said Aladdin, "I left it so, that you should
have the glory of finishing this hall."
305


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
"I take your wish kindly," said the Sultan, "and will
give orders about it at once."
When the jewelers and goldsmiths were called they
undertook to finish the window, but needed all the
jewels the Sultan could give and the Grand Vizier lend
for the work. Even the jewels of Aladdin's gift were
used, and after working for a month the window was
not half finished. Aladdin therefore dismissed them all
one day, bade them undo what they had done, and take
the jewels back to the Sultan and Vizier. Then he
rubbed his lamp, and there was the genie.
"Genie," he said, "I ordered thee to leave one of
the four and twenty windows imperfect, and thou hast
obeyed me. Now I would have thee make it like the
rest." And in a moment the work was done.
The Sultan was greatly surprised when the chief
jeweler brought back the stones and said that their
work had been stopped, he could not tell why. A horse
was brought, and the Sultan rode at once to Aladdin's
palace to ask what it all meant. One of the first things
he saw there was the finished window. He could hardly
believe it to be true, and looked very closely at all the
four and twenty to see if he was deceived. When he
was convinced he embraced Aladdin and kissed him
between the eyes and said, —
"My son, what a man you are to do such things in the
twinkling of an eye! there is not your fellow in the world;
the more I know of you the more I admire you."
Aladdin won not only the love of the Sultan, but also
of the people. As he went to one mosque or another to
prayers, or paid visits to the Grand Vizier and lords of
306


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
the court, he caused two slaves who walked by the side
of his horse to throw handfuls of money to the people in
the streets. Thus he lived for several years, making
himself dear to all.
VI
About this time the African magician, who had sup-
posed Aladdin to be dead in the cave where he had left
him, learned by magic art that he had made his escape,
and by the help of the genie of the wonderful lamp was
living in royal splendor.
On the very next day the magician set out for the
capital of China, where on his arrival he took up his
lodging in an inn. There he quickly learned about
Aladdin's wealth and goodness and popularity. As soon
as he saw the palace he knew that none but genies,
the slaves of the lamp, could have built it, and he re-
turned to his inn all the more angry at Aladdin for hav-
ing got what he wanted himself. When he learned by
his magic that Aladdin did not carry the lamp about
with him, but left it in the palace, he rubbed his hands
with glee, and said, "Well, I shall have it now, and
I shall make Aladdin return to his low estate."
The next morning he learned that Aladdin had gone
with a hunting party, to be absent eight days, three of
which had passed. He needed to know no more, and
quickly formed his plans. He went to a shop and asked
for a dozen copper lamps. The master of the shop had
not so many then, but promised them the next day, and
said he would have them, as the magician wished, hand-
some and well polished.
307


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
When the magician came back and paid for them, he
put them in a basket and started directly for Aladdin's
palace. As he drew near he began crying, "Who will
change old lamps for new ones?" The children and
people who crowded around hooted and scoffed at him as
a madman or a fool, but he heeded them not, and went
on crying, "Who will change old lamps for new ones?"
The princess was in the hall with the four and twenty
windows, and, seeing a crowd outside, sent one of her
women slaves to find out what the man was crying.
The slave returned laughing, and told of the foolish
offer. Another slave, hearing it, said, "Now you speak
of lamps, I know not whether the princess may have
observed it, but there is an old one upon a shelf of the
Prince Aladdin's robing room. Whoever owns it will not
be sorry to find a new one in its stead. If the princess
chooses, she may have the pleasure of seeing whether
this old man is silly enough to make the exchange."
The princess, who knew not the value of this lamp,
thought it would be a good joke to do as her slave sug-
gested, and in a few moments it was done. The magician
did not stop to cry, "New lamps for old ones!" again,
but hurried to his inn and out of the town, setting down
his basket of new lamps where nobody saw him.
When he reached a lonely spot he pulled the old lamp
out of his breast, and, to make sure that it was the one
he wanted, rubbed it. Instantly the genie appeared and
said, "What wouldst thou have? I am ready to obey
thee as thy slave, and the slave of all those who have
that lamp in their hands, — both I and the other slaves
of the lamp."
308


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
"I command thee," replied the magician, "to bear
me and the palace which thou and the other slaves of
the lamp have built in this city, with all the people in
it, at once to Africa."
The genie made no reply, but in a moment he and the
other slaves of the lamp had borne the magician and the
palace entire to the spot where he wished it to stand.
Early the next morning, when the Sultan went as
usual to gaze upon Aladdin's palace, it was nowhere to
be seen. How so large a building that had been standing
for some years could disappear so completely, and leave
no trace behind, he could not understand. The Grand
Vizier was summoned to explain it. In secret be bore
no good will to Aladdin, and was glad to suggest that the
very building of the palace had been by magic, and that
the hunting party had been merely an excuse for the
removal of the palace by the same means. The Sultan
was persuaded, therefore, to send a body of his guards
to seize Aladdin as a prisoner of state. When he ap-
peared the Sultan would hear no word from him, but
ordered him put to death. This displeased the people so
much that the Sultan, fearing a riot, granted him his
life and let him speak.
"Sire," said Aladdin, "I pray you to let me know the
crime by which I have lost thy favor?"
"Your crime!" answered the^ultan; "wretched man!
do you not know it? Follow me, and I will show you."
Then he led Aladdin to a window and said, "You
ought to know where your palace stood; look, and tell
me what has become of it."
Aladdin was as much amazed as the Sultan had been.
309


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
"True, it is vanished," he said after a speechless pause,
"but I have had no concern in its removal. I beg you to
give me forty days, and if in that time I cannot restore it,
I will offer my head to be disposed of at your pleasure."
"I give you the time you ask," answered the Sultan,
"but at the end of forty days forget not to present your-
self before me."
The lords, who had courted Aladdin in his better days,
paid him no heed as he left the palace in extreme
shame. For three days he wandered about the city,
exciting the pity of all he met by asking if they had seen
his palace, or could tell where it was. On the third
day he wandered into the country. As he approached a
river he slipped and fell down a bank. Clutching at a
rock to save himself, he rubbed his ring, and instantly
the genie whom he had seen in the cave appeared before
him. "What wouldst thou have?" said the genie. "I
am ready to obey thee as thy slave, and the slave of all
those that have that ring on their finger, — both I and
the other slaves of the ring."
Aladdin had never thought of help from this quarter,
and said with delight, —
"Genie, show me where the palace I caused to be
built now stands, or bring it back where it first stood."
"Your command," answered the genie, "is not wholly
in my power; I am only^he slave of the ring, and not of
the lamp."
"I command thee, then," replied Aladdin, "by the
power of the ring, to bear me to the spot where my
palace stands, wherever it may be."
These words were no sooner out of his mouth than he
310


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
found himself in the midst of a large plain, where his
palace stood, not far from a city, and directly above him
was the window of his wife's chamber. Just then one of
her household happened to look out and see him, and
told the good news to the Princess Buddir al Buddoor.
She could not believe it to be true, and hastening to the
window opened it herself with a noise which made
Aladdin look up. Seeing the princess, he saluted her
with an air that expressed his joy, and in a moment he
had entered by a private door and was in her arms.
After shedding tears of joy, they sat down, and Alad-
din said, "I beg of you, princess, to tell me what is
become of an old lamp which stood upon a shelf in my
robing chamber."
"Alas!" answered the princess, "I was afraid our
misfortune might be owing to that lamp; and what
grieves me most is that I have been the cause of it. I
was foolish enough to change the old lamp for a new one,
and the next morning I found myself in this unknown
country, which I am told is Africa."
"Princess," said Aladdin, stopping her, "you have
told me all by telling me we are in Africa. Now, only
tell me where the old lamp is."
"The African magician," answered the princess,
"carries it carefully wrapped up in his bosom. This I
know, because one day he pulled it out before me, and
showed it to me in triumph."
Aladdin quickly formed and carried out a plan to
leave the palace, disguise himself, buy of a druggist
a certain powder which he named, and return to the
princess. He told her what she must do to help his pur-
311


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
poses. When the magician should come to the palace,
she must assume a friendly manner and ask him to sup
with her. "Before he leaves," said Aladdin, "ask him
to exchange cups with you. This he will gladly do, and
you must give him the cup containing this powder. On
drinking it he will instantly fall asleep, and we shall
obtain the lamp, whose slaves will do our bidding, and
bear us and the palace back to the capital of China."
It was not long before the magician came to the
palace, and the princess did exactly as Aladdin had bid-
den her. When, at the end of the evening, she offered
her guest the drugged cup, he drank it, out of honor to
her, to the last drop, and fell back lifeless on the sofa.
Aladdin was quickly called and said, "Princess, retire,
and let me be left alone while I try to take you back to
China as speedily as you were brought thence." On the
dead body of the magician he found the lamp, carefully
wrapped and hidden in his garments. Aladdin rubbed
it, and the genie stood before him.
"Genie," said Aladdin, "I command thee to bear
this palace instantly back to the place whence it was
brought hither." The genie bowed his head and de-
parted. In a moment the palace was again in China,
and its removal was felt only by two little shocks, the
one when it was lifted up, the other when it was set
down, and both in a very short space of time.
Early the next day the Sultan was looking from his
window and mourning his daughter's fate. He could
not believe his eyes when first he saw her palace standing
in its old place. But as he looked more closely he was
convinced, and joy came to his heart instead of the
312


THE STORY OF ALADDIN
grief that had filled it. At once he ordered a horse and
was on his way, when Aladdin, looking from the hall
of twenty-four windows, saw him coming, and hastened
to help him dismount. He was brought at once to the
princess, and both wept tears of joy. When the strange
events had been partly explained, he said to Aladdin, —
"My son, be not displeased at the harshness I showed
towards you. It rose from a father's love, and therefore
you will forgive it."
"Sire," said Aladdin, "I have not the least reason to
complain of your conduct, since you did nothing but
what your duty required. This wicked magician, the
basest of men, was the sole cause of all."
VII
Only once again were Aladdin and his palace in dan-
ger from magic arts. A younger brother of the African
magician learned of what had happened, and, in the
guise of a holy woman, Fatima, whom he killed that he
might pretend to take her place, came to live in the
palace. The princess, thinking him really the holy
woman, heeded all that he said. One day, admiring the
beauty of the hall, he told her that nothing could sur-
pass it if only a roc's egg were hung from the middle
of the dome. "A roc," he said, "is a bird of enormous
size which lives at the summit of Mount Caucasus.
The architect who built your palace can get you an
egg-"
When the princess told Aladdin of her desire, he
summoned the genie of the lamp and said to him, —
"Genie, I command thee in the name of this lamp,
313


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
bring a roc's egg to be hung in the middle of the dome
of the hall of the palace."
No sooner were these words spoken than the hall
shook as if ready to fall, and the genie told Aladdin that
he had asked him to bring his own master and hang him
up in the midst of the hall; it was enough to reduce
Aladdin and the princess and the palace all to ashes; but
he should be spared, because the request had really
come from another. Then he told Aladdin who was
the true author of it, and warned him against the pre-
tended Fatima, whom till then he had not known as
the brother of the African magician. Aladdin saw his
danger, and on that very day he killed his wicked enemy
with the dagger which was meant to be his own death.
Thus was Aladdin delivered from the two brothers
who were magicians. Within a few years the Sultan
died at a good old age, and, as he left no male children,
the Princess Buddir al Buddoor came to the throne, and
she and Aladdin reigned together many years.


r


THE NEW YORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY
R L


ALI BABA AND THE FORTY
THIEVES
i
THERE once lived in a town of Persia two brothers,
one named Cassim and the other Ali Baba. Their
father divided his small property equally between them.
Cassim married a very rich wife, and became a wealthy
merchant. Ali Baba married a woman as poor as him-
self, and lived by cutting wood and bringing it upon three
asses into the town to sell.
One day, when Ali Baba had cut just enough wood in
the forest to load his asses, he noticed far off a great
cloud of dust. As it drew nearer, he saw that it was
made by a body of horsemen, whom he suspected to be
robbers. Leaving the asses, he climbed a large tree
which grew on a high rock, and had branches thick
enough to hide him completely while he saw what passed
beneath. The troop, forty in number, all well mounted
and armed, came to the foot of the rock on which
the tree stood, and there dismounted. Each man un-
bridled his horse, tied him to a shrub, and hung about
his neck a bag of cc rn. Then each of them took off hi3
saddle-bag, which from its weight seemed to Ali Baba
full of gold and silver. One, whom he took to be their
captain, came under the tree in which Ali Baba was con-
cealed ; and, making his way through some shrubs, spoke
315


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
the words, "Open, Sesame." As soon as the captain of
the robbers said this, a door opened in the rock, and
after he had made all his troop enter before him, he
followed them, when the door shut again of itself.
The robbers stayed some time within, and Al i Baba,
fearful of being caught, remained in the tree. At last
the door opened again, and the captain came out first,
and stood to see all the troop pass by him. Then Ali
Baba heard him make the door close by saying, "Shut,
Sesame." Every man at once bridled his horse, fastened
his wallet, and mounted again. When the captain saw
them all ready, he put himself at their head, and they
returned the way they had come.
Ali Baba watched them out of sight, and then waited
some time before coming down. Wishing to see whether
the captain's words would have the same effect if he
should speak them, he found the door hidden in the
shrubs, stood before it, and said, "Open, Sesame."
Instantly the door flew wide open.
Instead of a dark, dismal cavern, Ali Baba was sur-
prised to see a large chamber, well lighted from the top,
and in it all sorts of provisions, rich bales of silk, stuff,
brocade, and carpeting, gold and silver ingots in great
heaps, and money in bags.
Ali Baba went boldly into the cave, and collected as
much of the gold coin, which was in bags, as he thought
his asses could carry. When he had loaded them with
the bags, he laid wood over them so that they could not
be seen, and, passing out of the door for the last time,
stood before it and said, "Shut, Sesame." The door
closed of itself, and he made the best of his way to town.
316


ALI BABA AND THE FORTY THIEVES
When he reached home, he carefully closed the gate
of his little yard, threw off the wood, and carried the
bags into the house. They were emptied before his
wife, and the great heap of gold dazzled her eyes. Then
he told her the whole adventure, and warned her, above
all things, to keep it secret.
Ali Baba would not let her take the time to count it
out as she wished, but said, "I will dig a hole and bury
it."
"But let us know as nearly as may be," she said,
"how much we have. I will borrow a small measure,
and measure it, while you dig a hole."
Away she ran to the wife of Cassim, who lived near
by, and asked for a measure. The sister-in-law, know-
ing Ali Baba's poverty, was curious to learn what sort
of grain his wife wished to measure out, and artfully
managed to put some suet in the bottom of the measure
before she handed it over. AH Baba's wife wanted to
show how careful she was in small matters, and, after
she had measured the gold, hurried back, even while
her husband was burying it, with the borrowed measure,
never noticing that a coin had stuck to its bottom.
"What," said Cassim's wife, as soon as her sister-
in-law had left her, "has Ali Baba gold in such plenty
that he measures it? Whence has he all this wealth?"
And envy possessed her breast.
When Cassim came home she said to him, "Cassim,
you think yourself rich, but Ali Baba is much richer.
He does not count his money; he measures it." Then
she explained to him how she had found it out, and they
looked together at the piece of money, which was so old
317


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
that they could not tell in what prince's reign it was
coined.
Cassim, since marrying the rich widow, had never
treated Ali Baba as a brother, but neglected him. Now,
instead of being pleased, he was filled with a base
envy. Early in the morning, after a sleepless night, he
went to him and said, "Ali Baba, you pretend to be
wretchedly poor, and yet you measure gold. My wife
found this at the bottom of the measure you borrowed
yesterday."
Ali Baba saw that there was no use of trying to con-
ceal his good fortune, and told the whole story, offering
his brother part of the treasure to keep the secret.
"I expect as much," replied Cassim haughtily; "but
I must know just where this treasure is and how to visit
myself when I choose. Otherwise I will inform against
you, and you will lose even what you have now."
Al i Baba told him all he wished to know, even to the
words he must speak at the door of the cave.
Cassim rose before the sun the next morning, and set
out for the forest with ten mules bearing great chests
which he meant to fill. With little trouble he found the
rock and the door, and, standing before it, spoke the
words, "Open, Sesame." The door opened at once,
and when he was within closed upon him. Here indeed
were the riches of which his brother had told. He
quickly brought as many bags of gold as he could carry
to the door of the cavern; but his thoughts were so full of
his new wealth that he could not think of the word that
should let him out. Instead of "Sesame," he said,
"Open, Barley," and was much amazed to find that the
318


ALI BABA AND THE FORTY THIEVES
door remained fast shut. He named several sorts of
grain, but still the door would not open.
Cassim had never expected such a disaster, and was
so frightened that the more he tried to recall the word
"Sesame," the more confused his mind became. It
was as if he had never heard the word at all. He threw
down the bags in his hands, and walked wildly up and
down, without a thought of the riches lying round about
him.
At noon the robbers visited their cave. From afar
they saw Cassim's mules straggling about the rock, and
galloped full speed to the cave. Driving the mules out
of sight, they went at once, with their naked sabres in
their hands, to the door, which opened as soon as the
captain had spoken the proper words before it.
Cassim had heard the noise of the horses' feet, and
guessed that the robbers had come. He resolved to make
one effort for his life. As soon as the door opened, he
rushed out and threw the leader down, but could not
pass the other robbers, who with their scimitars soon
put him to death.
The first care of the robbers was to examine the cave.
They found all the bags Cassim had brought to the door,
but did not miss what Ali Baba had taken. As for Cas-
sim himself, they guessed rightly that, once within, he
could not get out again; but how he had managed to
learn their secret words that let him in, they could not
tell. One thing was certain — there he was; and to
warn all others who might know their secret and follow in
Cassim's footsteps, they agreed to cut his body into four
quarters — to hang two on one side and two on the other,
319


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
within the door of the cave. This they did at once, and
leaving the place of their hoards well closed, mounted
their horses and set out to attack the caravans they might
meet.
n
When night came, and Cassim did not return, his
wife became very uneasy. She ran to Ali Baba for
comfort, and he told her that Cassim would certainly
think it unwise to enter the town till night was well
advanced. By midnight Cassim's wife was still more
alarmed, and wept till morning, cursing her desire to
pry into the affairs of her brother and sister in law. In
the early day she went again, in tears, to Ali Baba.
He did not wait for her to ask him to go and see what
had happened to Cassim, but set out at once for the
forest with his three asses. Finding some blood at the
door of the cave, he took it for an ill omen; but when he
had spoken the words, and the door had opened, he
was struck with horror at the dismal sight of his brother's
body. He could not leave it there, and hastened within
to find something to wrap around it. Laying the body
on one of his asses, he covered it with wood. The other
two asses he loaded with bags of gold, covering them also
with wood as before. Then bidding the door shut, he
came away, but stopped some time at the edge of the
forest, that he might not go into the town before night.
When he reached home he left the two asses, laden with
gold, in his little yard for his wife to unload, and led the
other to his sister-in-law's house.
Ali Baba knocked at the door, which was opened by
320


ALI BABA AND THE FORTY THIEVES
Morgiana, a clever slave, full of devices to conquer dif-
ficulties. When he came into the court and unloaded
the ass, he took Morgiana aside, and said to her, —
"You must observe a strict secrecy. Your master's
body is contained in these two panniers. We must bury
him as if he had died a natural death. Go now and tell
your mistress. I leave the matter to your wit and skillful
devices." ,
They placed the body in Cassim's house, and, charg-
ing Morgiana to act well her part, Ali Baba returned
home with his ass.
Early the next morning, Morgiana went to a drug-
gist, and asked for a sort of lozenge used in the most
dangerous illness. When he asked her for whom she
wanted it, she answered with a sigh, "My good master
Cassim. He can neither eat nor speak." In the evening
she went to the same druggist, and with tears in her eyes
asked for an essence given to sick persons for whose life
there is little hope. "Alas!" said she, " I am afraid even
this will not save my good master."
All that day Al i Baba and his wife were seen going
sadly between their house and Cassim's, and in the
evening nobody was surprised to hear the shrieks and
cries of Cassim's wife and Morgiana, who told everybody
that her master was dead.
The next morning at daybreak she went to an old
cobbler, who was always early at work, and, putting a
piece of gold in his hand, said, —
"Baba Mustapha, you must bring your sewing tackle
and come with me; but I must tell you, I shall blindfold
you when we reach a certain place."
321


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
"Oh! oh!" replied he, "you would have me do some-
thing against my conscience or my honor."
"God forbid!" said Morgiana, putting another piece
of gold in his hand; "only come along with me, and fear
nothing."
Baba Mustapha went with Morgiana, and at a certain
place she bound his eyes with a handkerchief, which she
never unloosed till they had entered the room of her
master's house, where she had put the corpse together.
"Baba Mustapha," said she, "you must make haste,
and sew the parts of this body together, and when you
have done, I will give you another piece of gold."
After Baba Mustapha had finished his task, she blind-
folded him again, gave him the third piece of gold she
had promised, and, charging him with secrecy, took
him back to the place where she had first bound his
eyes. Taking off the bandage, she watched him till he
was out of sight, lest he should return and dog her; then
she went home.
At Cassim's house she made all things ready for the
funeral, which was duly performed by the imaun and
other ministers of the mosque. Morgiana, as a slave of
the dead man, walked in the procession, weeping, beating
her breast, and tearing her hair. Cassim's wife stayed
at home, utteripg doleful cries with the women of the
neighborhood, who, according to custom, came to mourn
with her. The whole quarter was filled with sounds of
sorrow.
Thus the manner of Cassim's death was hushed up,
and, besides his widow, Ali Baba, and Morgiana, the
slave, nobody in the city suspected the cause of it. Three
322


ALI BABA AND THE FORTY THIEVES
or four days after the funeral, Ali Baba removed his
few goods openly to his sister-in-law's house, in which
he was to live in the future; but the money he had taken
from the robbers was carried thither by night. As for
Cassim's warehouse, Al i Baba put it entirely under the
charge of his eldest son.
in
While all this was going on, the forty robbers again
visited their cave in the forest. Great was their surprise
to find Cassim's body taken away, with some of their
bags of gold.
"We are certainly found out," said the captain; "the
body and the money have been taken by some one else
who knows our secret. For our own lives' sake, we must
try and find him. What say you, my lads?"
The robbers all agreed that this must be done.
"Well," said the captain, "one of you, the boldest and
most skillful, must go to the town, disguised as a stranger,
and try if he can hear any talk of the man we killed, and
find out where he lived. This matter is so important
that the man who undertakes it and fails should suffer
death. What say you?"
One of the robbers, without waiting to know what the
rest might think, started up, and said, "I submit to this
condition, and think it an honor to expose my life to
serve the troop."
This won great praise from the robber's comrades,
and he disguised himself at once so that nobody could
take him for what he was. Just at daybreak he entered
the town, and walked up and down till he came by
323


ALI BABA AND THE FORTY THIEVES
robber and his captain came to the street, they found the
same trouble. The captain was enraged, and the robber
as much confused as the former guide had been. Thus
the captain and his troop went back again to the cave,
and the robber who had failed willingly gave himself up
to death.
IV
The captain could not afford to lose any more of his
brave fellows, and decided to take upon himself the
task in which two had failed. Like the others, he went
to Baba Mustapha, and was shown the house. Unlike
them he put no mark on it, but studied it carefully and
passed it so often that he could not possibly mistake it.
When he returned to the troop, who were waiting for
him in the cave, he said, —
"Now, comrades, nothing can prevent our full re-
venge, as I am certain of the house. As I returned I
thought of a way to do our work, but if any one thinks
of a better, let him speak."
He told them his plan, and, as they thought it good,
he ordered them to go into the villages about, and buy
nineteen mules, with thirty-eight large leather jars, one
full of oil and the others empty. Within two or three
days they returned with the mules and the jars, and as
the mouths of the jars were rather too narrow for the
captain's purpose, he caused them to be widened. Hav-
ing put one of his men into each jar, with the weapons
which he thought fit, and having a seam wide enough
open for each man to breathe, he rubbed the jars on the
outside with oil from the full vessel.
327


ALI BABA AND THE FORTY THIEVES
him his chamber, where he soon put out the light, and
laid himself down in his clothes.
To carry out Ali Baba's orders, Morgiana got his
bathing linen ready, and bade Abdalla to set on the pot
for the broth; but soon the lamp went out, and there was
no more oil in the house, nor any candles. She knew not
what to do, till the slave reminded her of the oil jars in
the yard. She thanked him for the thought, took the oil
pot, and went out. When she came nigh the first jar, the
robber within said softly, "Is it time?"
Of course she was surprised to find a man in the jar
instead of the oil, but she saw at once that she must keep
silence, as Ali Baba, his family, and she herself were in
great danger. Therefore she answered, without showing
any fear, "Not yet, but presently." In this manner she
went to all the jars and gave the same answers, till she
came to the jar of oil.
By this means Morgiana found that her master had
admitted to his house thirty-eight robbers, of whom the
pretended oil merchant, their captain, was one. She
made what haste she could to fill her oil pot, and re-
turned to her kitchen, lighted her lamp, and taking a
great kettle went back to the oil jar and filled it. Then
she set the kettle on a large wood fire, and as soon as it
boiled went and poured enough into every jar to stifle
and destroy the robber within.
When this deed, worthy of the courage of Morgiana,
was done without any noise, as she had planned, she re-
turned to the kitchen with the empty kettle, put out the
lamp, and left just enough of the fire to make the broth.
Then she sat silent, resolving not to go to rest till she had
329


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
seen through the window that opened on the yard what-
ever might happen there.
It was not long before the captain of the robbers got
up, and, seeing that all was dark and quiet, gave the
appointed signal by throwing little stones, some of which
hit the jars, as he doubted not by the sound they gave.
As there was no response, he threw stones a second and
a third time, and could not imagine why there was no
answer to his signal.
Much alarmed, he went softly down into the yard, and,
going to the first jar to ask the robber if he was ready,
smelt the hot boiled oil, which sent forth a steam out of
the jar. From this he suspected that his plot was found
out, and, looking into the jars one by one, he found that
all his gang were dead. Enraged to despair, he forced
the lock of a door that led from the yard to the garden,
and made his escape. When Morgiana saw him go, she
went to bed, well pleased that she had saved her master
and his family.
Ali Baba rose before day, and went to the baths with-
out knowing what had happened in the night. When
he returned he was very much surprised to see the oil
jars in the yard and the mules in the stable.
"God preserve you and all your family," said
Morgiana when she was asked what it meant; "you will
know better when you have seen what I have to show
you."
So saying she led him to the first jar, and asked him
to see if there was any oil. When he saw a man instead,
he started back in alarm.
"Do not be afraid," said Morgiana; "he can do
330


ALI BABA AND THE FORTY THIEVES
neither you nor anybody else the least harm. He is
dead. Now look into all the other jars."
Ali Baba was more and more amazed as he went on,
and saw all the dead men and the sunken oil jar at the
end. He stood looking from the jars to Morgiana, till
he found words to ask, "And what is become of the
merchant?"
"Merchant!" answered she; "he is as much one as I
am."
Then she led him into the house, and told of all that
she had done, from the first noticing of the chalkmark to
the death of the robbers and the flight of their captain.
On hearing of these brave deeds from Morgiana's own
lips, Al i Baba said to her, —
"God, by your means, has delivered me from death.
For the first token of what I owe you, I give you your
liberty from this moment till I can fully reward you as
I intend."
Near the trees at the end of Al i Baba's long garden, he
and Abdalla dug a trench large enough to hold the bodies
of the robbers. When they were buried there, Al i Baba
hid the jars and weapons; and as the mules were of no
use to him, he sent them at different times to be sold in
the market by bis slave.
V
•
The captain of the forty robbers had returned to his
cave in the forest, but found himself so lonely there that
the place became frightful to him. He resolved at the
same time to avenge the fate of his comrades and to
bring about the death of Ali Baba. For this purpose he
331


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
returned to the town, disguised as a merchant of silks.
By degrees he brought from his cavern many sorts of fine
stuffs, and to dispose of these he took a warehouse that
happened to be opposite Cassim's, which Ali Baba's son
had occupied since the death of his uncle.
He took the name of Cogia Houssain, and as a new-
comer was very civil to the merchants near him. Ali
Baba's son was one of the first to converse with him,
and the new merchant was most friendly. Within two
or three days Al i Baba came to see his son, and the
captain of the robbers knew him at once, and soon
learned from his son who he was. From that time
forth he was still more polite to Ali Baba's son, who
soon felt bound to repay the many kindnesses of his
new friend.
As his own house was small, he arranged with his
father that on a certain afternoon, when he and the
merchant were passing by Al i Baba's house they should
stop, and he should ask them both to sup with him.
This plan was carried out, though at first the merchant,
with whose own plans it agreed perfectly, made as if
to excuse himself. He even gave it as a reason for not
remaining that he could eat no salt in his victuals.
"If that is all," said Ali Baba, "it need not deprive
me of the honor of your company;" and he went to the
kitchen and told Morgiana to put no salt into anything
she was cooking that evening.
Thus Cogia Houssain was persuaded to stay, but to
Morgiana it seemed very strange that any one should
refuse to eat salt. She wished to see what manner of
man it might be, and to this end, when she had finished
332


ALI BABA AND THE FORTY THIEVES
what she had to do in the kitchen, she helped Abdalla
carry up the dishes. Looking at Cogia Houssain, she
knew him at first sight, in spite of his disguise, to be the
captain of the robbers, and, scanning him very closely,
saw that he had a dagger under his garment. .
"I see now why this greatest enemy of my master
would eat no salt with him. He intends to kill him; but
I will prevent him."
While they were at supper Morgiana made up her
mind to do one of the boldest deeds ever conceived.
She dressed herself like a dancer, girded her waist with
a silver-gilt girdle, from which hung a poniard, and put
a handsome mask on her face. Then, when the supper
was ended, she said to Abdalla, —
"Take your tabor, and let us go and divert our mas-
ter and his son's friend, as we sometimes do when he
is alone."
They presented themselves at the door with a low
bow, and Morgiana was bidden to enter and show
Cogia Houssain how well she danced. This, he knew,
would interrupt him in carrying out his wicked purpose,
but he had to make the best of it, and to seem pleased
with Morgiana's dancing. She was indeed a good
dancer, and on this occasion outdid herself in graceful
and surprising motions. At the last, she took the tabor
from Abdalla's hand, and' held it out like those who
dance for money.
Ali Baba put a piece of gold into it, and so did his son.
When Cogia Houssain saw that she was coming to him
he pulled out his purse from his bosom to make her a
present; but while he was putting his hand into it,
333


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
Morgiana, with courage worthy of herself, plunged the
poniard into his heart.
"Unhappy woman!" exclaimed Al i Baba, "what
have you done to ruin me and my family?"
"It jvas to preserve, not to ruin you," answered Mor-
giana. Then she showed the dagger in Cogia Houssain's
garment, and said, "Look well at him, and you will see
that he is both the pretended oil merchant and the
captain of the band of forty robbers. As soon as you
told me that he would eat no salt with you, I suspected
who it was, and when I saw him I knew."
Ali Baba embraced her, and said, "Morgiana, I
gave you your liberty before, and promised you more
in time; now I would make you my daughter-in-law.
Consider," he said, turning to his son, "that by mar-
rying Morgiana, you marry the preserver of my family
and yours."
The son was all the more ready to carry out his
father's wishes, because they were the same as his own,
and within a few days he and Morgiana were married,
but before this, the captain of the robbers was buried
with his comrades, and so secretly was it done, that their
bones were not found till many years had passed, when
no one had any concern in making this strange story
known.
For a whole year Ali Baba did not visit the robbers'
cave. At the end of that time, as nobody had tried to
disturb him, he made another journey to the forest,
and, standing before the entrance to the cave, said,
"Open, Sesame." The door opened at once, and from
the appearance of everything within the cavern, he
334


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE
SAILOR
IN the reign of the same Caliph, Haroun Al-Raschid,
of whom we have already heard, there lived at Bag-
dad a poor porter called Hindbad. One day, when the
weather was very hot, he was employed to carry a heavy
burden from one end of the town to the other. Being
much fatigued, he took off his load, and sat upon it, near
a large mansion.
He was much pleased that he stopped at this place,
for the air was completely filled with the pleasant scent
of wood of aloes and rose-water, wafted from the house.
Besides, he heard from within a concert of sweet music,
mixed with the notes of nightingales and other birds.
There was also the smell of several sorts of savory dishes,
and Hindbad was sure there must be a great feast within.
He knew not to whom the mansion belonged, and asked
one of the servants standing by the gate in rich apparel.
"How," replied the servant, " do you live in Bag-
dad, and know not that this is the house of Sindbad the
Sailor, the famous voyager who has sailed around the
world?"
The porter lifted up his eyes to heaven, and said,
loud enough to be heard, —
"Almighty Creator of all things, consider the differ-
ence between Sindbad and me! Every day I suffer fatigue
and distress, and can scarce get coarse barley bread
336


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
for myself and my family, whilst happy Sindbad freely
spends vast riches, and leads a life of unbroken pleasure.
What has he done to obtain from thee a lot so agreeable?
And what have I done to deserve one so wretched?"
While the porter was speaking thus, a servant came
out of the house, and, taking him by the arm, made him
enter, for Sindbad, his master, wanted to speak to him.
He was led into a great hall, where many people sat
round a table covered with all sorts of savory dishes. At
the upper end sat a comely, venerable gentleman, with a
long white beard, and behind him stood a number of
officers and servants, all ready to attend his pleasure.
This person was Sindbad. Hindbad was much abashed,
and saluted the company trembling. But Sindbad seated
him at his right hand and served him himself with ex-
cellent wine.
Now Sindbad had heard the porter's complaint
through the window, and this it was that led him to send
for Hindbad. When the feast was over, Sindbad ad-
dressed him, asking his name and employment, and
said, "I wish to hear from your own mouth what you
said just now in the street."
Hindbad hung his head in shame, and answered, —
"My lord, I confess that my fatigue put me out of
humor, and, for the rash words I uttered, I beg your
pardon."
"Do not think me so unjust," said Sindbad, "as to
resent them. But I must set you right about myself.
You think, no doubt, that I gained without labor or
trouble the ease I now enjoy. Do not mistake; before
attaining this estate I suffered for several years more
337


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
should all be lost; for what we took to be an island
proved to be the back of a sea monster. The nimblest got
into the sloop; others betook themselves to swimming; as
for me, I was still upon the island when it sank into the
sea, and I had only time to catch hold of a piece of wood
that we brought from the ship to make a fire. Meanwhile
the captain, having taken the others on board, resolved
to make the most of the favoring gale that had just risen,
and sailed away.
Thus was I left to the mercy of the waves for the rest
of the day and the night that followed. By this time I
found my strength gone, and was despairing of my life,
when happily a wave threw me against an island. The
bank was high and rugged, but some roots of trees helped
me to get up. When the sun arose, I was very feeble, but
managed to find some herbs that were fit to eat, and a
spring of good water. Thus refreshed, I advanced far-
ther into the island, and reached a fine plain, where I
saw some horses feeding. As I went towards them, I
heard the voice of a man who appeared and asked me
who I was. When I had told him my adventure, he led
me by the hand into a cave, where there were several
other people, no less amazed to see me than I was to see
them.
I partook of some food which they gave me, and then
learned that they were grooms belonging to the sovereign
of the island, where they brought the king's horses every
year for pasturage. They were to return home on the
morrow, and had I been one day later I must have per-
ished, because the inhabited part of the island was far
off, and I could never have reached it without a guide.
339


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
The next morning they took me to the capital of the
island, and presented me to the sovereign. When at his
request I told him of my misfortune, he was much con-
cerned, and gave orders that I should want for nothing;
and his commands were carefully fulfilled.
As a merchant I met with many men of my own pro-
fession, and sought news from Bagdad, and the oppor-
tunity to return; for the capital of the island has a fine
harbor, where ships arrive daily from many quarters of
the world. I took delight also in hearing the talk of
learned Indians, and withal paid my court to the sover-
eign, and met with the governors and petty kings that
were subject to him, telling and learning much.
There belongs to this king an island named Cassel,
where the mariners said that every night the noise of
drums might be heard. This wonderful place I visited,
and on the way thither saw fishes of one hundred and
two hundred cubits in length, that occasion more fear
than hurt; for they are so timid that they will fly upon
the rattling of two sticks or boards. I saw likewise other
fishes, about a cubit in length, that had heads like owls.
One day, as I was at the port after this visit, the ship
arrived in which I had embarked at Bussorah. I knew
the captain at once, and went and asked him for my
bales. "I am Sindbad," said I, " and those bales marked
with his name are mine."
"Heavens!" he exclaimed," whom can we trust in these
times? I saw Sindbad perish with my own eyes, and
now you tell this tale to possess yourself of what does
not belong to you."
But at length he was persuaded that I was no cheat,
340


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
formed a thick shade. I made a good meal, and after-
wards fell asleep. I cannot tell how long I slept, but
when I awoke the ship was gone.
In this sad plight, I was ready to die with grief. I
cried out«in agony, beat my head and breast, and threw
myself upon the ground, where I lay some time in
despair. Why was I not content with the produce of my
first voyage, which would have kept me in comfort all
my life? But it was too late to repent. At last I resigned
myself to the will of God. Not knowing what to do, I
climbed to the top of a lofty tree, where I could look
about on all sides for signs of hope. Towards the sea
there was nothing but sky and water. Looking over the
land, I saw something white, and, coming down, took
some of the food I had left, and went towards it, not
knowing at the great distance what it was.
As I drew near, I thought it to be a white dome of
enormous size; and when I touched it I found it to be
very smooth. There was no opening on any side, and
there was no climbing to the top over the smooth sur-
face. It was at least fifty paces round.
By this time the sun was about to set, and all of a
sudden the sky became as dark as if it had been cov-
ered with a thick cloud. I was amazed at this sudden
darkness, but much more when I found it was caused by
a bird of monstrous size that came flying towards me.
I remembered that I had often heard mariners speak of
a marvelous bird called the roc, and felt sure that the
great dome by which I stood must be its egg. In short,
the bird alighted and sat over the egg. As I saw her
coming, I crept close to the egg, so that I had before me
342


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
one of the legs of the bird, which was as big as the trunk
of a tree. I tied myself strongly to it with my turban, in
hopes that the roc next morning would carry me with
her out of this desert island. After having passed the
night in this condition, the bird flew away as soon as
it was daylight, and carried me so high that I could not
see the earth. Then she descended with so much speed
that I lost my senses. But when I found myself on the
ground, I quickly untied the knot, and had scarcely
done so when the roc, having taken up a serpent of
monstrous length in her bill, flew away.
The spot where I was left was surrounded on all sides
by mountains, that seemed to reach above the clouds,
and so steep that I could not possibly get out of the
valley. It seemed to me that the place was no better than
the desert island from which the roc had brought me.
As I walked through the valley, I found it strewed
with diamonds of a surprising bigness. But the pleasure
of looking at them was soon destroyed by another sight,
which filled me with terror, namely, a great number of
serpents, so monstrous that the least of them could swal-
low an elephant. In the daytime they hid in their dens
from their enemy, the roc, and came out only in the night.
I spent the day in walking about in the valley. When
night came I went into a cave where I thought I might
rest in safety. I closed the low and narrow entrance with
a great stone, to preserve me from the serpents, but did
not shut out all the light. Soon the serpents began hiss-
ing around me and put me in such extreme fear that
I could not sleep. When day appeared the serpents
retired, and I came out of the cave trembling. I can
343


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
justly say that I walked upon diamonds without feeling
any desire to touch them. At last I sat down, and ate
some of my food, and, in spite of my fears, fell asleep,
for I had not closed my eyes during the night. Scarcely
were they shut when something that fell by me with a
great noise awoke me. This was a large piece of raw
meat; and at the same time, I saw several others fall
down from the rocks in different places.
I had never believed what I had heard sailors and
others tell of the valley of diamonds, and of the means
employed by merchants to obtain jewels from it. But
now I found that I had heard the truth. For the fact is,
that merchants come to this valley when the eagles have
young ones, and throw great joints of meat into it; the
diamonds, upon whose points they fall, stick to them;
the eagles, which are stronger in this country than any-
where else, pounce with great force upon these pieces of
meat, and carry them to their nests on the edge of the
rocks to feed their young; then the merchants run to
their nests, drive off the eagles by their shouts, and take
away the diamonds that stick to the meat.
In this device I saw the means of my escape.
I gathered the largest diamonds I could find, and put
them into a leather bag fastened at my waist. Then I
took the largest of the pieces of meat, tied it close around
me with the cloth of my turban, and laid myself upon the
ground, with my face downwards. I had scarcely placed
myself thus when one of the eagles bore me, with the
piece of meat to which I was fastened, to his nest on
the top of the mountain. The merchants at once began
their shouting to frighten the eagles, and when they had
344


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
driven the birds away, one of them came to the nest
where I was. He was much alarmed when he first saw
me, but soon began to quarrel, and asked me why I
stole his goods.
"Do not be uneasy," said I; "here are diamonds
enough for you and me, more than all the others have
together. They have to take what chance brings them,
but I chose for myself, in the valley, those which you
see in this bag."
The other merchants now crowded around in amaze-
ment, and led me to their camp. When I showed them
the diamonds in my bag, they confessed that they had
never seen any of such size and beauty. I prayed the
merchant who owned the nest to which I was carried
(for every merchant had his own) to take for his share as
many as he pleased. He contented himself with one, and
that the least of them, and, when I urged him to take
more, said, —
"No, this will save me the trouble of making any
more voyages, and will raise as great a fortune as I
desire."
When each of the merchants was satisfied with the
diamonds which the eagles brought them, we left the
place, and traveled near high mountains, where there
were serpents of prodigious length, and from these we
had the good fortune to escape. We took ship at the first
port we reached, and touched at the Isle of Roha, where
the trees grow that yield camphor. Here also is found
the rhinoceros. This animal fights with the elephant, runs
his horn into his belly, and carries him off upon his head;
but when the blood and fat of the elephant run into his
345


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
Then he fell asleep, snoring louder than thunder. He
slept thus till morning. As to ourselves, it was not possi-
ble for us to enjoy any rest, and we passed the night in
the most painful fear. When day appeared the giant
awoke, went out, and left us in the palace.
The next night we revenged ourselves on the brutish
giant in the following manner. After he had finished his
inhuman supper on another of our seamen, he lay down
on his back and fell asleep. As soon as we heard him
snore, nine of the boldest among us, and I, took each of
us a spit, and, putting the points of them into the fire till
they were burning hot, we thrust them into his eye all at
once, and blinded him. The pain made him break out in
a frightful yell; he started up, and stretched out his hand
to seize and kill us; but we ran to such places as he could
not reach. After having sought for us in vain, he groped
for the gate, and went out, howling in agony.
We left the palace at once, and came to the shore,
where we made some rafts, each large enough to carry
three men. We waited till day before getting on them,
for we hoped that by morning the howling, which we
still heard, would cease, and that the giant would be
dead; and if that happened we meant to stay in the
island, and not to risk our lives upon the rafts. But day
had scarcely appeared when we saw our cruel enemy,
with two giants, almost of the same size, leading him;
and a great number were coming before him at a quick
pace.
We waited no longer to take to our rafts, and put to
sea with all the speed we could. The giants, seeing this,
took up great stones, and, running to the shore, entered
348


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
the water up to the middle, and threw so exactly that
they sank all the rafts but that I was upon; and all my
comrades, except the two with me, were drowned. We
rowed with all our might, and got out of the reach of the
giants. The next morning, after a night of fear, we were
thrown upon an island, where we landed with much joy,
and found good fruit, which refreshed us greatly.
At night we went to sleep on the seashore, but were
awakened by the noise of a serpent of surprising length
and thickness, whose scales made a rustling noise as it
moved itself along. It swallowed up one of my com-
rades, in spite of his loud cries and his efforts to save
himself. Dashing him several times against the ground,
it crushed him, and we could hear it gnaw and tear the
poor fellow's bones, though we had fled far off. The
next day, to our great terror, we saw the serpent again.
"O Heaven, to what dangers are we exposed!" I cried.
"We escape from a giant and the waves, only to meet
with this!"
The next night, having satisfied our hunger with
fruit, we mounted a tall tree, hoping to pass the night
in safety. But soon the serpent came hissing to its foot,
raised itself up against the trunk, and, reaching my
comrade, who sat lower than I, swallowed him at once
and went off.
In the morning when I came down, I was ready to
throw myself into the sea in my despair. But I re-
sisted this impulse, and collected a great quantity of
small wood, brambles, and dry thorns, and, making
them up into fagots, made a wide circle with them
round the tree, and also tied some of them to the branches
349


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
over my head. Within this circle I shut myself up when
night came, with such satisfaction as I could get from
having neglected nothing that could save me. The
serpent failed not to come at the usual hour, but was
prevented from reaching me by the rampart I had
made. He lay below me till day, like a cat watching in
vain for a mouse that has reached a place of safety.
When day appeared he retired, but I dared not to leave
my fort until the sun arose.
God took pity on my hopeless state, for, just as I was
about to cast myself into the sea, I saw a ship in the
distance. I cried aloud and waved the linen of my
turban. Then I was seen, and the captain sent his boat
for me. When I came on board, the merchants and sea-
men flocked about me to hear how I came into that
deserted island, in a region where cannibal giants and
serpents were known by the oldest sailors to abound.
When I stood before the captain in rags, he gave me one
of his own suits. Looking steadfastly upon him, I knew
him to be the person who, in my second voyage, had left
me in the island where I fell asleep, and sailed without
me or sending to seek for me.
"Captain," said I, "look at me, and you may know
that I am Sindbad, whom you left in that desert island."
"God be praised!" he cried, after he had scanned me
closely. "I rejoice that fortune has set right my fault.
There are your goods, which I always took care to
preserve." I took them from him, and thanked him for
his care of them.
We remained at sea for some time, touched at several
islands, and landed at last at the island of Salabat, where
350


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
"Those negroes," replied they, "eat men. By what
miracle did you escape?"
Then I told them what I have just told you, and they
were greatly surprised. When they had finished gather-
ing pepper, they took me with them to the island whence
they had come, and presented me to their king, who was
a good prince. He listened with surprise to the story of
my adventures, and gave me clothes, and commanded
that care be taken of me.
The island was well peopled, and the capital a place of
great trade. The prince treated me with much kindness,
and I, delighted with such a retreat after my misfortunes,
was soon looked upon rather as a native than as a
stranger. I observed one thing which seemed to me very
strange. All the people, even the king, rode horses with-
out bridle or stirrups. One day I found workmen who
made, under my directions, a saddle with stirrups
and a bit. These I presented to the king, who was so
pleased with them that he made me large presents.
I made several others for the ministers and chief
officers of his household, which gained me great repute
and regard.
One day the king, to whom I constantly paid court,
said,—
"Sindbad, I love thee; I have one thing to demand
of thee, which thou must grant. I have a mind thou
shouldst marry, that so thou mayst stay with us, and
think no more of thy own country."
I durst not resist the prince's will, and soon I was
married to one of the ladies of his court, noble, beautiful,
and rich. We lived together in perfect harmony, but I
353


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
could not forget Bagdad, and planned to make my
escape as soon as might be.
At this time the wife of one of my neighbors, with
whom I had made a very strict friendship, fell sick and
died. I went to comfort him in his sorrow, and said as
soon as I saw him, " God preserve you and grant you a
long life."
"Alas!" replied he, "how may that be? I have not
above an hour to live, for I must be buried this day with
my wife. That is a law in this island. The living hus-
band is buried with the dead wife, and the living wife
with the dead husband."
While he was telling me of this barbarous custom, the
very account of which chilled my blood, his kindred,
friends, and neighbors came to assist at the funeral.
They dressed the corpse of the woman in her richest
robes and all her jewels, as if it had been her wedding-
day; then they placed her on an open bier, and began
their march to the place of burial. The husband walked
first, next to the dead body. When they reached a high
mountain, they took up a large stone, which formed the
mouth of a deep pit, and let down the body with all its
apparel and jewels. Then the husband, embracing his
kindred and friends, let himself be placed on another
bier, with a pot of water, and seven small loaves, and was
led down in the same manner. The mouth of the pit was
again covered with the stone, and the company returned.
I describe all this the more carefully, because I in a
few weeks' time was to be the chief actor on a similar
occasion. Alas! my own wife fell sick and died. I made
every plea I could to the king not to expose me, a for-
354





PUBLIC LIBRARY


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
eigner, to this inhuman law. I appealed in vain. The
king and all his court, with the chief persons of the city,
sought to soften my sorrow by honoring the funeral
with their presence; and when the ceremony was finished
I was lowered into the pit with a vessel full of water and
seven loaves. As I neared the bottom, I saw, by the aid
of a little light that came from above, what sort of place
it was. It seemed an endless cavern, and might be about
fifty fathoms deep.
I lived for some time upon my bread and water, when
one day, just as I was nearly exhausted, I heard some-
thing tread, and breathing or panting as it moved. I
followed the sound. The animal seemed to stop some-
times, but always fled and breathed hard as I ap-
proached. I pursued it till at last I saw a light, like a
star. I went on, sometimes lost sight of it, but always
found it again, and at last discovered that it came through
a hole in the rock, which I got through, and found my-
self, to my great joy, upon the seashore. I fell upon the
shore to thank God for his mercy, and shortly after-
wards saw a ship making for the place where I was.
I made a sign with the linen of my turban, and called to
the crew as loud as I could. They heard me, and sent
a boat to bring me on board. It was fortunate for me
that they did not inspect the place where they found me,
but bore me away at once.
We passed by several islands, — the Isle of Bells,
Serendib, and Kela, where lead mines are found, also
Indian canes and excellent camphor. The people of
these places are so barbarous that they still eat human
flesh. We touched at several other ports, and finished
355


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
bade him get down. To that end, I stooped, that he
might get off with ease; but instead of doing so — and
I laugh every time I think of it — the old man, who to
me appeared quite feeble, threw his legs nimbly about
my neck. He sat astride upon my shoulders, and held
my throat so tight that I thought he would have strangled
me, and I fainted away.
In spite of my fainting, the ill-natured old fellow still
kept his seat upon my neck. When I got my breath
again, he thrust one of his feet against my side, and
struck me so rudely with the other, that he forced me to
rise up against my will. Then he made me carry him
under the trees, and obliged me now and then to stop,
that he might gather and eat fruit. He never left his seat
all day; and when I lay down to rest at night, he laid
himself down with me, holding still fast about my neck.
Every morning he pinched me to make me awake, and
afterwards forced me to get up and walk, and spurred me
with his feet.
One day I found several dry gourds that had fallen
from a tree. I took a large one, and, after cleaning it,
pressed into it some juice of grapes, which abounded in
the island. Having filled the gourd, I put it by, and,
going for it some days after, tasted and found the wine
so good that it gave me new vigor, and so raised my
spirits that I began to sing and dance as I carried my
burden.
The old man, noticing the effect of the wine upon me,
made me a sign to give him some of it. I handed him the
gourd, and, the liquor pleasing his palate, he drank it off.
As there was some quantity of it, he soon began to sing,
358


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
We set sail, and traded in various islands, at one of
which I hired divers and with other merchants went
a-pearl-fishing. Some of the pearls they brought me up
were very large and pure. Then I returned to Bagdad,
and gave a tenth of my gains in alms, and rested from
my fatigues.
THE SIXTH VOYAGE OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
I know, my friends, that you will wish to hear how,
after having been shipwrecked and having escaped so
many dangers, I could resolve again to tempt fortune,
and expose myself to new hardships. When I reflect
upon it now it seems that I must have been led by destiny,
from which none can escape. Be this as it may, after a
year's rest, I prepared for a sixth voyage, though my
kindred and friends did all in their power to dissuade me.
Once more I traveled through several provinces of
Persia and the Indies, and arrived at a seaport, where I
embarked on a ship bound on a long voyage, in which
the captain and the pilot lost their course. Suddenly we
saw the captain quit his rudder, lamenting loudly, pulling
his beard and beating his head like a madman. In reply
to our questions, he answered, —
"A rapid current carries the ship along with it, and we
shall all perish in less than a quarter of an hour. Pray
God to deliver us from this peril. We cannot escape, if
He does not take pity on us."
At these words he ordered the sails to be lowered, but
all the ropes broke, and the current carried the ship to
the foot of a mountain, where she struck and went to
360


THE STORY OF SINDBA*) THE SAILOR
pieces, but in such a way that we saved our lives, our
provisions, and the best of our goods.
The foot of the mountain was covered with wrecks,
with a vast number of human bones, and goods and
riches of all kinds beyond belief. In all other places it is
usual for rivers to run into the sea; but here a river of
fresh water runs from the sea into a dark cavern, with a
very high and spacious entrance. What is most strange
in this place is that the stones of the mountain are of
crystal, rubies, and other precious stones. Here also are
ambergris and wood of aloes.
It is not possible for ships to get off from this place
when once they approach within a certain distance. If
the wind is from the sea, this and the current drive them
on. If it is a land wind, it is stopped by the height of
the mountain, which causes a calm, so that the force
of the current carries them ashore. What is worse, it is
no more possible to ascend the mountain than to escape
by sea. Here we remained in a state of despair, expect-
ing death every day.
When we landed, we divided the food equally, and
thus each one lived a longer or shorter time, according
to the use he made of his share. I outlived my com-
rades, and, when I buried the last of them, had so little
food left that I dug a grave for myself. But God once
more took pity on me, and put it in my mind to go to
the bank of the river which ran into the cavern. I said
to myself, —
"This underground river must somewhere have an
outlet. If I make a raft, and leave myself to the current,
it will convey me to some inhabited country, or I shall
361


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
bales were opened in his presence, he marveled at what
they contained, above all at the rubies and emeralds,
which surpassed any in his treasury.
When I saw with what pleasure he viewed them, I
fell at his feet and said,—
"Sire, not only is my person at your majesty's ser-
vice, but the cargo of the raft, and I beg of you to dis-
pose of it as your own."
But he would take none of my goods, and promised
that I should leave his realm richer than I came. His
officers were charged to serve me at his expense, and
every day I paid the king my court, and saw what was
most worthy of notice in the city. By way of devotion I
made a pilgrimage to the place where Adam was con-
fined after his banishment from Paradise.
Then I prayed the king to allow me to return to my
own country, and his permission was most kindly given.
He would force a rich present upon me; and at the same
time charged me with a letter for the Commander of the
Faithful, our sovereign, saying to me, "I pray you give
this present for me, and this letter, to the Caliph Haroun
Al-Raschid, and assure him of my friendship."
The letter from the king of Serendib was written on
the skin of a certain animal of great value, very scarce,
and of a yellowish color. The characters of the letter
were of azure, and the contents as follows: —
"The king of the Indies, before whom march one
hundred elephants, who lives in a palace that shines with
one hundred thousand rubies, and who has in his treasury
twenty thousand crowns enriched with diamonds, to
Caliph Haroun Al-Raschid.
363


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
"Though the present we send you be slight, receive it
as a brother and friend, in token of the hearty friend-
ship we bear for you, and of which we are willing to give
you proof. We desire the same part in your friendship,
since we believe it to be our merit, for we are both kings.
We send you this letter as from one brother to another.
Farewell."
The present consisted of one ruby made into a cup,
about half a foot high, an inch thick, and filled with
round pearls of half a drachm each; and the skin of a
serpent, whose scales were as bright as a piece of gold,
and preserved from sickness those who lay upon it;
besides a vast quantity of the best quality of wood of
aloes and camphor, and a female slave of great beauty,
whose robe was covered over with jewels.
As soon as I reached Bagdad I presented myself before
the Caliph with the letter and gift. When he had read
the letter he asked if the king of Serendib were indeed
so rich and potent, and, bowing to his feet, I assured him
that it was all true, and told him in what state the prince
appeared in public, with a throne on the back of an ele-
phant, surrounded by officers and a guard of a thousand
men.
"The officer who is before on his elephant," I said,
"cries from time to time with a loud voice, 'Behold the
great monarch, the mighty Sultan of the Indies, greater
than Solomon.' Then the officer behind the throne cries
in his turn,'This monarch, so great and powerful, must
die, must die, must die.' And the officer before him
replies, 'Praise alone be to Him who liveth for ever and
ever.'"
364


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
The Caliph was much pleased with my account, and
sent me home with a rich present.
THE SEVENTH AND LAST VOYAGE OF SINDBAD THE
SAILOR
After my sixth voyage I had given up all thoughts of
going to sea again, for my age required rest, and I wished
to expose myself to no more risks, but to pass the rest of
my days in peace. One day, however, an officer from
the palace came and said the Caliph must speak to me.
"Sindbad," said he, when I had bowed to the floor
before the throne, "I stand in need of your service; you
must carry my answer and present to the king of Seren-
dib."
This command was to me like a clap of thunder.
Though I had made a vow never to leave Bagdad, I
saw that I must obey. The Caliph was well pleased, and
ordered me a sum of money ample for my needs.
In a few days I departed with the letter and present,
and, after a safe voyage, reached the isle of Serendib.
"Sindbad," said the king, when I was brought before
him with great pomp, and had bowed to the earth, "you
are welcome; I have many times thought of you. I bless
the day on which I see you once more."
I thanked him for his kindness, and delivered the
gifts from my august master. The Caliph's letter was
as follows: —
"Greeting, in the name of the Sovereign Guide of the
Right Way, from the Servant of God.HarounAl-Raschid,
whom God hath set in the place of viceregent to his
365


THE ARABIAN NIGHTS
Prophet, after his ancestors of happy memory, to the
potent and esteemed king of Serendib.
"We received your letter with joy, and send you this
from our imperial residence, the garden of superior wits.
We hope when you look upon it you will perceive our
good will, and be pleased with it. Farewell."
The Caliph's present was a complete suit of cloth of
gold, fifty robes of rich stuff, a hundred of white cloth,
the finest of Cairo, Suez, and Alexandria; a vessel of
agate, half a foot wide, on the bottom of which was
carved a man with one knee on the ground, who held a
bow and an arrow, ready to discharge at a lion. He sent
also a rich tablet, which, according to tradition, belonged
to the great Solomon.
The king of Serendib was highly pleased. Soon I
obtained leave to depart, though not easily. Dismissed
with a large present, I sailed at once for Bagdad, but had
not the good fortune to arrive there so soon as I had
hoped. God ordered it otherwise.
Three or four days after sailing, we were attacked by
pirates. Some of the crew were killed, and I, with others
who did not resist, was taken to a remote island and sold.
I fell into the hands of a rich merchant, who treated
me well, and dressed me handsomely as a slave. In a
few days he asked me if I knew any trade. I told him I
was a merchant, robbed of all I possessed. "Tell me,"
said he, "can you shoot with a bow?" I said it had been
one of the exercises of my youth. Then he gave me a
bow and arrow, took me behind him on an elephant, and
carried me to a thick forest. Stopping before a great
tree, he said, " Climb up that, and shoot at the elephants,
366


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
of which there are many in this forest, as you see them
pass by, and if any of them fall, come and give me no-
tice." Then he left me, and returned to the town, and
I remained upon the tree all night.
In the morning I shot one of the many elephants that
passed under the tree, and when the others had left it
dead, I went into the town and told my patron of my
success, which pleased him greatly. Then we returned,
and dug a hole for the elephant, in which my patron
meant to leave it until it was rotten, when he would take
its teeth and trade with them.
For two months I did this service. One morning I was
amazed to see that the elephants, instead of passing by,
stopped and came towards my tree with a horrible noise,
in such numbers that the plain was covered, and shook
under them. They surrounded the tree, with their
trunks uplifted, and all fixed their eyes upon me. This
frightened me so that my bow and arrows fell out of my
hand.
My fears were not without cause, for soon one of the
largest of the elephants put his trunk round the foot of
the tree, plucked it up, and threw it on the ground. I
fell with the tree, and the elephant, taking me up with
his trunk, laid me on his back, where I sat more like one
dead than alive. He put himself at the head of the rest,
who followed him in line, carried me some distance,
then laid me down on the ground, and retired with all the
others. When they were gone, I got up, and found that
I was upon a long and broad hill, almost covered with
the bones and teeth of elephants. I doubted not but that
this was their burial place, and that they carried me
367


THE STORY OF SINDBAD THE SAILOR
Sindbad here finished the story of his seventh and last
voyage. "Well, friend," he said, turning to Hindbad,
"did you ever hear of any person that suffered so much
as I have done? Is it not just that after all this I should
enjoy a quiet and pleasant life?"
Hindbad in answer kissed his hand and said, "Sir,
my pains are not to be compared with yours. You not
only deserve a quiet life, but are worthy of all the riches
you possess, since you make so good a use of them. May
you live happily for a long time."
Sindbad ordered another purse of money to be given
him, and told him to give up carrying burdens as a porter,
and to eat henceforth at his table; for he wished Hindbad
to remember all his life that he had a friend in Sindbad
the Sailor.


THE TRAVELS OF BARON MUN-
CHAUSEN


PUBLIC LIB
|tlluln found
ft


THE BARON'S FIRST WANDERINGS
were received with great marks of friendship and true
politeness. The following singular adventures may not
prove unentertaining.
After we had resided at Ceylon about a fortnight I
accompanied one of the governor's brothers upon a
shooting party. He was a strong, athletic man, and
being used to that climate (for he had resided there some
years), he bore the violent heat of the sun much better
than I could; in our excursion he had made a consider-
able progress through a thick wood when I was only at
the entrance.
Near the banks of a large piece of water, which had
engaged my attention, I thought I heard a rustling noise
behind; on turning about I was almost petrified (as who
would not be?) at the sight of a lion, which was evi-
dently approaching with the intention of satisfying his
appetite with my poor carcass, and that without asking
my consent. What was to be done in this horrible
dilemma? I had not even a moment for reflection; my
piece was only charged with swan shot, and I had no
other about me; however, though I could have no idea
of killing such an animal with that weak kind of ammu-
nition, yet I had some hopes of frightening him by the
report, and perhaps of wounding him also. I immedi-
ately let fly, without waiting till he was within reach, and
the report did but enrage him, for he now quickened
his pace, and seemed to approach me full speed. I
attempted to escape, but that only added (if an addition
could be made) to my distress; for the moment I turned
about I found a large crocodile, with his mouth ex-
tended almost ready to receive me. On my right hand
375


TRAVELS OF BARON MUNCHAUSEN
was the piece of water before mentioned, and on my left
a deep precipice, said to have, as I have since learned,
a receptacle at the bottom for venomous creatures; in
short, I gave myself up as lost, for the lion was now upon
his hind legs, just in the act of seizing me; I fell invol-
untarily to the ground with fear, and, as it afterwards
appeared, he sprang over me. I lay some time in a
situation which no language can describe, expecting to
feel his teeth or talons in some part of me every moment;
after waiting in this prostrate situation a few seconds I
heard a violent but unusual noise, different from any
sound that had ever before assailed my ears; nor is it at
all to be wondered at, when I inform you from whence
it proceeded: after listening for some time, I ventured to
raise my head and look round, when, to my unspeakable
joy, I perceived the lion had, by the eagerness with
which he sprung at me, jumped forward, as I fell, into
the crocodile's mouth! which, as before observed, was
wide open; the head of the one stuck in the throat of the
other! and they were struggling to extricate themselves!
I fortunately recollected my couteau de chasse, which was
by my side; with this instrument I severed the lion's head
at one blow, and the body fell at my feet! I then, with
the butt end of my fowling-piece, rammed the head far-
ther into the throat of the crocodile, and destroyed him
by suffocation, for he could neither gorge nor eject it.
Soon after I had thus gained a complete victory over
my two powerful adversaries my companion arrived in
search of me; for finding I did not follow him into the
wood, he returned, apprehending I had lost my way or
met with some accident.
376


THE BARON'S FIRST WANDERINGS
After mutual congratulations, we measured the croco-
dile, which was just forty feet in length.
As soon as we had related this extraordinary adven-
ture to the governor, he sent a wagon and servants, who
brought home the two carcasses. The lion's skin was
properly preserved, with its hair on, after which it was
made into tobacco pouches, and presented by me, upon
our return to Holland, to the burgomasters, who, in
return, requested my acceptance of a thousand ducats.
The skin of the crocodile was stuffed in the usual
manner, and makes a capital article in their public
museum at Amsterdam, where the exhibitor relates the
whole story to each spectator, with such additions as
he thinks proper. Some of his variations are rather
extravagant; one of them is that the crocodile turned
about, snatched the couteau de chasse out of Monsieur's
hand, and swallowed it with such eagerness that it
pierced his heart and killed him immediately!
The little regard which this impudent knave has to
veracity makes me sometimes apprehensive that my
real facts may fall under suspicion, by being found in
company with his inventions.


THE BARON'S JOURNEY TO
ST. PETERSBURG
By Rodolph Eric Raspe
ISET off from Rome on a journey to Russia, in the
midst of winter, from a just notion that frost and
snow must of course mend the roads, which every traveler
had described as uncommonly bad through the northern
parts of Germany, Poland, Courland, and Livonia. I
went on horseback, as the most convenient manner of
traveling; I was but lightly clothed, and of this I felt
the inconvenience the more I advanced northeast. What
must not a poor old man have suffered in that severe
weather and climate, whom I saw on a bleak common
in Poland, lying on the road, helpless, shivering, and
hardly having wherewithal to cover his nakedness? I
pitied the poor soul; though I felt the severity of the air
myself, I threw my mantle over him, and immediately I
heard a voice from the heavens, blessing me for that
piece of charity, saying, —
"You will be rewarded, my son, for this in time."
I went on: night and darkness overtook me. No
village was to be seen. The country was covered with
snow, and I was unacquainted with the road.
Tired, I alighted, and fastened my horse to something
like a pointed stump of a tree, which appeared above
the snow; for the sake of safety I placed my pistols under
my arm, and lay down on the snow, where I slept so
378


TRAVELS OF BARON MUNCHAUSEN
It placed me so high in their opinion, and so well in that
of the noble lord, that, with his usual politeness, he
begged I would accept of this young horse, and ride
him full career to conquest and honor in the campaign
against the Turks, which was soon to be opened, under
the command of Count Munich.
I could not indeed have received a more agreeable
present, nor a more ominous one at the opening of that
campaign, in which I made my apprenticeship as a sol-
dier. A horse so gentle, so spirited, and so fierce — at
once a lamb and a Bucephalus — put me always in mind
of the soldier's and the gentleman's duty, of young
Alexander, and of the astonishing things he performed
in the field.
We took the field, among several other reasons, it
seems, with an intention to retrieve the character of the
Russian arms, which had been blemished a little by
Czar Peter's last campaign on the Pruth; and this we
fully accomplished by several very fatiguing and glorious
campaigns under the command of that great general I
mentioned before.
Modesty forbids individuals to arrogate to themselves
great successes or victories, the glory of which is gen-
erally engrossed by the commander — nay, which is
rather awkward, by kings and queens who never smelled
gunpowder but at the field days and reviews of their
troops; never saw a field of battle, or an enemy in battle
array.
Nor do I claim any particular share of glory in the
great engagements with the enemy. We all did our duty,
which, in the patriot's, soldier's, and gentleman's lan-
382


TRAVELS OF BARON MUNCHAUSEN
to stop in the market-place, to order the men to rendez-
vous. I stopped, gentlemen; but judge of my astonish-
ment when in this market-place I saw not one of my
hussars about me! Are they scouring the other streets?
or what is become of them? They could not be far off,
and must, at all events, soon join me. In that expecta-
tion I walked my panting Lithuanian to a spring in this
market-place and let him drink. He drank uncommonly,
with an eagerness not to be satisfied, but natural enough;
for when I looked round for my men, what should I see,
gentlemen! the hind part of the poor creature —- croup
and legs were missing, as if he had been cut in two, and
the water ran out as it came in, without refreshing or
doing him any good! How it could have happened was
quite a mystery to me, till I returned with him to the
town gate. There I saw that when I rushed in pell-mell
with the flying enemy, they had dropped the portcullis
(a heavy falling door, with sharp spikes at the bottom,
let down suddenly to prevent the entrance of an enemy
into a fortified town) unperceived by me, which had
totally cut off his hind part, that still lay quivering on the
outside of the gate. It would have been an irreparable
loss, had not our farrier contrived to bring both parts
together while hot. He sewed them up with sprigs and
young shoots of laurels that were at hand; the wound
healed, and, what could not have happened but to so
glorious a horse, the sprigs took root in his body, grew
up, and formed a bower over me; so that afterwards I
could go upon many other expeditions in the shade of
my own and my horse's laurels.


THE BARON'S COLD DAY
By Rodolph Eric Raspe
SUCCESS was not always with me. I had the mis-
fortune to be overpowered by numbers, to be made
prisoner of war; and, what is worse, but always usual
among the Turks, to be sold for a slave. In that state of
humiliation my daily task was not very hard and labo-
rious, but rather singular and irksome. It was to drive
the Sultan's bees every morning to their pasture grounds,
to attend them all the day long, and against night to drive
them back to their hives. One evening I missed a bee,
and soon observed that two bears had fallen upon her
to tear her to pieces for the honey she carried. I had
nothing like an offensive weapon in my hands but the sil-
ver hatchet which is the badge of the Sultan's gardeners
and farmers. I threw it at the robbers, with an intention
to frighten them away, and set the poor bee at liberty;
but by an unlucky turn of my arm, it flew upwards, and
continued rising till it reached the moon. How should I
recover it? how fetch it down again? I recollected that
Turkey beans grow very quick, and run up to an aston-
ishing height. I planted one immediately; it grew, and
actually fastened itself to one of the moon's horns. I had
no more to do now but to climb up by it into the moon,
where I safely arrived, and had a troublesome piece of
business before I could find my silver hatchet, in a place
385


TRAVELS OF BARON MUNCHAUSEN
where everything has the brightness of silver; at last,
however, I found it in a heap of chaff and chopped straw.
I was now for returning: but, alas! the heat of the sun had
dried up my bean; it was totally useless for my descent;
so I fell to work, and twisted me a rope of that chopped
straw, as long and as well as I could make it. This I
fastened to one of the moon's horns, and slid down to the
end of it. Here I held myself fast with the left hand, and
with the hatchet in my right, I cut the long, now useless,
end of the upper part, which, when tied to the lower end,
brought me a good deal lower: this repeated splicing and
tying of the rope did not improve its quality, or bring
me down to the Sultan's farm. I was four or five miles
from the earth at least when it broke; I fell to the ground
with such amazing violence that I found myself stunned,
and in a hole nine fathoms deep at least, made by the
weight of my body falling from so great a height: I re-
covered, but knew not how to get out again; however, I
dug slopes or steps with my finger nails (the baron's
nails were then of forty years' growth), and easily ac-
complished it.
Peace was soon after concluded with the Turks, and
gaining my liberty, I left St. Petersburg at the time
of that singular revolution when the emperor in his
cradle, his mother, the duke of Brunswick, her father,
Field-marshal Munich, and many others were sent to
Siberia. The winter was then so uncommonly severe all
over Europe that ever since the sun seems to be frost-
bitten. At my return to this place, I felt on the road
greater inconveniences than those I had experienced
on my setting out.
386


THE COMEDY OF ERRORS
By Charles and Mary Lamb
THE states of Syracuse and Ephesus being at vari-
ance, there was a cruel law made at Ephesus, or-
daining that if any merchant of Syracuse was seen in the
city of Ephesus, he was to be put to death, unless he
could pay a thousand marks for the ransom of his life.
iEgeon, an old merchant of Syracuse, was discovered
in the streets of Ephesus and brought before the duke,
either to pay this heavy fine or to receive sentence of
death.
JEgeon had no money to pay the fine, and the duke,
before he pronounced the sentence of death upon him,
desired him to relate the history of his life, and to tell
for what cause he had ventured to come to the city of
Ephesus, which it was death for any Syracusan mer-
chant to enter.
iEgeon said that he did not fear to die, for sorrow
had made him weary of his life, but that a heavier task
could not have been imposed upon him than to relate
the event of his unfortunate life. He then began his
own history, in the following words: —
"I was born at Syracuse, and brought up to the pro-
fession of a merchant. I married a lady with whom
I lived very happily, but being obliged to go to Epi-
damnum, I was detained there by my business six
391


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
months, and then, finding I should be obliged to stay
some time longer, I sent for my wife, who, as soon as
she arrived, was brought to bed of two sons, and what
was very strange, they were both so exactly alike that
it was impossible to distinguish the one from the other.
At the same time that my wife was brought to bed of
these twin boys, a poor woman in the inn where my
wife lodged was brought to bed of two sons, and these
twins were as much like each other as my two sons were.
The parents of these children being exceeding poor, I
bought the two boys, and brought them up to attend
upon my sons.
"My sons were very fine children, and my wife was
not a little proud of two such boys; and she daily wishing
to return home, I unwillingly agreed, and in an evil
hour we got on shipboard; for we had not sailed above a
league from Epidamnum before a dreadful storm arose,
which continued with such violence that the sailors,
seeing no chance of saving the ship, crowded into the
boat to save their own lives, leaving us alone in the ship,
which we every moment expected would be destroyed
by the fury of the storm.
"The incessant weeping of my wife, and the piteous
complaints of the pretty babes, who not knowing what
to fear, wept for fashion, because they saw their mother
weep, filled me with terror for them, though I did not
for myself fear death; and all my thoughts were bent to
contrive means for their safety. I tied my younger son
to the end of a small spare mast, such as seafaring men
provide against storms; at the other end I bound the
younger of the twin slaves, and at the same time I
392


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
wards, I landed here in Ephesus, being unwilling to
leave any place unsought that harbors men; but this
day must end the story of my life, and happy should I
think myself in my death, if I were assured my wife and
sons were living."
Here the hapless iEgeon ended the account of his mis-
fortunes; and the duke, pitying this unfortunate father
who had brought upon himself this great peril by his
love for his lost son, said, if it were not against the
laws, which his oath and dignity did not permit him
to alter, he would freely pardon him; yet, instead of
dooming him to instant death, as the strict letter of the
law required, he would give him that day to try if he
could beg or borrow the money to pay the fine.
This day of grace did seem no great favor to iEgeon,
for not knowing any man in Ephesus, there seemed to
him but little chance that any stranger would lend or
give him a thousand marks to pay the fine; and help-
less and hopeless of any relief, he retired from the
presence of the duke in the custody of a jailer.
iEgeon supposed he knew no person in Ephesus; but
at the very time he was in danger of losing his life
through the careful search he was making after his
youngest son, that son and his eldest son also were both
in the city of Ephesus.
iEgeon's sons, besides being exactly alike in face and
person, were both named alike, being both called Anti-
pholus, and the two twin slaves were also both named
Dromio. iEgeon's youngest son, Antipholus of Syra-
cuse, he whom the old man had come to Ephesus to
seek, happened to arrive at Ephesus with his slave
394


THE COMEDY OF ERRORS
much alike as Mgeon had said they were in their infancy;
therefore no wonder Antipholus thought it was his own
slave returned, and asked him why he came back so
soon. Dromio replied, " My mistress sent me to bid you
come to dinner. The capon burns, and the pig falls
from the spit, and the meat will be all cold if you do not
come home." "These jests are out of season," said
Antipholus, "where did you leave the money?" Dro-
mio still answering that his mistress had sent him to
fetch Antipholus to dinner, "What mistress?" said
Antipholus. "Why, your worship's wife, sir," replied
Dromio. Antipholus having no wife, he was very angry
with Dromio, and said, "Because I familiarly some-
times chat with you, you presume to jest with me in
this free manner. I am not in a sportive humor now.
Where is the money? we being strangers here, how dare
you trust so great a charge from your own custody?"
Dromio hearing his master, as he thought him, talk of
their being strangers, supposed Antipholus was jesting,
and replied merrily, "I pray you, sir, jest as you sit at
dinner: I had no charge but to fetch you home, to dine
with my mistress and her sister." Now Antipholus lost
all patience, and beat Dromio, who ran home, and told
his mistress that his master had refused to come to
dinner, and said that he had no wife.
Adriana, the wife of Antipholus of Ephesus, was very
angry, when she heard that her husband said he had no
wife; for she was of a jealous temper, and she said her
husband meant that he loved another lady better than
herself; and she began to fret and say unkind words of
jealousy and reproach of her husband; and her sister
397


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
Luciana, who lived with her, tried in vain to persuade
her out of her groundless suspicions.
Antipholus of Syracuse went to the inn and found
Dromio with the money in safety there, and seeing his
own Dromio, he was going again to chide him for his
free jests, when Adriana came up to him, and not doubt-
ing but it was her husband she saw, she began to re-
proach him for looking strange upon her (as well he
might, never having seen this angry lady before); and
then she told him how well he loved her before they were
married, and that now he loved some other lady instead
of her. "How comes it now, my husband," said she,
"oh, how comes it that I have lost your love?" "Plead
you to me, fair dame?" said the astonished Antipholus.
It was in vain he told her he was not her husband, and
that he had been in Ephesus but two hours; she insisted
on his going home with her, and Antipholus at last being
unable to get away, went with her to his brother's house,
and dined with Adriana and her sister, — the one calling
him hubsand and the other brother; he, all amazed,
thinking he must have been married to her in his sleep,
or that he was sleeping now. And Dromio, who followed
them, was no less surprised, for the cookmaid, who was
his brother's wife, also claimed him for her husband.
While Antipholus of Syracuse was dining with his
brother's wife, his brother, the real husband, returned
home to dinner with his slave Dromio; but the servants
would not open the door, because their mistress had
ordered them not to admit any company; and when they
repeatedly knocked, and said they were Antipholus and
Dromio, the maids laughed at them, and said that Anti-
398


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
arresting the goldsmith, who, when he saw Antipholus,
asked him to pay for the gold chain he had just delivered
to him, the price amounting to nearly the same sum
as that for which he had been arrested. Antipholus
denying having received the chain, and the goldsmith
persisting to declare that he had but a few minutes before
given it to him, they disputed this matter a long time,
both thinking they were right: for Antipholus knew the
goldsmith never gave him the chain, and, so like were the
two brothers, the goldsmith was as certain he had de-
livered the chain into his hands, till at last the officer
took the goldsmith away to prison for the debt he owed,
and at the same time the goldsmith made the officer
arrest Antipholus for the price of the chain;so that at
the conclusion of their dispute, Antipholus and the mer-
chant were both taken away to prison together.
As Antipholus was going to prison, he met Dromio
of Syracuse, his brother's slave, and mistaking him for
his own, he ordered him to go to Adriana his wife, and
tell her to send the money for which he was arrested.
Dromio, wondering that his master should send him
back to the strange house where he dined, and from
which he had just before been in such haste to depart,
did not dare to reply, though he came to tell his master
the ship was ready to sail; for he saw Antipholus was in
no humor to be jested with. Therefore he went away,
grumbling within himself, that he must return to Adri-
ana's house, "Where," said he, "Dowsabel claims me
for a husband: but I must go, for servants must obey
their masters' commands."
Adriana gave him the money, and as Dromio was
400


THE COMEDY OF ERRORS
returning, he met Antipholus of Syracuse, who was
still in amaze at the surprising adventures he met with;
for his brother being well known in Ephesus, there w?s
hardly a man he met in the streets but saluted him as an
old acquaintance: some offered him money which they
said was owing to him, some invited him to come and
see them, and others gave him thanks for kindnesses
they said he had done them, all mistaking him for his
brother. A tailor showed him some silks he had bought
for him, and insisted upon taking measure of him for
some cldthes.
Antipholus began to think he was among a nation of
sorcerers and witches, and Dromio did not at all relieve
his master from his bewildered thoughts, by asking
him how he got free from the officer who was carrying
him to prison, and giving him the purse of gold which
Adriana had sent to pay the debt with. This talk of
Dromio's of the arrest and of a prison, and of the money
he had brought from Adriana, perfectly confounded
Antipholus, and he said, "This fellow Dromio is cer-
tainly distracted, and we wander here in illusions;"
and quite terrified at his own confused thoughts, he
cried out, "Some blessed power deliver us from this
strange place!"
And now another stranger came up to him, and she
was a lady, and she too called him Antipholus, and
told him he had dined with her that day, and asked him
for a gold chain which she said he had promised to give
her. Antipholus now lost all patience, and calling her a
sorceress, he denied that he had ever promised her a
chain, or dined with her, or had even seen her face
401


THE COMEDY OF ERRORS
supposed (taking his brother for him), he denied, and
said he did not know her, and left her in such a wild
passion, she began to think he was certainly out of his
senses; and presently she resolved to go and tell Adriana
that her husband was mad. And while she was telling it
to Adriana, he came, attended by the jailer (who allowed
him to come home to get the money to pay the debt), for
the purse of money, which Adriana had sent by Dromio,
and he had delivered to the other Antipholus.
Adriana believed the story the lady told her of her
husband's madness must be true when he reproached
her for shutting him out of his own house; and re-
membering how he had protested all dinner time that he
was not her husband, and had never been in Ephesus
till that day, she had no doubt that he was mad; she
therefore paid the jailer the money, and having dis-
charged him, she ordered her servants to bind her
husband with ropes, and had him conveyed into a dark
room, and sent for a doctor to come and cure him of
his madness: Antipholus all the while hotly exclaiming
against this false accusation, which the exact likeness
he bore to his brother had brought upon him. But his
rage only the more confirmed them in the belief that he
was mad; and Dromio persisting in the same story,
they bound him also, and took him away along with his
master.
Soon after Adriana had put her husband into con-
finement, a servant came to tell her that Antipholus and
Dromio must have broken loose from their keepers,
for that they were both walking at liberty in the next
street. On hearing this, Adriana ran out to fetch him
403


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
Luciana would have excused her sister, saying, she
always reprehended her husband mildly; and she said
to her sister, "Why do you hear these rebukes without
answering them?" But the abbess had made her so
plainly perceive her fault, that she could only answer,
"She has betrayed me to my own reproof."
Adriana, though ashamed of her own conduct, still
insisted on having her husband delivered up to her; but
the abbess would suffer no person to enter her house, nor
would she deliver up this unhappy man to the care of the
jealous wife, determining herself to use gentle means for
his recovery, and she retired into her house again, and
ordered her gates to be shut against them.
During the course of this eventful day, in which so
many errors had happened from the likeness the twin
brothers bore to each other, old iEgeon's day of grace
was passing away, it being now near sunset; and at
sunset he was doomed to die, if he could not pay the
money.
The place of his execution was near this convent, and
here he arrived just as the abbess retired into the con-
vent; the duke attending in person, that if any offered
to pay the money, he might be present to pardon him.
Adriana stopped this melancholy procession and cried
out to the duke for justice, telling him that the abbess
had refused to deliver up her lunatic husband to her care.
While she was speaking, her real husband and his ser-
vant Dromio, who had got loose, came before the duke to
demand justice, complaining that his wife had confined
him on a false charge of lunacy, and telling in what
manner he had broken his bands, and eluded the vigi-
406


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
setting sun went down was brought to a happy conclu-
sion, for the venerable lady abbess made herself known
to be the long-lost wife of Mgeon, and the fond mother
of the two Antipholuses.
When the fisherman took the eldest Antipholus and
Dromio away from her, she entered a nunnery, and by
her wise and virtuous conduct she was at length made
lady abbess of this convent, and in discharging the rites
of hospitality to an unhappy stranger she had un-
knowingly protected her own son.
Joyful congratulations and affectionate greetings be-
tween these long separated parents and their children
made them for a while forget that iEgeon was yet under
sentence of death; but when they were become a little
calm, Antipholus of Ephesus offered the duke the ran-
som money for his father's life; but the duke freely par-
doned JEgeon, and would not take the money. And the
duke went with the abbess and her newly found husband
and children into the convent, to hear this happy family
discourse at leisure of the blessed ending of their adverse
fortunes. And the two Dromios' humble joy must not
be forgotten; they had their congratulations and greet-
ings too, and each Dromio pleasantly complimented his
brother on his good looks, being well pleased to see his
own person (as in a glass) show so handsome in his
brother.
Adriana had so well profited by the good counsel of
her mother-in-law that she never after cherished unjust
suspicions, or was jealous of her husband.
Antipholus of Syracuse married the fair Luciana, the
sister of his brother's wife; and the good old JSgeon,
408


THE MERCHANT OF VENICE
little fortune by living in too expensive a manner for
his slender means, as young men of high rank with small
fortunes are too apt to do. Whenever Bassanio wanted
money, Antonio assisted him; and it seemed as if they
had but one heart and one purse between them.
One day Bassanio came to Antonio, and told him that
he wished to repair his fortune by a wealthy marriage
with a lady whom he dearly loved, whose father, that
was lately dead, had left her sole heiress to a large
estate; and that in her father's lifetime he used to visit
at her house, when he thought he had observed this lady
had sometimes from her eyes sent speechless messages
that seemed to say he would be no unwelcome suitor;
but not having money to furnish himself with an appear-
ance befitting the lover of so rich an heiress, he besought
Antonio to add to the many favors he had shown him, by
lending him three thousand ducats.
Antonio had no money by him at that time to lend
his friend; but expecting soon to have some ships come
home laden with merchandise, he said he would go to
Shylock, the rich money-lender, and borrow the money
upon the credit of those ships.
Antonio and Bassanio went together to Shylock, and
Antonio asked the Jew to lend him three thousand
ducats upon any interest he should require, to be paid
out of the merchandise contained in his ships at sea.
On this, Shylock thought within himself, "If I can
once catch him on the hip, I will feed fat the ancient
grudge I bear him: he hates our Jewish nation; he lends
out money gratis; and among the merchants he rails
at me and my well-earned bargains which he calls
411


THE MERCHANT OF VENICE
wished to honor her Bassanio, she had said to him with
such a meek and wifelike grace that she would submit
in all things to be governed by his superior wisdom, yet
being now called forth into action by the peril of her
honored husband's friend, she did nothing doubt her
own powers, and by the sole guidance of her own true
and perfect judgment, at once resolved to go herself to
Venice, and speak in Antonio's defense.
Portia had a relation who was a counselor in the law.
To this gentleman, whose name was Bellario, she wrote;
and stating the case to him, desired his opinion, and
that with his advice he would also send her the dress
worn by a counselor. When the messenger returned
he brought letters from Bellario of advice how to pro-
ceed, and also everything necessary for her equipment.
Portia dressed herself and her maid Nerissa in men's
apparel, and putting on the robes of a counselor, she
took Nerissa along with her as her clerk; and setting out
immediately, they arrived at Venice on the very day of
the trial. The cause was just going to be heard before
the duke and senators of Venice in the senate house,
when Portia entered this high court of justice, and pre-
sented a letter from Bellario, in which that learned
counselor wrote to the duke, saying, he would have
come himself to plead for Antonio, but that he was
prevented by sickness, and he requested that the learned
young doctor Balthasar (so he called Portia) might be
permitted to plead in his stead. This the duke granted,
much wondering at the youthful appearance of the
stranger, who was prettily disguised by her counselor's
robes and her large wig.
417


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
And now began this important trial. Portia looked
around her, and she saw the merciless Jew; and she saw
Bassanio, but he knew her not in her disguise. He was
standing beside Antonio, in an agony of distress and
fear for his friend.
The importance of the arduous task Portia had en-
gaged in gave this tender lady courage, and she boldly
proceeded in the duty she had undertaken to perform:
and first of all she addressed herself to Shylock; and
allowing that he had a right by the Venetian law to
have the forfeit expressed in the bond, she spoke so
sweetly of the noble quality of mercy as would have
softened any heart but the unfeeling Shylock's; saying,
that it dropped as the gentle rain from heaven upon the
place beneath; and how mercy was a double blessing, it
blessed him that gave, and him that received it: and
how it became monarchs better than their crowns, being
an attribute of God himself; and that earthly power
came nearest to God's in proportion as mercy tempered
justice; and she bid Shylock remember that as we all
pray for mercy, that same prayer should teach us to
show mercy. Shylock only answered her by desiring
to have the penalty forfeited in the bond. "Is he not
able to pay the money?" asked Portia. Bassanio then
offered the Jew the payment of the three thousand
ducats as many times over as he should desire; which
Shylock refusing, and still insisting upon having a
pound of Antonio's flesh, Bassanio begged the learned
young counselor would endeavor to wrest the law a little,
to save Antonio's life. But Portia gravely answered, that
laws once established must never be altered. Shylock
418


THE MERCHANT OF VENICE
hearing Portia say that the law might not be altered,
it seemed to him that she was pleading in his favor,
and he said, "A Daniel is come to judgment! O wise
young judge, how I do honor you! How much elder are
you than your looks?"
Portia now desired Shylock to let her look at the
bond: and when she had read it, she said, "This bond
is forfeited, and by this the Jew may lawfully claim a
pound of flesh, to be by him cut off nearest Antonio's
heart." Then said she to Shylock, "Be merciful: take
the money, and bid me tear the bond." But fio mercy
would the cruel Shylock show; and he said, "By my
soul I swear, there is no power in the tongue of man to
alter me." "Why, then, Antonio," said Portia, "you
must prepare your bosom for the knife;" and while
Shylock was sharpening a long knife with great eager-
ness to cut off the pound of flesh, Portia said to Antonio,
"Have you anything to say?" Antonio, with a calm
resignation, replied that he had but little to say, for that
he had prepared his mind for death. Then he said to
Bassanio, "Give me your hand, Bassanio! Fare you
well! Grieve not that I am fallen into this misfortune
for you. Commend me to your honorable wife, and tell
her how I have loved you!" Bassanio in the deepest
affliction replied, "Antonio, I am married to a wife who
is as dear to me as life itself; but life itself, my wife, and
all the world are not esteemed with me above your life:
I would lose all, I would sacrifice all to this devil here,
to deliver you."
Portia, hearing this, though the kind-hearted lady was
not at all offended with her husband for expressing the
419


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
"Give me my money, and let me go," said Shylock. "I
have it ready," said Bassanio; "here it is."
Shylock was going to take the money, when Portia
again stopped him, saying, "Tarry, Jew; I have yet
another hold upon you. By the laws of Venice, your
wealth is forfeit to the state, for having conspired against
the life of one of its citizens, and your life lies at the
mercy of the duke; therefore down on your knees, and
ask him to pardon you."
The duke then said to Shylock, "That you may see
the difference of our Christian spirit, I pardon you your
life before you ask it; half your wealth belongs to Anto-
nio, the other half comes to the state."
The generous Antonio then said that he would give
up his share of Shylock's wealth, if Shylock would sign
a deed to make it over at his death to his daughter and
her husband; for Antonio knew that the Jew had an
only daughter, who had lately married against his con-
sent to a young Christian, named Lorenzo, a friend of
Antonio's, which had so offended Shylock that he had
disinherited her.
The Jew agreed to this; and being thus disappointed
in his revenge and despoiled of his riches, he said, "I
am ill. Let me go home; send the deed after me, and
I will sign over half my riches to my daughter." — " Get
thee gone, then," said the duke, "and sign it; and if
you repent your cruelty and turn Christian, the state
will forgive you the fine of the other half of your riches."
The duke now released Antonio, and dismissed the
court. He then highly praised the wisdom and ingenuity
of the young counselor, and invited him home to dinner.
422


THE MERCHANT OF VENICE
to the lady Portia, the congratulations and welcomings
of that lady were hardly over, when they perceived
Nerissa and her husband quarreling in a corner of the
room. "A quarrel already?" said Portia. "What is
the matter?" Gratiano replied, "Lady, it is about a
paltry gilt ring that Nerissa gave me, with words upon
it like the poetry on a cutler's knife, Love me, and leave
me not."
"What does the poetry or the value of the ring sig-
nify?" said Nerissa. "You swore to me when I gave it
to you, that you would keep it till the hour of death;
and now you say you gave it to the lawyer's clerk. I
know you gave it to a woman." — "By this hand,"
replied Gratiano, "I gave it to a youth, a kind of boy,
a little scrubbed boy, no higher than yourself; he was
clerk to the young counselor that by his wise pleading
saved Antonio's life: this prating boy begged it for a fee,
and I could not for my life deny him." Portia said,
"You were to blame, Gratiano, to part with your wife's
first gift. I gave my lord Bassanio a ring, and I am
sure he would not part with it for all the world."
Gratiano, in excuse for his fault, now said, "My lord
Bassanio gave his ring away to the counselor, and then
the boy, his clerk, that took some pains in writing, he
begged my ring."
Portia, hearing this, seemed very angry, and re-
proached Bassanio for giving away her ring; and she
said Nerissa had taught her what to believe, and that
she knew some woman had the ring. Bassanio was very
unhappy to have so offended his dear lady, and he said
with great earnestness, "No, by my honor, no woman
425


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
had it, but a civil doctor, who refused three thousand
ducats of me, and begged the ring, which, when I
denied him, he went displeased away. What could I
do, sweet Portia? I was so beset with shame for my
seeming ingratitude, that I was forced to send the ring
after him. Pardon me, good lady; had you been there,
I think you would have begged the ring of me to give
the worthy doctor."
"Ah!" said Antonio, "I am the unhappy cause of
these quarrels!"
Portia bid Antonio not to grieve at that, for that
he was welcome notwithstanding; and then Antonio
said, "I once did lend my body for Bassanio's sake;
and but for him to whom your husband gave the ring,
I should have now been dead. I dare be bound again,
my soul upon the forfeit, your lord will nevermore
break his faith with you." — "Then you shall be his
surety," said Portia; "give him this ring, and bid him
keep it better than the other."
When Bassanio looked at this ring, he was strangely
surprised to find it the same he gave away; and then
Portia told him how she was the young counselor, and
Nerissa was her clerk; and Bassanio found, to his un-
speakable wonder and delight, that it was by the noble
courage and wisdom of his wife that Antonio's life was
saved.
And Portia again welcomed Antonio, and gave him
letters which by some chance had fallen into her hands,
which contained an account of Antonio's ships, that were
supposed lost, being safely arrived in the harbor. So
these tragical beginnings of this rich merchant's story
426


THE NEW YORK
PUBLIC LIBRARY
ASTOR. I,''N"X A V r>
TILDf^N F'TNO V I"!-'S
R


THE TEMPEST
By Charles and Mary Lamb
THERE was a certain island in the sea, the only in-
habitants of which were an old man, whose name
was Prospero, and his daughter Miranda, a very beauti-
ful young lady. She came to this island so young that
she had no memory of having seen any other human face
than her father's.
They lived in a cave or cell, made out of a rock; it was
divided into several apartments, one of which Prospero
called his study; there he kept his books, which chiefly
treated of magic, a study at that time much affected by
all learned men: and the knowledge of this art he found
very useful to him; for, being thrown by a strange chance
upon this island, which had been enchanted by a witch
called Sycorax, who died there a short time before his
arrival, Prospero, by virtue of his art, released many
good spirits that Sycorax had imprisoned in the bodies
of large trees, because they had refused to execute her
wicked commands. These gentle spirits were ever after
obedient to the will of Prospero. Of these Ariel was the
chief.
The lively little sprite Ariel had nothing mischievous
in his nature, except that he took rather too much
pleasure in tormenting an ugly monster called Caliban,
for he owed him a grudge because he was the son of his
428


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
they will all perish. If I had power, I would sink the sea
beneath the earth, rather than the good ship should be
destroyed, with all the precious souls within her."
"Be not so amazed, daughter Miranda," said Pros-
pero; "there is no harm done. I have so ordered it,
that no person in the ship shall receive any hurt. What
I have done has been in care of you, my dear child. You
are ignorant who you are, or where you came from, and
you know no more of me but that I am your father and
live in this poor cave. Can you remember a time before
you came to this cell? I think you cannot, for. you were
not then three years of age."
"Certainly I can, sir," replied Miranda.
"By what?" asked Prospero; "by any other house
or person? Tell me what you can remember, my
child."
Miranda said, "It seems to me like the recollection of
a dream. But had I not once four or five women who
attended upon me?"
Prospero answered, "You had, and more. How is it
that this still lives in your mind? Do you remember how
you came here?"
"No, sir," said Miranda," I remember nothingmore."
"Twelve years ago, Miranda," continued Prospero,
"I was duke of Milan, and you were a princess, and my
only heir. I had a younger brother, whose name was
Antonio, to whom. I trusted everything; and as I was
fond of retirement and deep study, I commonly left the
management of my state affairs to your uncle, my false
brother (for so indeed he proved). I, neglecting all
worldly ends, buried among my books, did dedicate my
430


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
storm my enemies, the king of Naples and my cruel
brother, are cast ashore upon this island."
Having so said, Prospero gently touched his daughter
with his magic wand, and she fell fast asleep; for the
spirit Ariel just then presented himself before his master,
to give an account of the tempest, and how he had dis-
posed of the ship's company; and, though the spirits were
always invisible to Miranda, Prospero did not choose
she should hear him holding converse (as would seem
to her) with the empty air.
"Well, my brave spirit," said Prospero to Ariel, "how
have you performed your task?"
Ariel gave a lively description of the storm, and the
terrors of the mariners; and how the king's son, Ferdi-
nand, was the first who leaped into the sea; and his
father thought he saw his dear son swallowed up by
the waves and lost. "But he is safe," said Ariel, "in a
corner of the isle, sitting with his arms folded, sadly
lamenting the loss of the king his father, whom he con-
cludes drowned. Not a hair of his head is injured, and
his princely garments, though drenched in the sea waves,
look fresher than before."
"That's my delicate Ariel," said Prospero. "Bring
him hither; my daughter must see this young prince.
Where is the king, and my brother?"
"I left them," answered Ariel, "searching for Ferdi-
nand, whom they have little hopes of finding, thinking
they saw him perish. Of the ship's crew not one is miss-
ing; though each one thinks himself the only one saved;
and the ship, though invisible to them, is safe in the
harbor."
432


THE TEMPEST
"Ariel," said Prospero, "thy charge is faithfully per-
formed; but there is more work yet."
"Is there more work?" said Ariel. "Let me remind
you, master, you have promised me my liberty. I pray,
remember, I have done you worthy service, told you no
lies, made no mistakes, served you without grudge or
grumbling."
"How now!" said Prospero. "You do not recollect
what a torment I freed you from. Have you forgot the
wicked witch Sycorax, who with age and envy was almost
bent double? Where was she born? Speak; tell me."
"Sir, in Algiers," said Ariel.
"Oh, was she so?" said Prospero. "I must recount
what you have been, which I find you do not remember.
This bad witch, Sycorax, for her witchcrafts, too terrible
to enter human hearing, was banished from Algiers, and
here left by the sailors; and because you were a spirit
too delicate to execute her wicked commands, she shut
you up in a tree, where I found you howling. This tor-
ment, remember, I did free you from."
"Pardon me, dear master," said Ariel, ashamed to
seem ungrateful; "I will obey your commands."
"Do so," said Prospero, "and I will set you free."
He then gave orders what further he would have him
do; and away went Ariel, first to where he had left
Ferdinand, and found him still sitting on the grass in
the same melancholy posture.
"O my young gentleman," said Ariel, when he saw
Jiim, "I will soon move you. You must be brought, I
find, for the lady Miranda to have a sight of your pretty
person. Come, sir, follow me." He then began singing,
•433


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
"Full fathom five thy father lies;
Of his bones are coral made;
Those are pearls that were his eyes:
Nothing of him that doth fade
But doth suffer a sea change
Into something rich and strange.
Sea nymphs hourly ring his knell:
Hark, now I hear them — Ding-dong-bell."
This strange news of his lost father soon roused the
prince from the stupid fit into which he had fallen. He
followed in amazement the sound of Ariel's voice till
it led him to Prospero and Miranda, who were sitting
under the shade of a large tree. Now, Miranda had
never seen a man before, except her own father.
"Miranda," said Prospero, "tell me what you are
looking at yonder."
"O father," said Miranda in a strange surprise,
"surely that is a spirit. Lord! how it looks about! Be-
lieve me, sir, it is a beautiful creature. Is it not a spirit?"
"No, girl," answered her father; "it eats, and sleeps,
and has senses such as we have. This young man you
see was in the ship. He is somewhat altered by grief, or
you might call him a handsome person. He has lost his
companions, and is wandering about to find them."
Miranda, who thought all men had grave faces and
gray beards like her father, was delighted with the ap-
pearance of this beautiful young prince; and Ferdinand,
seeing such a lovely lady in this desert place, and, from
the strange sounds he had heard, expecting nothing but
wonders, thought he was upon an enchanted island, and.
that Miranda was the goddess of the place, and as such
he began to address her.
434 •


THE TEMPEST
She timidly answered, she was no goddess, but a
simple maid, and was going to give him an account of
herself, when Prospero interrupted her. He was well
pleased to find they admired each other, for he plainly
perceived they had (as we say) fallen in love at first sight,
but to try Ferdinand's constancy, he resolved to throw
some difficulties in their way; therefore, advancing for-
ward, he addressed the prince with a stern air, telling
him he came to the island as a spy, to take it from him
who was the lord of it. "Follow me," said he; "I will
tie you neck and feet together. You shall drink sea-
water; shellfish, withered roots, and husks of acorns
shall be your food." "No," said Ferdinand, "I will
resist such entertainment, till I see a more powerful
enemy," and drew his sword; but Prospero, waving his
magic wand, fixed him to the spot where he stood, so
that he had no power to move.
Miranda hung upon her father, saying, "Why are you
so ungentle? Have pity, sir; I will be his surety. This
is the second man I ever saw, and to me he seems a true
one."
"Silence," said the father; "one word more will make
me chide you, girl! What! an advocate for an impostor!
You think there are no more such fine men, having seen
only him and Caliban. I tell you, foolish girl, most men
as far excel this, as he does Caliban." This he said to
prove his daughter's constancy; and she replied, "My
affections are most humble. I have no wish to see a
goodlier man."
"Come on, young man," said Prospero to the prince;
"you have no power to disobey me."
435


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
Prospero prevented Ferdinand's thanks by appearing
visible before them.
"Fear nothing, my child," said he;" I have overheard,
and approve of all you have said. And, Ferdinand, if I
have too severely used you, I will make you rich amends
by giving you my daughter. All your vexations were but
trials of your love, and you have nobly stood the test.
Then as my gift, which your true love has worthily pur-
chased, take my daughter, and do not smile that I boast
she is above all praise." He then, telling them that he
had business which required his presence, desired they
would sit down and talk together till he returned; and
this command Miranda seemed not at all disposed to
disobey.
When Prospero left them, he called his spirit Ariel,
who quickly appeared before him, eager to relate what
he had done with Prospero's brother and the king of
Naples. Ariel said he had left them almost out of their
senses with fear at the strange things he had caused
them to see and hear. When fatigued with wandering
about, and famished for want of food, he had suddenly
set before them'a delicious banquet, and then, just as
they were going to eat, he appeared visible before them
in the shape of a harpy, a voracious monster with wings,
and the feast vanished away. Then, to their utter amaze-
ment, this seeming harpy spoke to them, reminding
them of their cruelty in driving Prospero from his duke-
dom, and leaving him and his infant daughter to perish
in the sea; saying that for this cause these terrors were
suffered to afflict them.
The king of Naples and Antonio, the false brother,
438


THE TEMPEST
repented the injustice they had done to Prospero; and
Ariel told his master he was certain their penitence was
sincere, and that he, though a spirit, could not but pity
them.
"Then bring them hither, Ariel," said Prospero; "if
you, who are but a spirit, feel for their distress, shall not
I, who am a human being like themselves, have compas-
sion on them? Bring them quickly, my dainty Ariel."
Ariel soon returned with the king, Antonio, and old
Gonzalo in their train, who had followed him, wondering
at the wild music he played in the air to draw them on to
his master's presence. This Gonzalo was the same who
had so kindly provided Prospero formerly with books
and provisions, when his wicked brother left him, as he
thought, to perish in an open boat in the sea.
Grief and terror had so stupefied their senses that
they did not know Prospero. He first discovered himself
to the good old Gonzalo, calling him the preserver of his
life; and then his brother and the king knew that he was
the injured Prospero.
Antonio, with tears and sad words of sorrow and true
repentance, implored his brother's forgiveness; and the
king expressed his sincere remorse for having assisted
Antonio to depose his brother; and Prospero forgave
them, and upon their engaging to restore his dukedom,
he said to the king of Naples, "I have a gift in store for
you, too;" and, opening a door, showed him his son
Ferdinand playing at chess with Miranda.
Nothing could exceed the joy of the father and the son
at this unexpected meeting, for they each thought the
other drowned in the storm.
439


TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE
"O wonder!" said Miranda, "what noble creatures
these are! It must surely be a brave world that has such
people in it."
The king of Naples was almost as much astonished
at the beauty and the excellent graces of the young
Miranda as his son had been. "Who is this maid?"
said he; "she seems the goddess that has parted us and
brought us thus together." "No, sir," answered Ferdi-
nand, smiling to find his father had fallen into the same
mistake that he had made when he first saw Miranda,
"she is a mortal, but by immortal Providence she is
mine; I chose her when I could not ask you, my father,
for your consent, not thinking you were alive. She is
the daughter to this Prospero, who is the famous duke
of Milan, of whose renown I have heard so much, but
never saw him till now; of him I have received a new
fife, — he has made himself to me a second father, giv-
ing me this dear lady."
"Then I must be her father," said the king; "but oh,
how oddly will it sound, that I must ask my child for-
giveness!"
"No more of that," said Prospero; "let us not re-
member our troubles past, since they so happily have
ended." And then Prospero embraced his brother, and
again assured him of his forgiveness; and said that
a wise overruling Providence had permitted that he
should be driven from his poor dukedom of Milan, that
his daughter might inherit the crown of Naples, for that
by their meeting in this desert island, it had happened
that the king's son had loved Miranda.
These kind words which Prospero spoke, meaning to
440


THE TEMPEST
comfort his brother, so filled Antonio with shame and
remorse that he wept and was unable to speak; and the
kind old Gonzalo wept to see this joyful reconciliation,
and prayed for blessings on the young couple.
Prospero now told them that their ship was safe in
the harbor, and the sailors all on board her, and that
he and his daughter would accompany them home the
next morning. "In the meantime," says he, "partake
of such refreshments as my poor cave affords; and for
your evening's entertainment I will relate the history of
my life from my first landing in this desert island." He
then called for Caliban to prepare some food, and set
the cave in order; and the company were astonished at
the uncouth form and savage appearance of this ugly
monster, who (Prospero said) was the only attendant he
had to wait upon him.
Before Prospero left the island, he dismissed Ariel
from his service, to the great joy of that lively little
spirit, who, though he had been a faithful servant to his
master, was always longing to enjoy his free liberty, to
wander uncontrolled in the air, like a wild bird, under
green trees, among pleasant fruits and sweet-smelling
flowers. "My quaint Ariel," said Prospero to the little
sprite when he made him free, "I shall miss you; yet
you shall have your freedom." "Thank you, my dear
master," said Ariel; "but give me leave to attend your
ship home with prosperous gales, before you bid farewell
to the assistance of your faithful spirit; and then, master,
when I am free, how merrily I shall live!" Here Ariel
sang this pretty song: —
441